JP7212906B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine (generally called a "pachinko machine") and a reel-type game machine (generally called a "pachislot machine").

A conventional gaming machine is provided with a plate portion below a game area in a front view, in which game media to be shot into the game area are stored. (For example, Patent Document 1)

JP 2006-346369 A

However, in a gaming machine having such a dish portion, a more suitable structure is required for the vicinity of the dish portion.

Therefore, the present invention proposes a suitable configuration for the vicinity of the plate portion.

The present invention
A game machine having a front door,
an upper plate provided on the front door;
a bulging portion having a decoration decorating the front of the upper plate and configured to bulge forward of the front door;
A predetermined effect operation unit arranged in the arrangement area formed in the bulging portion,
The arrangement area includes an opening area in which at least a part of the front wall of the bulging portion is opened,
the vertical dimension of the opening region is larger than the vertical dimension of the upper plate,
At least a part of the upper tray and a game ball positioned below the upper tray and ejected from the upper tray flows from the outside through the arrangement area in a state where the effect operation unit is removed from the arrangement area. characterized in that at least a part of the inflow part is visible.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a suitable configuration for the vicinity of the plate portion .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled an outer frame and was seen from the front. (a) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) exploded. be. (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an outer upper hinge member; Fig. 10 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the body-side upper hinge member is attached to the; It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect|action of the locking member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19; FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19; FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 19; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit in a door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a back perspective view of the ball feeding unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the front with the lid member removed, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back with the lid member removed. FIG. 4 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed; (a) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a front perspective view of the handle unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the handle unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. (a) is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame as seen from the front right, and (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit as seen from the front left. (a) is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the lower left rear. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged portion of the lower tray with the lower tray cover removed from the cross-sectional view of FIG. 28 ; (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guide portion, and (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a different ball guide portion from (a). and (c) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a different ball guiding portion is provided. (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing a divisible lower tray, and (b) is an explanation schematically showing a state in which the storage area of the lower tray is expanded according to the size of the space behind the production operation unit. It is a figure and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the bottom plate of (b) by a schematic perspective view. (a) is a front view of the production operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. (a) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the back. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends; FIG. 48(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 48(a). FIG. 48B is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 48(b). 48(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 48(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the rear. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the decoration board unit of the effect operation unit, which is exploded and viewed from the front; (a) is a front perspective view of the base unit of the production operation unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the base unit of the production operation unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the base unit of the production|presentation operation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the base unit of the production|presentation operation unit, and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in sectional drawing of the production|presentation operation unit of FIG. (a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a portion of the operation button is cut away to show the portion that is to be hidden by the first button decorative portion of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a portion of an operation button to be hidden by a first button decorative portion, a button frame, or the like in a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. . (a) is a front view of a second effect operation unit having a different embodiment from the effect operation unit shown in FIGS. 48 to 63, and (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. (a) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd production|presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd production|presentation operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production|presentation operation unit from the direction where the central axis of an operation button is extended. FIG. 64(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG in FIG. 64(a). FIG. 64(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line HH. 64(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line II in FIG. 64(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of the A portion in (a). It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the 2nd production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 2nd production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit and viewed from the rear. be. It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd base unit of the 2nd production|presentation operation unit from the front. (a) is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward; It is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends in a forward direction. 74(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 74(a), and FIG. 74(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 74(b). (a) is a view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen facing forward, and is intended to be hidden by the first button decorative portion of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the portion that is to be hidden by the first button decorative portion of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the second effect operation unit in the state of (a); is. (a) shows an attempt to hide the second effect operation unit by the first button decorative portion of the operation button, the button frame, etc., when viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, with the sub-screen facing forward. (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the portion that is to be hidden by the first button decorative portion of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the second effect operation unit in the state of (a); is. (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. is a perspective view. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 78 is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 78(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. is a perspective view. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 82(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 82(a). 82(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the NN line in FIG. 82(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the OO line in FIG. 82(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a front perspective view of the door frame top unit, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the door frame top unit. is. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 88 is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 87; It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the perspective view which looked at the paying-out unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the paying-out unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the dispensing unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball guiding unit. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the sphere guidance unit; FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the dispensing device. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the payment|withdrawal apparatus, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the payment|withdrawal apparatus, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line QQ in (a). (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the ball removing movable piece closes the ball removing passage in the dispensing device, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the ball removing movable piece opens the ball removing passage. (a) is a front perspective view of the upper full ball path unit in the dispensing unit, and (b) is a back perspective view of the upper full ball path unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full ball path unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full ball path unit as seen from the rear. (a) is a front perspective view of the lower full ball path unit in the dispensing unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the lower full ball path unit. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the lower full-tank ball path|route unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the lower full-tank ball path|route unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening/closing door is closed in the lower full-tank ball route unit, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening/closing door is open. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full-tank ball path unit; It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the payout unit. It is a front view of a game board. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. It is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 117 as seen from the front; FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 117, viewed from behind; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the part of the function display unit enlarged from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine. FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel in a form different from that of FIG. 117, seen from the front together with the front structural member, the substrate holder, and the main control unit; Figure 122 is an exploded perspective view of Figure 121 as seen from behind; It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board and a peripheral control board. 124 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 123; FIG. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input to and output from a game ball lending device connection terminal plate that relays electrical connections between a payout control board that constitutes the main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. 124 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 123; FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU; FIG. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal and a sound control part. It is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine. FIG. 130 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 129; It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing an inter-board communication interface circuit between a main control board and a peripheral control board; FIG. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. FIG. 136 is a circuit diagram continued from FIG. 135; It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit; FIG. 4 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals on an external terminal plate; 4 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device; FIG. It is a block diagram mainly showing a peripheral control board and an upper decoration drive board. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit arranged on the upper decoration drive board; 144 is a continuation of the circuit diagram of FIG. 143. FIG. 145 is a continuation of the circuit diagram of FIG. 144. FIG. 146 is a continuation of the circuit diagram of FIG. 145. FIG. 147 is a continuation of the circuit diagram of FIG. 146. FIG. (A) is a table showing the excitation data of the stepping motor, (B) is a timing chart of the excitation data serially transmitted from the peripheral control board to the upper decoration drive board, and (C) is the excitation of the stepping motor. FIG. 4 shows the order of phases in tabular form; (A) is a diagram showing the serial data reception order in a tabular form, and (B) is a reception timing chart of serial data transmitted from the upper decoration drive board to the peripheral control board. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing; 7 is a flowchart showing an example of determination information determination processing executed by a peripheral control MPU;

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1, which is an embodiment of the game machine of the present invention, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls are hit by.

The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 is, as shown in FIGS. 20 are connected to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 .

The outer frame 2 includes a panel member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, and attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 . The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 .

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a vertically extending rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100.例文帳に追加A handle unit 300 which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by a player to hit a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. A plate unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface below the plate unit 320 and a plate unit 320 attached to the center of the plate unit 320. According to the game state that changes when a game ball is hit into the game area 5a, the player can A performance operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory performance, and a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320. , a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right portion on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, a door frame left side unit 530, and a door frame right side unit 550. and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the front upper part of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100 .

The body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 consists of a frame-shaped body frame base 600 which can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame base 600. It is attached to both upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 in front view, and a main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 680 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a right side surface of the main body frame base 600, which is attached to the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and a locking unit 700 for locking between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and a reverse side mounted on the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in the front view to pay out game balls to the player side. An L-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main body frame base 600. and a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the.

The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 includes an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a dispensing unit base 801 attached to the top of the dispensing unit base 801 and extending to the left and right to open upward. A box-shaped ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown), and a ball tank 802 attached to a payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 in front view and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 are detachably attached to the lower side of the payout unit base 801 and paid out one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. and a payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 to guide the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward and to release the game balls according to the state of storage of the game balls on the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. An upper full ball path unit 850 that discharges from either a normal discharge port 850d or a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801 and discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 A normal guiding path 861 that guides game balls forward and guides them from the front end to the through-ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and guides forward game balls released from the full tank release port 850e to guide the game balls forward and guides the game balls forward from the front end to the full ball passage 273 of the door frame 3. and a lower full ball path unit 860 having a full guideway 862 leading to the tank ball receptacle 274 .

The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600, and a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front and having a bass speaker installed therein. 921, a power supply board box 930 attached to the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and housing a power supply board therein, and a power supply board box 930 attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and inside the box. An interface control board box 940 housing an interface control board, and a payout control board 951 installed across the power board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 to control the payout of game balls are housed inside. A payout control board box 950 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of a game area 5a into which game balls are hit, and shoots game balls from the ball launching device 680 into the upper portion of the game area 5a. A front structural member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guide to the front, and a flat plate-like game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. there is

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a player rotates the handle 302 while game balls are stored in the upper tray 321, the ball launcher 680 shoots the game ball with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 . Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are accepted by the winning openings, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 by the paying-out device 830 according to the accepted winning openings. Since the payout of the game balls can enhance the interest of the player, the game balls in the upper tray 321 can be hit into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. 13 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 14 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 16(a) is a perspective view of the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) exploded. It is a diagram. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are separated vertically and extend left and right, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 are connected to each other. and a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending to. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 . Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the laterally outwardly facing side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are flush with each other. It is

In addition, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in a front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be opened and closed by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 .

In addition, the outer frame 2 includes a panel member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, and attached to the rear side of the panel member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively; a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 at a position to the left from the center of the left and right; A flat plate-shaped right sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50 . The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) and attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40. As shown in FIG.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. In addition, the outer frame 2 includes an upper hooking member 90 and a lower hooking member 91 which are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and engage an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700 which will be described later. , is equipped.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
An upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 has engaging cutouts 11 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right ends. Upper lateral fixing portions 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 are mounted in the engaging notch portion 11 . In addition, the upper frame member 10 has mounting steps 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end in front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12 .

[2-2. Lower frame member]
A lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed so that its lateral length and vertical thickness are the same as those of the upper frame member 10, and its front and rear width is equal to that of the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the front and back width of the . The lower frame member 20 has engagement cutouts 21 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right ends. In the engaging notch portion 21, a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of a left lower connecting member 85C and a lower right connecting member 85D, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is attached.

In addition, the lower frame member 20 has front end notches 22 recessed rearward from the front surfaces of both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20 , the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10 . When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2 , the portion between the left and right front end cutouts 22 is inserted into the panel member 50 .

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed by extrusions of metal such as aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in shapes symmetrical to each other in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from a position rearward of the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end on the lateral outer side surfaces. It has concave portions 31 and 41 and protruding portions 32 and 42 which protrude from the side surfaces opposite to the concave portions 31 and 41 and have hollow interiors. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42 . Further, lower lateral fixing portions 88 on the rear side of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85 are inserted and attached into the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively.

In addition, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on their surfaces. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility such as a game hall or is transported by the plurality of grooves, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a worker's finger, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with an open rear side. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extension portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end in the front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape with a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically in a size that allows a game ball to pass through on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension part 51, A vertical wall portion 54 extending upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearwardly extending portion 51, and a front surface bulging forward from near the upper end of the vertical wall portion 54. and a return portion 55 that inclines toward the rear as it goes toward.

The curtain plate member 50 is mounted on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 on the front side and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 . A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position that coincides with a later-described discharge hole 74 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2 . Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in the assembled state with the outer frame 2 . The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52 .

Further, the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined so that the front end side is lower. The curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the top surface, and a right mounting portion 56 for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the top surface. a portion 57; The bottom surface of the body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82 .

As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Although not shown, the panel member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern, thereby enhancing strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper fixing portion 61 extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. , a bearing groove 63 extending from the right end of the forward extending portion 62 to the center of the front extending portion 62 toward the front and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing portion 61 in plan view. A flat plate-shaped lateral fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a lateral fixing portion extending downward from the left end of the forward extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 opens around the front end thereof. A flat plate-like hanging portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 16(b), etc.).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). there is Further, the forward extending portion 62 extends forward beyond the front end of the upper frame member 10 . Further, the horizontal fixing portion 64 is inserted into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above and fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63 to move the main body frame 4. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 consists of a band plate-shaped lock body 66a extending forward and backward with a predetermined width on both sides and an operation portion projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a and then obliquely forward left, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d and. This lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 62 of the outer-frame-side upper hinge member 60 with a mounting screw 67 .

The rear end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is attached to a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the forward extending portion 62 of the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. Further, when the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. The hanging portion 65 of 60 extends forward so as to come into contact with the portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame upper hinge member 60. As shown in FIG. The lock member 66 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 near the front end is in contact with the drooping portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space capable of accommodating a body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620, which will be described later, is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock body 66a.

By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. By operating the operation portion 66b to rotate the lock body 66a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. can be in a state in which the As a result, the main frame hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63 or removed from the bearing groove 63 .

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 includes a flat plate-like horizontal portion 71 extending horizontally and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 which is located rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. A raised plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and the horizontal portion 71 are penetrated vertically so that only one game ball can pass through. and a sized discharge hole 74 . The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer-frame-side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71 . The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the center portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 in an inverted U shape. This discharge hole 74 is formed to have approximately the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 .

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the panel member 50 and the rear extension portion 51 . is fixed to the panel reinforcement member 80 by a screw (not shown) passing through the upper surface of the panel member 50 . When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 with a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 . In cooperation with the hinge member 60, the body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed.

In addition, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 is aligned with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 . Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 . More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls that fall between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 move between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between the two gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the gap is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74 . At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. A game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is discharged from the discharge hole 74 so that it can be easily prevented from rolling backward from the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for a game ball to stay at the part of the lower hinge member 70.例文帳に追加

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting members 85 of the outer frame 2 include an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connection member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40. As shown in FIG.

The connection member 85 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper lateral fixing portion 87 extending upward from one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the horizontal fixing portion. A flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion of 86 from which the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends is provided. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 87. extending downwards. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 spaced apart in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10 . The upper lateral fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engaging notches 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10 . Further, the front lower horizontal fixing portions 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is a screw that is inserted into the projecting portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes further rearward than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and further protrudes further than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward beyond the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the left lower connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. As shown in FIG. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20 . Also, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portions 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notch portions 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the lateral end surfaces of the lower frame member 20, respectively. be.

[2-9. Lock Mechanism of Upper Hinge Member on Outer Frame Side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the locking mechanism of the lock member 66 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 with respect to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. will be described with reference to FIG. 17(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an outer upper side view. FIG. 4 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which a body-side upper hinge member is attached to a hinge member; 18A and 18B are explanatory diagrams showing the action of the locking member on the outer frame.

When the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a is adapted to block a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a V-shape, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not block the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space is formed in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 into which the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

The support mechanism of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in this embodiment is such that the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock body 66a is mounted. is close to the right drooping portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right drooping portion 65, and they are in contact with each other). ), the centers of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock body 66a are diagonally shifted and opposed to each other. state.

In this normal axially supported state, the main body frame hinge pin 622 that supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end face of lock body 66a. In other words, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. As shown in FIG. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 can be smoothly rotated when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. there is Also, in the drawing, the center of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is applied with an acting force F in a direction to pull out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape, and comes into contact with the arc-shaped front end face of the lock body 66a, the acting force is applied. F is the component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the main body frame hinge pin 622 and the arc-shaped front end face, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 and the bearing groove 63. and the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of one side, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). , the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 does not rotate in the direction away from the right drooping portion 65, and the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is positioned between the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the side inner surfaces is maintained.

For this reason, even in a normal axially supported state or a state in which the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always subjected to a load, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. Therefore, it is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c, and prevent the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 from falling out of the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the rightward direction by applying an excessive force, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts the drooping portion 65 and cannot move further. Since it does not rotate, the locking member 66 does not protrude outside the front extending portion 62 .

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the front end of the lock member 66 may be positioned toward the outside of the front extending portion 62 so that no rotational moment is generated by the action of the force component F1. By locating the center of rotation of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a only abuts the hanging portion 65 , so the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62 .

When the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 supports the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert hinge pin 622 . When the main body frame hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main body frame hinge pin 622 contacts the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is pushed against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates around the mounting screw 67 so as to move leftward. As a result, the lock body 66a closing the bearing groove 63 is retracted to open the bearing groove 63, so that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

When the body frame hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is released by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to its normal state. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 is accommodated in the space on the front side of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63 , and the main body frame hinge pin 622 can rotate in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 . state is held (locked).

When removing the body frame upper hinge pin 622 from the bearing groove 63, the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock body 66a moves leftward, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63 .

[2-10. Crime Prevention Mechanism and Ball Engagement Prevention Mechanism at the Location of the Lower Hinge Member on the Outer Frame Side]
Ball biting prevention for preventing a game ball from being caught between a crime prevention mechanism at a portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be explained.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the front view left end portion of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. As shown in FIG. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer-frame-side lower hinge member 70 is attached in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the panel member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 . The curtain plate member 50 has a standing wall portion 54 rising upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, Since the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, further insertion of the unauthorized tool to the rear side can be prevented. , tampering through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side can be prevented.

In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with a return portion 55 extending forward, when an unauthorized tool in contact with the standing wall portion 54 is bent upward, the return portion 55 bends the tip of the unauthorized tool. can be further folded forward, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and fraudulent actions can be performed through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side. can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is placed on the outer frame side in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When dropped onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not ejected backward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54. There is a risk of being caught between On the other hand, in this embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 are provided with a discharge hole 74 and a left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass. , and the right ejection hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be ejected downward from the ejection hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be ejected downward. It is possible to reduce the pinching of the game ball between.

Therefore, if a game ball is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 may be damaged, or the main body frame 4 may not be closed in a normal state. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the body frame 4 and fraudulent acts using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. FIG. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view cut along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross-section cut along line CC in FIG. It is a diagram. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 has a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100. a handle unit 300 attached to the door frame base unit 100, a plate unit 320 attached to the front lower portion of the door frame base unit 100, a performance operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. A door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side unit 550 and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 .

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear directions, and has a vertically extending rectangular (quadrangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, although the details will be described later. , a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and attached to both upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge rotatable. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, The door frame 3 and the body frame 4, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed, and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 are locked. a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 for sending game balls to the ball shooting device 680; and a ball shooting device 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. and a foul cover unit 270 for receiving a game ball which is shot by and does not reach the game area 5a and discharges it to the lower tray 322. - 特許庁

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 rotates the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 when the player rotates the rotatable handle 302, which will be described later in detail. The ball can be hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strong force.

The plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, which will be described later in detail, is attached to a portion below the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. A production operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 includes an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be hit into the game area 5a, and an upper plate 321 arranged below the upper plate 321 for receiving game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. A lower tray 322 that can be stored, an upper tray ball extraction button 327 for extracting game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, and within the range of the balance of cash and prepaid cards thrown into the ball lending machine A ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to the player, a return button 329 for returning the cash or prepaid card after deducting the amount of the game balls lent from the ball lending machine, and the cash put into the ball lending machine. , a ball rental/return display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 that can be operated by the player when presenting an effect, A lower tray ball ejection button 333 for discharging game balls downward from the tray unit 320 is provided.

The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front part of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player. It is possible. Although details will be described later, the effect operation unit 400 includes a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that is arranged in the operation button 410 so as to be visible from the player side and can display the effect image. and a display device 460 .

The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320 and to the left of the through hole 111 in the through hole 111 ( It decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decoration lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light.

The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3, which will be described later in detail, is attached to the front right portion on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and the through hole 111 ( It decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes farther forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides, and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided at the front end. A right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is mounted above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. Although details will be described later, the door frame top unit 570 includes a pair of upper speakers 573 separated left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 projecting forward at the center of the front surface, and left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are decorated. The door frame top unit 570 can decorate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 with light emission.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31-33. FIG. 31(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 31(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and Fig. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable (hinge rotatable) so that the left side in front view closes the front surface of the body frame 4 . The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 at the lower corner of the front surface, a plate unit 320 to which the effect operation unit 400 is attached at the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 at the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. A door frame right side unit 550 and a door frame top unit 570 are attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111 and the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a vertically extending rectangular shape when viewed from the front and having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear direction. , a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a frame-like reinforcing unit 130 attached to both upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, projecting forward from the door frame base 110 and projecting from the main body frame 4. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front surface of the door frame base 110 and the front surface of the through hole 111. A door frame left side decorative substrate 160 mounted on the left side of the view and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a glass unit 190 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 are detachably mounted. and a glass unit mounting member 170 for.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110 at the lower right corner in front view, and is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a cylindrical handle mounting member 180 for mounting the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 for closing the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 for covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an opening/closing cylinder unit attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210 , a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 , and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 .

Further, although illustration is omitted, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feed solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental return display unit 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , the upper speaker 573 , etc., and a door body relay board for relaying connection with the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the body frame 4 .

[3-1a. door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame base 110 has a quadrangular (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 110 penetrates in the front-rear direction, and has a through-hole 111 formed in a generally quadrangular shape with an inner circumference extending vertically when viewed from the front. The through-hole 111 has an upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner circumference thereof, which are close to the outer circumference of the door frame base 110 , respectively, and a lower side forming the inner circumference extends vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 110 . It is located at about 1/3 of the height of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole with the through holes 111 penetrating in the front and rear directions. The door frame base 110 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 has a handle mounting seat surface 112 which is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112 and a through hole 111. A cylinder mounting portion 113 to which a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted is recessed from the rear surface toward the front near the right end in front view between the and the cylinder mounting portion 113, and the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 penetrates in the front and rear at the cylinder mounting portion 113. The cylinder insertion hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 are penetrated in the front-rear direction on the left side of the front view. and a ball feed opening 115 for facing the ball.

In addition, the door frame base 110 penetrates in the front and rear direction at a position on the left side of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, so that the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. A passage opening 116 for a lower tray and a through-ball passage 273 of a foul cover unit 270 are penetrated in the front-rear direction so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through-opening 111 near the left end of the door frame base 110 in front view. A plate passage opening 117, a glass unit mounting portion 118 recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner circumference of the through opening 111 and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and both upper left and right sides of the door frame base 110. A speaker insertion opening 119 penetrates in the front and rear direction at the corner and through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. reinforcement unit]
The reinforcement unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (the door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 extending to the left and right and attached along the upper edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 , and a middle reinforcing sheet metal extending to the left and right attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 . A sheet metal 132, a vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the front view left side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a vertically extending right reinforcement sheet attached along the front view right side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A metal plate 134 and a lock engaging portion 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing metal plate 134 and engages the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700 .

In the reinforcement unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. Fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 which will be described later. Therefore, the reinforcement unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by an upper reinforcement sheet metal 131, a middle reinforcement sheet metal 132, a left reinforcement sheet metal 133, a right reinforcement sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the lock engaging portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a notch 132a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the upper tray passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110 .

Although not shown in detail, the reinforcement unit 130 includes an upper reinforcement sheet metal 131, a middle reinforcement sheet metal 132, a left reinforcement sheet metal 133, and a right reinforcement sheet metal 134, each of which has a portion bent in the front-rear direction. This part not only increases the strength and rigidity, but also prevents unauthorized tools such as piano wires and flathead screwdrivers from entering from the outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door-frame-side upper hinge member 140 includes a door-frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 that is attached to the door-frame base 110 and has a pair of projecting pieces 141a that are separated vertically, and a pair of projections of the door-frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A columnar door frame upper hinge pin 142 that passes through the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of projecting pieces 141a on the door frame upper hinge pin 142. A disc-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame, which is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141a of the pair of projecting pieces 141a. and a lock spring 144 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat mounting piece connecting the rear ends of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. It is shaped like a letter. The door-frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a mounting piece that connects a pair of protruding pieces 141a and is attached to the rear surface of the door-frame base 110 with screws.

The door frame upper hinge pin 142 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 at a portion (upper end) that protrudes upward from the upper projecting piece 141a. Further, although illustration is omitted, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 has a portion that protrudes downward from the lower projecting piece 141a and is bent in the horizontal direction. This bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the projecting piece 141a on the lower side, thereby restricting upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. As shown in FIG.

The flange member 143 is an E-ring and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer circumference of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 . The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted, and has its upper end in contact with the flange member 143 and its lower end in contact with the lower projecting piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed in a compressed state between the flange member 143 and the projecting piece 141a on the lower side, and biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143. .

In the door-frame-side upper hinge member 140, the door-frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by a lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door-frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of the piece 141a. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

When an operator holds the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144, the door frame upper hinge member 140 is attached to the door frame. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a. Therefore, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140 can be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620 or removed downward. can be done. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in the front view is moved. , can be hinge-rotatably supported with respect to the body frame 4 .

Further, in the door-frame-side upper hinge member 140, a portion of the door-frame-side upper hinge pin 142 supported by a pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door-frame-side hinge shaft bracket 141 is attached to the door frame of the door-frame-side lower hinge member 150, which will be described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152 . As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state by the door-frame-side upper hinge member 140 and the door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 .

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 includes a door-frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 that is attached to the door-frame base 110 and has a flat plate-like extension piece 151a that extends forward, and A columnar door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) projecting downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extending piece 151a.

The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-like mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a horizontally extending flat plate-like extension piece 151a. is formed in a substantially L shape. The lower door frame hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

The lower door frame hinge pin 152 has a truncated cone shape that narrows downward. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 to be described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 .

The door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 . can support

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame left side decorative board 160 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through hole 111 in front view. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 extends vertically from the height below the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 in the front view to the height near the center of the through opening 111 in the vertical direction. A frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 and a door frame left side lower decoration extending vertically from the height of the position below the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper tray passage opening 117 a substrate 162;

A door-frame left-side upper decorative board 161 and a door-frame left-side lower decorative board 162 of the door-frame left-side decorative board 160 are each provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a capable of emitting light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is positioned behind a door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, with the door frame 3 assembled, and has a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decoration lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 and is used to detachably mount the glass unit 190 . The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base portion 171 mounted rotatably about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-like member protruding from the base portion 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a protrusion 172 that

The glass unit mounting members 170 are rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119 and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 .

The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base portion 171, so that the projecting portion 172 is outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the rear. In this position, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 or removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118 .

With the glass unit 190 inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 , the glass unit mounting member 170 rotates so that the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171 . The rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 is brought into contact with the rear side of the glass unit 190 to restrict the upper portion of the glass unit 190 from moving rearward.

The center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is positioned within the projecting portion 172 because the protruding portion 172 protrudes from the disk-shaped base portion 171 that is rotatably attached to the door frame base 110 . . Therefore, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is freely rotatable, the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171 and is stable. In the glass unit mounting member 170, when the projecting portion 172 is in the rotational position where the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is restricted by the projecting portion 172. Even if the member 170 is subjected to vibration or the like, the whole does not rotate so that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base portion 171, and the rearward movement restriction of the glass unit 190 is not naturally released. Absent.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base portion 171, and the projecting portion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110 .

[3-1g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 . 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and a rear end of the tube portion 181 extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181. An extended annular flange portion 182 and a plurality of ( In this example, three) ridges 183 and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 connecting the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 are provided. .

The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 112 with screws while the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 .

The cylindrical portion 181 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300 . One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side inside the tubular portion 181 and the remaining two are provided on the lower side inside the tubular portion 181 . These three ridges 183 are formed in the handle base 301 at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c. Therefore, in the handle mounting member 180, the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be regulated.

Since the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle mounting member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 so that the cylindrical portion The axis 181 is tilted so as to extend forward right, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a similarly tilted state.

[3-1h. glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 118 , and a glass frame that closes the inside of the glass frame 191 and has a glass frame on the outer periphery. and two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191 . The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space therebetween (see FIG. 26, etc.).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of flat mounting pieces 191a extending outward from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. and a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. A mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can abut against a projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 . The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

This glass unit 190 is obtained by inserting the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the reinforcing sheet metal 132 in the reinforcing unit 130 from above. , the front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface of the door frame base 110 .

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the procedure can be reversed. Thereby, the glass unit 190 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 110 .

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The crime prevention cover 200 includes a flat plate-like body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat plate-like rear projecting piece 202 projecting short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 201, and is spaced apart from the left and right. and a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the body portion 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110 .

The body portion 201 of the crime prevention cover 200 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110 . Further, the upper end of the body portion 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. More specifically, the upper end of the body portion 201 is shaped along a portion of an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003, a portion of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The rear projecting piece 202 is formed along substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201 . Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed into a shallow box-like shape that is opened rearward by the body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the body portion 201 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 201 . A rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body part 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. ing.

Note that the rear projecting piece 202 is not formed at a portion positioned between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, the game ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball shot by the ball shooting device 680) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and is within the game area 5a. It does not interfere with hitting the game ball into.

A pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110 . Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110 .

When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 abuts the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the part protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is The removed rear projecting piece 202 is inserted into the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. In addition, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security concave portion 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire attempts to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the crime prevention concave portion 1008. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Open/close cylinder unit]
The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder attachment portion 113 positioned between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 in the vicinity of the right end of the door frame base 110 in front view, and cooperates with the locking unit 700 described later. It is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4.

The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extending back and forth, and a locking unit attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 to rotate a key inserted into the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 that transmits rotation to the key cylinder 710 of 700, and a cylinder mounting plate 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can be rotated by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a. can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of .

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and is arranged at opposite positions across the central axis from the rear end to the front. It has a pair of cutouts 212a that are cut out in the same direction. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the body frame 4 can be inserted from behind, and projections of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 are inserted into the pair of notches 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted into the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the lock unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and has a convex shape that protrudes forward when viewed from above. More specifically, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 includes a rectangular flat front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of flat plate-like side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. and a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a flat plate shape from the respective rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b in directions away from each other. The cylinder lock 211 penetrates the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 from the rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. Of the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side in front view is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side in front view is attached to the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 . As a result, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 .

When the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100 , the front end of the cylinder lock 211 projecting forward from the front plate portion 213 a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 extends from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the cylinder insertion hole. 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110. A front plate portion 213a and a pair of side plate portions 213b of a cylinder mounting plate 213 are accommodated in a box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is open rearward. ing.

[3-1k. Ball feed unit]
The ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. FIG. 34(a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 34(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the rear with the rear case and the tamper-proof member removed. The ball feeding unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 to the ball launching device 680 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 can be fed to the upper plate ball. By operating the pull-out button 327, it can be pulled out to the lower tray.

In the ball feeding unit 250, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are supplied through the upper plate ball feeding port 323d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feeding opening 115 of the door frame base 110, and are penetrated in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 251 having an entrance port 251a and a ball outlet 251b opening below the entrance port 251a and having an open rear, and a box having an open front while closing the rear end of the front cover 251. A rear cover 252 having a hit ball supply port 252a for supplying game balls entering from an entrance 251a of the front cover 251 penetrating in the longitudinal direction to the ball launching device 680, the rear cover 252 and the front cover. A ball extracting member 253 having a partitioning portion 253a which is rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and partitions the entrance port 251a and the ball extracting port 251b on the rear side of the front cover 251; , the game balls on the partition part 253a of the ball removing member 253 are fed one by one to the hit ball supply port 252a of the rear cover 252, and can be rotated around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252. and a ball-feeding solenoid 255 for rotating the ball-feeding member 254 .

As shown in the figure, this ball feeding unit 250 has a ball feeding member 254 arranged on the right side of an inlet 251a in a front view, and a ball extracting member 253 on the left side of the ball feeding member 254. A ball feed solenoid 255 is arranged on the right side.

The front cover 251 of the ball feeding unit 250 has an arcuate slit 251c formed concentrically with respect to the center of rotation of the ball removing member 253 on the left side of the ball removing opening 251b in front view. An operating rod 253c of a ball removing member 253, which will be described later, extends forward. The upper side of the front cover 251 extends upward from the upper edge of the entry port 251a. It is formed so as to close the part that is open rearward on the end side from the rear side.

The ball extracting member 253 has a partitioning portion 253a which partitions between the inlet port 251a and the ball extracting port 251b below the inlet port 251a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the feed member 254 and bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball extraction port 251b. A rotating rod portion 253b that is movably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 253c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 253b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 253b below the operating rod portion 253c. and a weight portion 253d protruding in the opposite direction to the partition portion 253a. An operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 is formed to protrude forward through an arcuate slit 251c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34(a)). The actuating rod 253c abuts on the upper end of an actuating transmission portion 327a that is operated by pressing the upper tray ball extracting button 327 of the tray unit 320 through the ball feeding opening 115 of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIG.

The ball feeding member 254 has a fan-shaped cut-off portion 254a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the entrance port 251a and the partition portion 253a of the ball extraction member 253, and a rear end of the cut-off portion 254a. A ball holding portion 254b that is recessed in an arc shape toward the center of the rotation shaft, and a rod-shaped rod portion 254c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Also, the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 is sized to hold one game ball. The ball feeding member 254 rotates about the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 255 to move the rod portion 254c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotational axis in the left-right direction.

The ball feed member 254 has a supply position where the blocking portion 254a faces the partition portion 253a and the ball holding portion 254b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 254b communicates with the batted ball supply port 252a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing upwards. When the ball feeding member 254 is at the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 254b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 252a to the ball launching device 680, and the game ball enters the partition portion 253a from the entry port 251a. However, movement toward the ball holding portion 254b (hit ball supply port 252a) is blocked by the blocking portion 254a, and the ball remains on the partition portion 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 254 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 254b faces the partition portion 253a, and the end of the ball holding portion 254b on the rod portion 254c side closes the hit ball supply port 252a. , only one game ball on the partition portion 253a is held in the ball holding portion 254b.

In addition, the ball feed unit 250 includes a ball feed operating rod 256 whose tip is vertically swung by driving (energization) of a ball feed solenoid 255, and the movement of the tip of the ball feed operating rod 256 which is vertically swung to move forward and backward. and a ball feed crank 257 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 254 around an axis that extends in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 257 has an engaging portion 257a that can be engaged with the tip of the ball feed operating rod 256 that moves up and down and that extends in the left-right direction. A shaft portion 257b is arranged on the opposite side and is rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252, and a shaft portion 257b extends upward from the shaft portion 257b to provide a ball feeding mechanism. A transmitting portion 257c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 254c (see FIG. 35(b)) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the member 254 is provided.

This ball feeding unit 250 uses a ball feeding operating rod 256 and a ball feeding crank 257 to transmit the movement of the ball feeding operating rod 256 which swings when driven by a ball feeding solenoid 255 which advances and retreats in the vertical direction, thereby moving the ball feeding member 254. It can be rotated. When the ball-feeding solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the ball-feeding operating rod 256 is separated from the lower end of the ball-feeding solenoid 255 and the tip is positioned downward. is positioned at When the ball-feeding solenoid 255 is driven, the ball-feeding actuation rod 256 is attracted to the lower end of the ball-feeding solenoid 255, the tip of which is positioned upward, and the ball-feeding member 254 rotates to the holding position. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 254 receives one game ball, and when the ball feed solenoid 255 is deactivated (OFF state), the ball feed member 254 can send (supply) the received game ball to the ball launching device 680 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 in the ball feeding unit 250 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 682 by the firing control section (not shown) of the payout control board 951 .

The ball removing member 253 rotatably supported in the ball feeding unit 250 is applied with a moment by the weight portion 253d so as to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front, but it protrudes forward. When the actuating rod 253c comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327a that is operated by pressing the upper tray ball removing button 327 of the tray unit 320, the rotation thereof is restricted. The partition portion 253a separates the entry port 251a and the ball extraction port 251b, and game balls do not enter the ball extraction port 251b side.

When the player presses downward the upper tray ball extractor button 327 of the tray unit 320, the upper tray ball extractor slider 327b slides downward together with the operation transmission portion 327a, and the operation transmission portion 327a moves downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 253c also moves relatively downward. When the operation rod 253c moves downward together with the operation transmission portion 327a, the ball extracting member 253 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the partition between the entrance port 251a and the ball extracting port 251b by the partition portion 253a is released. be done. As a result, the game ball entering from the entry port 251a is discharged from the ball extraction port 251b to the ball removal guiding path 323f of the plate unit 320, and is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 322 through the lower plate ball supply port 323c. be able to.

In addition, the upper disk ball removal slider 327b formed with the operation transmission portion 327a with which the operation rod 253c of the ball removal member 253 abuts is biased upward by the upper disk ball removal spring 327c. Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied to the ball, the impact can be absorbed by the upper tray ball removal spring 327c via the operating rod 253c, and the ball removal member 253 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. , the game ball can be prevented from bouncing off the partition portion 253a.

The ball feeding unit 250 is formed with a rectangular attachment recess 252b (see FIG. 35(b), etc.) recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from the back of the batted ball supply port 252a in the rear cover 252. A tamper-proof member 260 is mounted in the mounting recess 252b. The tamper-proof member 260 of the ball feeding unit 250 is made of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the mounting recess 252b of the rear cover 252 from the rear side.

The tamper-proof member 260 has a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. A lower piece portion 262 and an inclined portion 263 formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 facing each other are provided. . The upper piece 261 of the anti-tamper member 260 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-tamper member 260 so that the right end in a front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece 262 extends flush with the general surface of the anti-tamper member 260 . As a result, in plan view, the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The tamper-proof member 260 is attached to the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 252a. Become.

According to this fraud prevention member 260, an illegal game ball attached with a string is hit into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 680 from the upper plate 321 via the ball feeding unit 250, and attached to the illegal game ball. When a string is operated to make an illegal game ball enter or exit the first starting port 2002 or the like, the force of the illegal game ball shot (hit ball) by the ball launching device 680 causes illegality. A string attached to a game ball is inserted between the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262, and the V shape formed by the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 narrows. It can be cut depending on the part, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using an illegal game ball to which a string is attached.

[3-1 l. foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will now be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 36-38. FIG. 36(a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 36(b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 37(a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the front with the cover member removed, and FIG. 37(b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back with the cover member removed. Furthermore, FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed.

As illustrated, the foul cover unit 270 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 271 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and having an open front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 271. 272 and . The foul cover unit 270 penetrates front and back at the upper left corner in front view and communicates the normal guide path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 with the upper tray ball supply port 323a of the tray unit 320. A passage 273 and a full ball receiving port 274 that opens rearward on the lower right side of the penetrating ball passage 273 in front view and can communicate with the full tank guiding path 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860 of the body frame 4. and have.

In addition, the foul cover unit 270 is open upward on the right side of the full ball socket 274 when viewed from the front and does not reach the game area 5a even though the ball is fired by the ball launching device 680 of the body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 275 for receiving a game ball (foul ball), and a full ball receiving port 274 and a foul ball receiving port 275 which are open forward in the vicinity of the lower right corner in a front view and receive game balls forward. and a ball discharge port 276 that discharges the ball to the plate unit 320 and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit 320.

Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed between a full ball receiving port 274 and a foul ball receiving port 275 and a ball discharge port 276 by a unit main body 271 and a cover member 272, and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 277 having a large width, a flat plate-shaped movable piece 278 that constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277 and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, and a movable piece A full-tank detection sensor 279 that detects the rotation of 278 away from the storage passage 277 and a spring 280 that biases the movable piece 278 toward the center of the storage passage 277 are provided.

When the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 is filled with game balls and the game balls are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 276 to the lower plate 322 side, a certain number of the foul cover units 270 are placed in the storage passage 277. of game balls can be stored. When a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the weight of the game balls causes the upper end of the movable piece 278 to move away from the storage passage 277 against the biasing force of the spring 280. The movable piece 278 rotates at the same time, and the rotation is detected by the full-tank detection sensor 279 . As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 322 is full of game balls. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects that the tank is full, further payout of game balls is stopped. It is possible to inform the player, the staff of the game hall, etc. to that effect and urge them to eliminate the full tank of the lower tray 322.例文帳に追加

Further, the foul cover unit 270 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 and to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 273, and serves as a guideway opening/closing door for the lower full-tank ball path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4, which will be described later. A door opening/closing abutting portion 281 is provided with which the operating protrusion 863e of the 863 can abut (see FIG. 112). The door opening/closing contact portion 281 is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. The door opening/closing abutting portion 281 is formed so that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operation protrusion 863e of the guideway opening/closing door 863 abuts thereon. When the actuating projection 863e of the taxiway opening/closing door 863 contacts the door opening/closing contact portion 281, the taxiway opening/closing door 863 rotates and the downstream ends (front openings) of the normal taxiway 861 and the full-tank taxiway 862 ) can be released.

[3-2. handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. FIG. 39(a) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a front perspective view of the handle unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the handle unit. 40(a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 40(b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by the player to hit the game balls in the upper tray 321 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. is.

The handle unit 300 includes a handle base 301 attached to the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 in the door frame base unit 100, a handle 302 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 301, and a front end side of the handle 302. and a handle cover 303 attached to the handle base 301 .

The handle unit 300 has an inner base 304 attached to the front of the handle base 301 on the rear side of the handle 302, and the handle 302 is attached to the front end of the handle unit 300. A shaft member 305 having a drive gear portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 meshing with the drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, and a detection shaft 307a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 306. and a handle rotation detection sensor 307 sandwiched between the base.

One end of the handle unit 300 is attached to the handle base 301 and the other end of the handle unit 300 is attached to the handle 302 so that the handle 302 can be returned to the initial rotation position (counterclockwise rotation end when viewed from the front). A biasing handle return spring 308 is attached to an inner base 304 at one end and to a transmission gear 306 at the other end. Auxiliary spring 309 biasing in the direction, handle touch sensor 310 attached to handle base 301 at the rear of inner base 304, and front end side of handle base 301 outward from the left side of front end outer peripheral surface of handle base 301 in front view. A single-shot button 311 which protrudes and whose base end side is attached to the handle base 301 behind the inner base 304 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth; and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 .

The handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 includes a cylindrical base portion 301a extending back and forth, a disk-shaped front end portion 301b projecting radially from the front end of the base portion 301a, and a recessed portion from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 301a. and three groove portions 301c extending in the axial direction and formed at uneven intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 . Also, the three grooves 301c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 183 of the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the base portion 301a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 181 of the handlebar mounting member 180 with the three grooves 301c aligned with the three ridges 183, and the ridges 183 are positioned in the three grooves 301c. By being inserted, the handle base 301 becomes non-rotatable relative to the handle attachment member 180 .

The handle 302 has four first projections 302a, second projections 302b, third projections 302c, and fourth projections 302d projecting outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotating shaft (shaft member 305). Two slits 302e extending in an arc shape from the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the other end side of the handle return spring 308 projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center from the slit 302e. and a locking protrusion 302f.

The four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d are provided in order in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the first projection 302a protrudes outward from the portion protruding most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (gouged out) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second projection 302b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the portion of the first projection 302a that protrudes most in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and is further rotated than the first projection 302a. protrudes slightly lower. The second projection 302b has the most protruding side surface in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front bulges outward, and the opposite side surface in the counterclockwise direction curves inward. , and is formed in a shape similar to that of the first projection 302a.

The portion of the third protrusion 302c that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the portion of the second protrusion 302b that protrudes most in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 302a It sticks out at about half the height. Both side surfaces of the third projection 302c are inclined substantially linearly, and the clockwise side surface is inclined more gently than the opposite counterclockwise side surface. The portion of the fourth projection 302d that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the portion of the third projection 302c that protrudes most in the clockwise direction at an angle of rotation of about 55 degrees. It also protrudes slightly higher. Both sides of the fourth projection 302d are inclined substantially linearly, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle shape.

The handle cover 303 has a round front surface that bulges forward and has three mounting bosses 303a that protrude rearward. The three mounting bosses 303a are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 301 through slits 302e of the handle 302 from the front. Since the mounting boss 303a of the handle cover 303 passes through the slit 302e of the handle 302, the mounting boss 303a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 302e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within an angle of rotation of approximately 120 degrees.

The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via the handle attachment member 180 . The handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is slanted so that the right end side is positioned more rearward than the left end side in plan view, and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 300 attached via the hole is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 and perform the turning operation without any discomfort.

The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor. When the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 rotates via the shaft member 305 and transmission gear 306. FIG. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 682 in the ball launcher 680, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307. , the game ball is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. - 特許庁

The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 are plated with conductivity, and when the player touches the handle 302 or the like, the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact. Then, when the handle 302 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 310 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is received, and the firing solenoid is fired with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The driving of 682 is controlled so that game balls can be hit. In other words, even if the player tries to hit the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 in some way without touching the handle 302, the shooting solenoid 682 is not driven and the game ball can be hit. It is not possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 302 in a manner different from the original to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

Also, in the handle unit 300, when the player presses the single-shot button 311 while rotating the handle 302, the single-shot button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the single-shot button 311, and the ejection control unit (illustration) of the payout control board 951 is omitted) stops the rotation of the firing solenoid 682 . As a result, the shooting of the game ball can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 302, and by canceling the pressing operation of the single-shot button 311, the hitting operation before operating the single-shot button 311 can be performed. The game ball can be hit into the game area 5a again with strength.

Further, the handle unit 300 has four first protrusions 302a, a second protrusion 302b, a third protrusion 302c, and a fourth protrusion 302d on the handle 302, and the handle 302 can be rotated most clockwise when viewed from the front. and the position of the first projection 302a when the fourth projection 302d does not rotate the handle 302 , the player can easily maintain the handle 302 in the "right-handed" position by switching the handle 302 with the fourth protrusion 302d as the first protrusion 302a. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game by reducing the fatigue of the player.

[3-3. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. FIG. FIG. 41(a) is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame as seen from the front right, and FIG. 41(b) is a perspective view of the plate unit as seen from the front left. FIG. 42(a) is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 42(b) is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the lower left rear. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into the main members and viewed from the rear. 45 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged portion of the lower tray with the lower tray cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 28. FIG. The plate unit 320 is attached to a portion below the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. An effect operation unit 400, which will be described later, is attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320. As shown in FIG.

The plate unit 320 includes an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be hit into the game area 5a, and an upper plate 321 arranged below the upper plate 321 for receiving game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. and a lower tray 322 that can be stored.

The plate unit 320 includes a plate-like plate unit base 323 attached to the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to the front upper portion of the plate unit base 323, and the left side of the center of the left and right protrudes greatly forward. An upper plate main body 324 forming an upper plate 321, and a lower plate main body 325 which is attached to the left side of the center in the left-right direction at the front lower part of the plate unit base 323 and protrudes greatly forward to form the lower plate 322. and a plate unit cover 326 attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper plate body 324 and the lower plate body 325. - 特許庁

In addition, the plate unit 320 includes an upper plate ball removal button 327 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side of the upper plate 321 when viewed from the front so as to be pressable from above, and the upper plate ball removal button 327 when viewed from the front. A ball lending button 328 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side, a return button 329 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side of the ball lending button 328 in front view, and a ball lending button 328 and a ball rental/return display portion 330 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 behind the return button 329, and a plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in front of the upper plate 321. A performance selection left button 331, a performance selection right button 332, and a lower tray ball release button 333 projecting forward from the front surface of a tray unit cover 326 in front of the lower tray 322 and attached so as to be pressable from the front. I have it.

[3-3a. Fine plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 and 44 and the like. An upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by a plate unit base 323 and an upper plate main body 324. The left side of the plate unit 320 bulges forward from the left-right center of the plate unit 320, and is shaped like a container that opens upward. It is The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) bulges most forward at about ⅓ of the width of the door frame 3 in the horizontal direction from the left end to the right. The front end of the upper plate 321 recedes rearward as it goes to the right in the front view from the most bulging portion, and a guide passage portion 321a having a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed. there is The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 321 including the guiding passage portion 321a is inclined so that the right end side of the guiding passage portion 321a is lowered, and the right end side of the guiding passage portion 321a in front view is the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 (upper plate ball removal button 327). ) (see FIG. 44).

When the upper plate 321 is assembled to the plate unit base 323, the bottom surface of the upper plate 321 is positioned below the upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323, and the game balls are pushed toward the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 323d. It is inclined so as to be lower toward a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of the . As a result, the game balls discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 323a can be received and stored in the upper tray 321, and the received game balls can be transferred from the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a to the upper tray. It can be supplied to the ball feeding port 323d.

As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed so that the bottom surface of the guide passage portion 321a, which is narrow in the front-rear direction, is lowered downward. That is, part of the upper plate 321 protrudes from above into a mounting space 326j of a plate unit cover 326 to which a later-described effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached. Therefore, in the upper tray 321, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured. In addition, the upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) protrudes into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 so as not to come into contact with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

In addition, the guidance passage portion 321a is provided with a metal ground fitting 321b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball contacts (rolls), the game ball Static electricity can be removed.

[3-3b. lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45 and the like. The lower tray 322 is arranged below the upper tray 321 and to the left of the horizontal center of the tray unit 320 (door frame 3) in front view. The lower tray 322 is formed in a container-like shape capable of storing game balls, and is attached to a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a which penetrates the bottom wall portion 325a vertically and which allows the game balls to be discharged, and a tray unit cover 326. It is provided with an escape portion 322b for avoiding contact with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The relief portion 322b of the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right front corner is recessed in an arc shape toward the rear.

The lower tray 322 is composed of a lower tray body 325 whose upper and rear sides are open, a lower tray cover portion 326k of a tray unit cover 326 covering the upper side from the left end side of the lower tray body 325, and an opening of the lower tray body 325. and a lower plate cover 340 that covers the upper side of the portion of the lower plate main body 325 that protrudes into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It faces outward from the lower plate opening 326d of the cover 326. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 45, the lower plate 322 has an outer peripheral shape in a plan view of a quadrangle extending left and right and a trapezoid in which the front side of the quadrangle is the base and the top side shorter than the base is arranged on the front side. , and the obliquely extending left and right sides of the trapezoid are curved so as to be recessed backward. The lower plate 322 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear in plan view.

As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower plate main body 325 is shaped like a container with an open top and a rear. The lower tray main body 325 has a flat bottom wall portion 325a, a main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall portion 325a except for the rear end side of the bottom wall portion 325a, and the game ball passes through the bottom wall portion 325a. A lower pan ball extraction hole 322a penetrating vertically with a possible size is provided. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a is a quadrangle extending to the left and right, the front side of the quadrangle being the base, the upper side shorter than the base being arranged on the front side, and the left and right sides extending obliquely curved so as to be recessed backward. It is formed in a shape that combines a trapezoid. (The upper surface of) the bottom wall portion 325a is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower pan ball extraction hole 322a. The main standing wall portion 325b rises upward from the bottom wall portion 325a at a height two to five times the diameter of the game ball. The lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is formed at a position closer to the right than the center of the lower tray main body 325 (bottom wall portion 325a) in the left-right direction. In the lower plate main body 325, the curved portions of the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b at the right front corners in the front view correspond to the escape portion 322b.

The lower tray cover 340 is formed to cover approximately the upper right half of the lower tray main body 325 . As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower tray cover 340 has a cover erected wall portion 340a that rises upward from the upper end of the main body erected wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325, and approximately and a horizontally extending ceiling portion 340b. The cover standing wall portion 340a rises from a part of the front side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325 to the rear end of the right side. When the lower plate cover 340 is assembled with the plate unit 320 , rear ends of the cover vertical wall portion 340 a and the ceiling portion 340 b are in contact with the front surface of the plate unit base 323 . Also, the front end (the left end of the front side) of the cover standing wall portion 340 a abuts the right end side of the lower plate opening 326 d of the plate unit cover 326 . Further, the left end of the ceiling portion 340b is in contact with the right end of the lower plate cover portion 326k of the plate unit cover 326. As shown in FIG. In the lower tray cover 340, the curved portion of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the portion extending obliquely between the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b on the rear side correspond to the escape portion 322b. there is

The lower plate 322 is covered with a plate unit cover 326 (the production operation unit 400) from the vicinity of the left end in the front view to the right side of the part that extends short to the left and right on the front end side, and more than half of it is covered with the production operation unit 400 in the front view. located behind. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed so that the right half wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower tray 322 includes a lower tray first area A1 (a cross-hatched area in FIG. 45) positioned behind a lower tray opening 326d of a tray unit cover 326 described later, Lower plate second region A2 (hatched in FIG. 45) located behind the right side of the opening 326d (the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340) area) and In other words, the bottom plate 322 has a storage area capable of storing game balls (corresponding to the storage area in a plan view, the area combining the bottom plate first area A1 and the bottom tray second area A2). It is located behind the production operation unit 400 . 45 is the remaining space (region) of the attachment space 326j in the plate unit cover 326. As shown in FIG.

In the lower tray 322, the lower tray ball supply port 323c of the tray unit base 323 forming the rear wall opens to the right of the center of the rear wall in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the lower plate 322 is connected to the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 (the right outer side of the lower plate opening 326d), and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. It is arranged in the lower plate second region A2 behind the side, etc. As a result, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower tray ball supply port 323c cannot be seen from the player side through the lower tray opening 326d (see FIG. 19, etc.). Therefore, the lower plate 322 is formed so as to be scooped out toward the rear of the effect operation unit 400 from the lower plate opening 326d on the left side of the plate unit 320 (the plate unit cover 326) that protrudes forward. The storage volume of game balls is formed larger than the range seen from the front. In other words, the lower plate 322 is formed such that the lower plate second region A2 is larger than the lower plate first region A1. As a result, when the lower tray 322 is viewed from the outside (player's side), more game balls can be stored in the lower tray 322 than it appears.

As shown in FIG. 41(a), the right half of the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate second region A2) is positioned at the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (mounting space 326j) of the plate unit cover 326, as shown in FIG. ), and a lower plate cover 340 covers the upper side of the portion of the lower plate main body 325 that protrudes into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The lower tray cover 340 prevents the fingertips from touching the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) when the player inserts his or her fingers into the lower tray 322 from the lower tray opening 326d. can do.

The lower tray 322 has a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a penetrating vertically directly in front of the lower tray ball supply port 323c in the lower tray second area A2. The bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is inclined downward toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. A lower tray ball removal hole 322a of the lower tray 322 is closed by a cover member 334 which is operated by pressing a lower tray ball removal button 333 so as to be openable and closable. In the normal state, the lower tray 322 has the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a closed by the cover member 334, and the game balls can be stored in the lower tray 322.例文帳に追加When the lid member 334 is opened by pressing the lower tray ball extraction button 333, the game balls in the lower tray 322 can be discharged downward from the tray unit 320 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a.

The lower tray ball extraction hole 322a of the lower tray 322 is arranged in front (right in front) of the lower tray ball supply port 323c of the tray unit base 323 forming the rear wall of the lower tray 322. As shown in FIG. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame 3, the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is positioned to the right of the lower tray opening 326d of the tray unit cover 326 and behind the frame unit 415 in the production operation unit 400. It is not visible from the player (front) side.

As described above, the lower plate 322 has an outer peripheral shape that is a combination of a rectangular shape extending to the left and right and a trapezoid that narrows on the front side. It slopes down towards the Therefore, in a state where the cover member 334 is opened and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is opened, the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c into the lower tray 322 is directly in front of the lower tray ball supply port 323c. It is immediately discharged downward from the open lower tray ball extraction hole 322a. Since the left end of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is located slightly to the left of the left end of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, when the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is open, the lower tray ball supply is not possible. The game ball supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower tray 322 is discharged from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a without directly flowing to the area on the left side of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a in the lower tray 322. Become.

On the other hand, since the right end of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is positioned to the left of the right end of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, the game supplied to the lower tray 322 from near the right end of the lower tray ball supply port 323c The ball comes into contact with the portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b that forms the right standing wall of the lower plate 322. As shown in FIG. The right standing wall of the lower tray 322 is curved obliquely with respect to the front-rear direction so as to face the direction of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a. When it comes into contact with the slanted portion, it is reflected in the direction of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a without going to the area on the left side of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. (See Figure 45).

Thus, the lower tray 322 of this embodiment is formed so as to guide the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a. is open, the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is immediately released from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a without entering the area on the left side of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a in the lower tray 322. It can be discharged downward (dollar box). As a result, if the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is kept open, the game balls circulating on the lower tray 322 cannot be seen from the player side, so that the game balls are dispensed from the upper tray 321 or the payout device 830. It is possible to give the illusion that the game balls and the like are discharged directly to the dollar box, and by making it difficult for the player to feel the trouble of passing the game balls through the lower tray 322, the player can enjoy the game (playing operation of the game balls). , effect images, etc.) to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the lower tray 322 of this embodiment includes the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray covers 340 and 340A extending upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b, the lower tray 322 Even if the game ball supplied inside bounces and jumps up in the lower tray 322, the game ball can be prevented from entering from the lower tray 322 to the installation space 326j side, and the game ball in the lower tray 322 can be prevented from entering. It is possible to prevent contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Therefore, the game balls supplied into the lower tray 322 and the game balls stored in the lower tray 322 are prevented from contacting or pressing the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). It is possible to prevent the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) from being damaged by the game ball.

Furthermore, since the lower tray 322 is provided with the lower tray ball removal hole 322a in front of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, when the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is open, the ball is discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 323c. To make it difficult for the game balls to reach the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325 because the game balls that have been ejected can enter the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a as they are and be ejected downward (dollar box). can be done. In addition, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 is higher toward the front, the game ball heading toward the front end side of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. By climbing the bottom, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, the impact when the game ball discharged into the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c abuts on the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b can be reduced, thereby preventing damage to them. can be made difficult.

In this embodiment, the lid member 334 that closes the lower tray ball removal hole 322a may be interlocked with the upper tray ball removal button 327. FIG. As a result, when the upper tray ball removal button 327 is operated, the cover member 334 is also moved to open the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the dollar box below. That is, when the upper tray ball removal button 327 is operated to remove a game ball from the upper tray 321, the game ball on the upper tray 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower tray ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, the player can have a strong illusion that the game balls on the upper tray 321 are discharged directly into the cash box, and the above-described effects can be exhibited more effectively. The simultaneous opening of the ball extractor of the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 may be performed by driving a drive source such as a motor or solenoid, or may be performed by a mechanical link mechanism.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray cover 340, which constitute the lower tray 322, are shown as separate bodies that can be disassembled. It may be regarded as an impossible unity. In addition, although an example in which the cover standing wall portion 340a of the lower tray cover 340 rises from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325 has been shown, the lower tray cover 340 rises from the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower tray main body 325. The cover standing wall portion 340a may stand up. Although the ceiling portion 340b of the lower tray cover 340 extends substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover vertical wall portion 340a, the ceiling portion 340b of the lower tray cover 340 extends from the main vertical wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325. You may make it extend substantially horizontally from the upper end.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, although the example provided with the escape part 322b for avoiding contact with the production|presentation operation unit 400 (2nd production|presentation operation unit 400A) of the lower plate 322 was shown, the escape part 322b is not provided. A lower plate 322 may also be used.

In this embodiment, the lower plate 322 (lower plate main body 325, lower plate cover 340, etc.) has a uniform planar shape without through-holes. It may also have a hole formed through it. Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall portion 325a, the main body vertical wall portion 325b, the cover vertical wall portion 340a, the ceiling portion 340b, etc. of the lower tray 322 is formed into a fence-like shape having a gap through which game balls cannot pass. It is good also as what was formed in the shape of a thing or a net. A luminous body such as an LED may be arranged in the plate unit cover 326 (mounting space 326j) to illuminate the inside of the lower plate 322 through the fence-like or net-like gap of the lower plate 322 (decorate with light). .

In this embodiment, the lower tray 322 is formed by the lower tray body 325, the lower tray cover 340, the tray unit base 323, and the tray unit cover 326 (lower tray cover portion 326k) which are formed separately. , these four members may be appropriately combined and integrated to form the lower plate 322 . Specifically, lower tray cover 340 and lower tray main body 325 are integrated, lower tray cover 340 and tray unit cover 326 are integrated, and lower tray main body 325 and tray unit cover 326 are integrated. integrated lower tray cover 340 and dish unit base 323 integrated lower tray main body 325 and dish unit base 323 integrated; dish unit base 323 and dish unit cover 326 are integrated, a lower tray main body 325, a lower tray cover 340 and a tray unit base 323 are integrated, and a lower tray main body 325, a lower tray cover 340 and a tray unit cover 326 are integrated. , a lower tray cover 340, a tray unit base 323, and a tray unit cover 326 are integrated, a lower tray body 325, a tray unit base 323, and a tray unit cover 326 are integrated, The lower tray cover 340, the tray unit base 323, and the tray unit cover 326 may be integrated, or the like.

[3-3b-1. Ball guiding part of lower plate]
An embodiment in which the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 is provided with a ball guide portion 322c and the like for guiding game balls from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. . FIG. 46(a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a different ball guiding portion from (a). It is a figure and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the example further provided with the different ball guidance part. In FIG. 46, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as above.

In the example of the lower tray 322 shown in FIG. 46(a), the diameter of the lower tray 322 is approximately the same as the diameter of the lower tray ball outlet 322a at a portion between the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a on the bottom of the lower tray 322. It has a pair of ball guiding portions 322c which are arranged with a distance left and right. The pair of ball guiding portions 322c are formed in the shape of rails (ridges) that protrude from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 and extend back and forth. Further, the bottom plate 322 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Therefore, the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c into the lower tray 322 is guided to the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a by the pair of ball guide sections 322c without going over the ball guide section 322c, and the lower tray ball is It is discharged downward (dollar box) through the hole 322a.

Similarly to the above, the lower tray 322 of this example has a lower tray ball supply port 323c and a lower tray ball supply port 323c behind the lower tray opening 326d of the tray unit cover 326 (lower tray second region A2). The through holes 322a are arranged linearly in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a are located behind the covering wall such as the front end side of the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the lower tray cover 340. and is not visible from the front.

As described above, since the lower tray 322 of the present embodiment includes a pair of ball guiding portions 322c, when the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is open, the game balls supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be immediately discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a without entering the area on the left side of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a. Since the game balls circulating on the lower tray 322 cannot be seen from the player's side, the game balls paid out from the upper tray 321 or the payout device 830 have the illusion of being directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, the player can concentrate on the game (playing operation of the game ball, performance image, etc.) and suppress the decline in interest. can be done.

In the example of FIG. 46(a), a rail-shaped one is shown as the ball guide portion 322c, but this is not the only option. Anything that can be guided to the countersunk ball extraction hole 322a may be used.

Next, in the example of the lower tray 322 in FIG. 46(b), a game ball discharged obliquely forward right from the lower tray ball supply port 323c runs along the right side wall of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a in the lower tray 322. , It is formed in a shape that reflects in the direction of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, and is provided with a buffer portion 322d at a portion where the game ball abuts. The buffer portion 322d is made of rubber, foam, or the like.

In the lower tray 322 of this example, similarly to the above, the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is arranged directly in front of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower tray 322 is lowered toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a. It is slanted so that Therefore. The game ball discharged straight forward from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a as it is. On the other hand, the game ball discharged to the right front from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is reflected in the direction of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a by the buffer portion 322d, and is discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a. be done. At this time, since the game ball contacts the buffer portion 322d and is reflected, the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

Furthermore, the lower plate 322 in this example also has a lower plate opening portion 326d of the plate unit cover 326 in the same manner as described above (the effect operation unit 400, which is the lower plate second region A2, and the effect operation in the plate unit cover 326). (behind the covering wall such as the unit mounting portion 326a and the front end side of the lower tray cover 340), and is not visible from the front.

As described above, the lower plate 322 of the present example has the buffer portion 322d on the wall portion that reflects the game ball. The cushioning portion 322d allows the ball to be reflected in the direction of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a without sound and discharged downward (dollar box). Therefore, when the game balls or the like paid out from the upper tray 321 or the payout device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, since the collision sound of the game balls cannot be heard from the lower tray 322, it seems as if they are directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, the player can concentrate on the game (playing operation of the game ball, effect images, etc.) and suppress the decline in interest. can be made

Next, in the example of the lower tray 322 in FIG. 46(c), the portion on the bottom surface (bottom wall portion 325a) of the lower tray 322 opposite to the lower tray ball supply port 323c with the lower tray ball removal hole 322a therebetween. It is provided with a return portion 322e that projects upward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a and reflects the game ball jumping over the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a side. The return portion 322e may be made of the same material as that of the lower plate 322, or may be made of a cushioning material such as rubber or foam that reduces collision noise when reflected. Further, the return portion 322e may not constitute the side wall of the lower tray 322, or may constitute a part of the side wall of the lower tray 322 (main body vertical wall portion 325b).

In this lower tray 322, a lower tray ball supply port 323c, a lower tray ball removal hole 322a, and a return portion 322e are arranged in order in a straight line from the rear to the front. Behind the opening 326d on the right side (behind the effect operation unit 400 that is the lower tray second area A2, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the covering wall such as the front end side of the lower tray cover 340) It is placed so that it cannot be seen from the front. In this lower tray 322, even if a game ball circulating from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a jumps over the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, it is It can be reflected downward and discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the same effect as described above.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball guide portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d may be appropriately combined with the lower plate 322. FIG. Thereby, there can exist an effect similar to the above.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of the lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 is described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47(a) is an explanatory view schematically showing a divisible lower tray, and (b) schematically illustrates a state in which the storage area of the lower tray is expanded according to the size of the space behind the production operation unit. and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic perspective view of the bottom plate of (b). A lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47 is configured such that a lower plate main body 325 can be divided along the dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second region A2. A region hatched with dotted lines in FIG. 47 indicates the remaining space of the mounting space 326j.

First, the lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) shown in FIG. 47(a) constitutes a part of the lower tray first area A1 and the lower tray second area A2 and has a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a. It has a body portion 325A and a first extension portion 325B attached to the right side of the body portion 325A and forming the remaining area of the bottom plate second area A2. The first extension part 325B is further provided with the remaining space (of the production operation unit 400 and the second production operation unit 400A) of the mounting space 326j in which the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is accommodated, further than the main body part 325A. rear space). As shown in the figure, the first extended portion 325B is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front toward the rear. In addition, the first extension portion 325B is formed with a relief portion 322b at the right front corner for avoiding contact with the second effect operation unit 400A.

Next, in the examples of FIGS. 47(b) and 47(c), the rear end of the production operation unit 400 does not protrude further rearward than the front end of the lower plate 322, and is more flexible than the example of FIG. 47(a). , the space behind the effect operation unit 400 (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is widened. The lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) includes a main body portion 325A which constitutes a part of the lower tray first area A1 and the lower tray second area A2 and has a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, and a main body portion 325A. A second extension portion 325C is attached to the right side of the portion 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the bottom plate second area A2 and is larger than the first extension portion 325B. As shown in the figure, the second extension portion 325C has a constant width in the horizontal direction from the front end to the rear end, and has a larger storage area for game balls than the first extension portion 325B. A lower plate cover 340A having a shape corresponding to the shape of the second extension portion 325C is attached to the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 47(c)).

In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C to the main body portion 325A, the respective game ball storage areas become continuous (communicated) with each other, and the game ball storage areas expands. Moreover, the boundary between the main body portion 325A and the first extension portion 325B or the second extension portion 325C is a dividing line PL. In addition, the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C of the lower plate main body 325 communicate with a predetermined gap (mounting space 326j) between the rear surface of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A. space) is formed.

Thus, in the above example, the lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) is configured to be separable, and at least one of the divided members is replaceable. The reservoir area can be made larger or smaller as desired. In addition, since the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is configured to be divisible, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 protrudes rearward (inside the mounting space 326j). An extension part (first extension part 325B or second extension part 325C) of a size corresponding to the amount can be attached.

In the above-described embodiment, the parting line PL is arranged in the lower plate second region A2 behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). It may be arranged on the boundary line between the first plate region A1 and the second lower plate region A2, or may be arranged within the first lower plate region A1.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main body portion 325A of the lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) is provided with the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. A lower tray ball extraction hole 322a may be provided.

In the above embodiment, the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C are attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A of the lower plate main body 325. A flat closure member without a reservoir area may be attached.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the lower tray main body 325 of the lower tray 322 has been described, but the lower tray cover 340 can also be divided in the same manner as the lower tray main body 325, or the first extension part 325B and the second extension part can be divided. It may be shaped to match the size of 325C.

[3-3c. Plate unit base]
The plate unit base 323 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The plate unit base 323 is attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape extending left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 110 (the rear is opened). shallow box).

The plate unit base 323 has an upper plate ball supply port 323a that penetrates in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view and extends cylindrically rearward, and a plate unit base 323 that penetrates in the front and rear direction below the upper plate ball supply port 323a. a speaker slit 323b consisting of a plurality of elongated holes extending upward and downward; a lower dish ball supply port 323c penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at a lower portion on the left side from the left-right center in a front view; An upper tray ball feed port 323d is provided, which penetrates in the front-rear upper right side of the lower tray ball supply port 323c and extends vertically, the upper portion of which is positioned at the right end of the upper tray main body 324. - 特許庁

In addition, the plate unit base 323 includes a ball feed guide path 323e for guiding the game balls sent to the rear side of the plate unit base 323 through the upper plate ball feed port 323d to the inlet 251a of the ball feed unit 250, and a ball feed guide path 323e. After hanging down from the lower side of the feed guide path 323e, it extends in a substantially L shape so as to be lower toward the right side of the cylindrical ball supply port 323c in the front view. A ball removal guideway 323f that guides the released game ball to the lower dish ball supply port 323c, and a lower end of the ball feed guideway 323e and an upper end of the ball removal guideway 323f on the left side of the ball feed guideway 323e in front view. An opening 323g that penetrates back and forth at a height between and protrudes so that an operation transmission part 327a that contacts the operation rod 253c of the ball feed unit 250 and is operated by the upper tray ball removal button 327 faces rearward. , is equipped with The ball extraction guide path 323f has its downstream end opened in a cylindrical portion of the lower tray ball supply port 323c.

Furthermore, the plate unit base 323 has a handle insertion opening 323h that penetrates the plate unit base 323 in the front-rear direction at the front-view right corner, and through which the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a front-view-view right corner that extends forward and backward. and a cylinder insertion opening 323i penetrating through and through which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

The upper tray ball supply port 323a of the tray unit base 323 has a front end opened to the rear wall of the upper tray 321 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a tubular rear end of the upper tray passage opening of the door frame base 110. 117 from the front side and is connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 . As a result, the game balls paid out from the payout unit 800 are supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 321 through the upper tray ball supply port 323a.

When the lower tray ball supply port 323c is assembled to the door frame 3, its front end opens to the rear wall of the lower tray 322, and its cylindrical rear end passes through the lower tray passage opening 116 of the door frame base 110 from the front side. and the front end of the ball outlet 276 of the foul cover unit 270 . As a result, game balls circulating in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower tray 322 through the lower tray ball supply port 323c. The lower tray ball supply port 323c is arranged behind the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower tray opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower tray cover 340, and the like. When the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, it cannot be seen from the player side through the lower tray opening 326d.

[3-3d. Plate unit cover]
The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The plate unit cover 326 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper plate main body 324 and the lower plate main body 325 . The plate unit cover 326 bulges forward at the center in the left-right direction and opens wide forward at the center in the left-right direction. An upper plate front decorative portion 326b formed at substantially the same height as the upper plate 321, and a lower plate front decorative portion 326c formed below each of the left and right upper plate front decorative portions 326b. there is

The production operation unit mounting portion 326a is formed to have a size of about 1/3 of the total width of the plate unit 320 in the horizontal direction in the horizontal direction, and has substantially the same height as the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction. formed in height. In addition, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is inclined so that the front end moves backward as it goes upward. Specifically, the front end of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

The front surface of the plate front upper decoration portion 326b moves rearward as it goes from the center side in the left-right direction of the plate unit cover 326 toward both the left and right sides, and the end portion on the center side in the left-right direction of the plate unit cover 326 and the left and right end portions of the plate unit cover 326 move backward. The intermediate portion is formed in a curved surface shape that bulges slightly forward with respect to the plane connecting the ends of the two. In addition, the lower end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b is inclined so as to move upward from the left-right direction center side of the plate unit cover 326 toward both left and right end sides, and the left-right direction center side of the plate unit cover 326 ( It is formed so that the vertical direction narrows from the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a side toward the left and right end sides. The plate unit cover 326 has an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 attached to a plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the left side in front view.

The front surface of the plate front lower decorative portion 326c moves rearward as it goes from the center side in the left-right direction of the plate unit cover 326 toward both the left and right sides, and the end portion on the center side in the left-right direction of the plate unit cover 326 and the left and right end portions of the plate unit cover 326 move rearward. The intermediate portion is formed in a curved surface shape recessed rearward with respect to the plane connecting the ends of the .

A lower plate opening 326d penetrating back and forth is formed in the plate front lower decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view, and the lower plate 322 faces forward from the lower plate opening 326d. In the plate front lower decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view, a lower plate ball removal button 333 protrudes forward from the lower front surface of the lower plate opening 326d. A lower speaker port 326e made of punching metal is formed on the left side of the lower plate opening 326d in the plate front lower decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view. The lower speaker port 326e is located in front of the speaker slit 323b of the dish unit base 323 in the assembled state of the dish unit 320. As shown in FIG.

In the plate front lower decorative portion 326c on the right side in front view, there are a handle insertion opening 326f which penetrates in the front and rear at the lower right corner in front view and through which the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a handle insertion opening 326f. A cylinder insertion opening 326g that penetrates in the front-rear direction above the handle insertion opening 326f near the right corner and through which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted is formed.

The plate unit cover 326 has a plate-like top plate portion 326h extending from the upper end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the right side in front view to the front end of the plate unit base 323. It covers the upper right side. An upper plate ball removal button 327, a ball lending button 328, a return button 329, and a ball lending/returning display section 330 are attached to the top plate portion 326h.

The plate unit cover 326 has a flat bottom plate portion 326i extending from the lower end of the plate front lower decorative portion 326c to the front surface of the plate unit base 323. As shown in FIG. The lower side of the plate unit 320 is closed by the bottom plate portion 326i. The bottom plate portion 326i is formed in a stepped shape so that a portion located below the lower plate 322 is recessed upward, and a lower plate ball removal base 335, which will be described later, is attached to that portion. Further, the bottom plate portion 326i is formed with a vertically penetrating hole at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a of the lower plate 322. As shown in FIG.

The plate unit cover 326 has an attachment space 326j that opens forward at the location of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a and into which the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is inserted (accommodated). Further, the plate unit cover 326 has a plate-like lower plate cover portion 326k that extends rearward from the left side and the upper side of the lower plate opening 326d and covers the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 44). . The left end of the lower tray cover portion 326k is in contact with the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325, and the right end is in contact with the left end of the ceiling portion 340b of the lower tray cover 340. there is

[3-3e. Upper plate ball release button]
The top plate ball removal button 327 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper tray ball removal button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the tray unit cover 326 on the right side of the upper tray 321 when viewed from the front. It can be pulled out. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper tray ball extracting button 327 is configured such that its rear end side is moved left and right under the top plate portion 326h by a ball removing button holder attached to the lower side of the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326. rotatably mounted about an axis extending through the The top plate ball extractor button 327 has a lower surface at its front end in contact with the upper end of a vertically extending ball extractor lever. This ball extractor lever is attached so as to be vertically slidable by a ball extractor base attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 below the upper dish ball extractor button 327 .

The ball extracting lever, whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper bowl ball extracting button 327, abuts from above the upper portion of the upper dish ball extracting slider 327b mounted on the plate unit base 323 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. ing. The upper tray ball removal slider 327b has an operation transmission portion 327a projecting rearward from the rear surface. It protrudes rearward so as to face it and abuts on the operating rod 253c of the ball extracting member 253 in the ball feeding unit 250 from below. The upper bowl ball extracting slider 327b is urged upward by an upper bowl ball extracting spring 327c. The upper tray ball removal button 327 is located at the rising end.

Therefore, when the upper bowl ball extracting button 327 is pressed downward against the urging force of the upper bowl ball extracting spring 327c, the operation transmitting portion 327a of the upper bowl removing slider 327b moves downward, and the operation transmitting portion 327a moves downward. Since the actuating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253, which is in contact with the upper end side, also moves downward relatively, the ball removing member 253 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and enters through the partition portion 253a. The partition between the opening 251a and the ball extraction opening 251b is released, and they communicate with each other. As a result, the game balls in the upper tray 321 are discharged from the ball extraction port 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 to the ball extraction guide path 323f of the tray unit 320, and discharged to the lower tray 322 through the lower tray ball supply port 323c. (supply).

It should be noted that when the upper tray ball removal button 327 is operated, the cover member 334 closing the lower tray ball removal hole 322a may be moved in conjunction with it. Accordingly, when the upper tray ball removal button 327 is operated, the cover member 334 is also moved to open the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, so that the game ball discharged from the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322 is further removed. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the dollar box below. In other words, when the upper tray ball removal button 327 is operated to remove a game ball from the upper tray 321, the game ball on the upper tray 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower tray ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong illusion that the game balls on the upper tray 321 are discharged directly into the cash box, and make it difficult for the player to feel the trouble of passing the game balls through the lower tray 322. It is possible to make the player devote himself to the game (striking operation of the game ball, effect image, etc.) and suppress the decline in interest. The simultaneous opening of the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 may be performed by driving a drive source such as a motor or solenoid, or may be performed by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3f. Ball rental button, return button, and ball rental/return display]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending/returning display section 330 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. As shown, the ball rental button 328, the return button 329, and the ball rental/return display portion 330 are located on the right side of the top plate 326h of the plate unit cover 326 in the front view of the top plate ball removal button 327, and inside the circular decoration. installed in the

The ball lending button 328 is pressed after inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and a predetermined number of game balls are played. It is lent (dispensed) into the upper tray 321 of the unit 320 . When the return button 329 is pressed with the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine, the money or prepaid card is returned after deducting the amount of the game balls that have been borrowed.

Although illustration is omitted, the ball lending/returning display unit 330 has a three-digit seven-segment LED arranged on the lower side of the transparent surface, and displays the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine, or It displays an error code or the like when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-3g. Production selection left button and production selection right button]
The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41 and the like. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached near the right end near the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a in the plate front top decorative portion 326b on the left side in the front view of the plate unit cover 326, as shown in the figure. The effect selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex directed to the left. The effect selection right button 332 is formed to the right of the effect selection left button 331 and is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex directed to the right.

The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 arranged in the game area 5a when viewed from the front. On the other hand, when an effect image prompting selection is displayed, a pressing operation can be accepted, and the desired option is selected by operating the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 within a predetermined time. .

[3-3h. Lower plate ball release button]
The lower plate ball removal button 333 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The lower tray ball release button 333 is below the lower tray opening 326d of the tray unit cover 326 in front of the lower tray 322 and protrudes forward from the lower front end of the front lower decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view. By pressing the lower tray ball removal button 333, the lid member 334 closing the lower tray ball removal hole 322a of the lower tray 322 can be rotated. The game balls stored in the lower tray 322 can be discharged downward from the tray unit 320 by opening the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a.

The lower tray ball removal button 333 is slidable in the front-rear direction by a lower tray ball removal base 335 (see FIG. 42(b)) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the tray unit cover 326 on the lower side of the lower tray main body 325. installed in the The lower tray ball removal button 333 is arranged to the left of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a of the lower tray 322 (see FIG. 28, etc.).

The bottom plate portion 326i of the bottom plate portion 326i of the bottom plate portion 335 of the bottom plate unit cover 326 is positioned below the bottom plate portion 322 so as to be recessed upward from below. It is attached to portion 326i. The lower tray ball extraction base 335 is formed with a discharge port 335a having the same size as the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a and penetrating vertically at a position directly below the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a of the lower tray 322. . Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lid member 334 is disposed between the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray ball removal base 335 . As a result, when the lid member 334 closing the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a of the lower tray 322 is opened, the outlet 335a of the lower tray ball extraction base 335 is also opened, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a and the outlet 335a are opened. are in communication with each other.

Although illustration is omitted, the lid member 334 is attached to the lower tray ball removal base 335 so as to be rotatable around a position to the left of the lower tray ball removal button 333 in a plan view. A portion of the cover member 334 that closes the lower tray ball removal hole 322a and a portion that is rotatably attached to the lower tray ball removal base 335 are connected to the lower tray ball removal button 333 . As a result, when the lower tray ball removal button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the cover member 334 rotates around the vertically extending shaft, thereby opening and closing the lower tray ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a).

Although not shown, the lower tray ball removal base 335 includes a holding device for holding the lower tray ball removal button 333 when the lower tray ball removal button 333 is pushed backward and moved, and a lower tray ball removal button. A lower pan ball extractor spring that biases 333 forward is attached. In a state in which the lower tray ball removal button 333 protrudes forward and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, when the lower tray ball removal button 333 is pushed and moved rearward, the lid member 334 rotates. As a result, the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is opened, and the lower tray ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and remains in a state of being moved rearward. In this state, even if the lower tray ball removal button 333 is released, the lower tray ball removal button 333 does not move forward, and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a remains open. The game ball in 322 can be discharged downward from the plate unit 320 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

When the lower tray ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is opened, pressing the lower tray ball removal button 333 backward releases the holding by the holding device. In this state, when the lower tray ball removal button 333 is released, the lower tray ball removal button 333 moves forward by the urging force of the lower tray ball removal spring, returns to the protruded state, and the lid member 334 rotates. As a result, the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed. Thereby, game balls can be stored in the lower tray 322 .

In addition to pressing the lower tray ball removal button 333, pressing the upper tray ball removal button 327 also moves the cover member 334 closing the lower tray ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a). The lower tray ball extraction hole 322a may be opened. As a result, when it is desired to discharge the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the dollar box arranged below the tray unit 320, the upper tray ball ejection button 327 is merely operated to discharge the game balls through the lower tray 322 to the dollar box. can be discharged, and the labor involved in ball removal can be simplified. The simultaneous opening of the ball extractor of the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 may be performed by driving a drive source such as a motor or solenoid, or may be performed by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 to 55 and the like. FIG. 48(a) is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. Also, FIG. 49(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 49(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 51 is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 48(a), and FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 48(b). FIG. 53(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 48(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front part of the dish unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. is.

The production operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape, and the central side except for the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player and the production operation unit of the plate unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decoration board unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 with light emission, and a frame. A base unit 430 attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and having an operation button 410 and a decoration board unit 420 attached to the front side, and a base unit 430 attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation button 410 and effecting A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image is provided.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. FIG. 56(a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 56(b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the rear. The operation button 410 has a circular outer shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface (a shape of a part of a spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward. It has an annular button frame 412 attached thereto, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 . The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are made of a member that does not easily transmit light.

The button lens 411 is formed with a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed to have a smooth curved surface with no unevenness on the surface side. The button lens 411 is recessed in a W-shaped cross section from the back surface of the button frame 412 at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 and extends for a predetermined length toward the center (inner side) and is arranged in rows in the circumferential direction. The first button decorative portion 411a extends on the axis toward the center in a recessed state with an arcuate cross-section from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side of the first button decorative portion 411a, and is arranged in the circumferential direction within a predetermined angular range. and a plurality (six) of second button decoration portions 411b provided.

As shown in the drawing, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends toward the center from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 when assembled to the operation button 410. It extends longer toward the center than

The plurality of second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three each on the left and right sides. These second button decorative portions 411b are formed to face from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward such that the front side thereof is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412. As shown in FIG.

The button lens 411 exerts a lens effect of refracting light due to unevennesses having a W-shaped cross section or an arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface of the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side cannot be seen clearly.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and has a plurality (six) of frame openings 412a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in an arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412 a are provided three each on the left and right sides, corresponding to the six second button decorations 411 b of the button lens 411 . The button frame 412 has a plated layer with metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body portion 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a, and an annular flange portion 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a. A plurality of (four) guide boss portions 413c projecting rearward along the outer periphery of the main body portion 413a at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and from the rear side of the flange portion 413b along the outer periphery of the main body portion 413a. A plurality (three) of detection pieces 413d protruding rearward in the form of a band plate and arranged in the circumferential direction, and a detection piece 413d extending forward and backward through the flange portion 413b on the outer side of the body portion 413a and extending along the outer circumference for a predetermined length. A plurality (six) of base openings 413e are formed in the circumferential direction, and a base opening 413e extends forward from the front end of the main body 413a. and an inner extending portion 413f narrowing toward (center side).

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are respectively arranged at portions corresponding to the four upper, lower, left, and right corners in the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the main body 413a, two on the upper side and one on the lower side. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

The six base openings 413e are provided three each on the left and right sides, corresponding to the second button decorative portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. As shown in FIG. At the portion of the base opening 413e of the button base 413, parts of the body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f are recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extending portion 413f that narrows inward substantially matches the inner diameter of the button frame 412 .

The front surface of the operation button 410 bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface), and is formed transparently. can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide bosses 413c slidably inserted into holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and an operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431. is urged forward by The front side of the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 abuts against the frame unit 415 due to the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430 . By pressing against the , it moves rearward until the rear end abuts the front surface of the base unit 430 . When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413 d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 . Detection of the detection piece 413d by the press detection sensor 440 means that the operation button 410 has been operated.

In addition, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 to the center side in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 .

Further, the operation button 410 has a button lens 411 and a button frame 412 that close the front end opening of a cylindrical button base 413 . With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion where the rear can be visually recognized is formed so as to taper inward from the outer periphery. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 of the base unit 430 .

In addition, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400 , the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413 a ) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decoration board unit 420 and extends from the front surface of the decoration board unit 420 . It will protrude backwards. As a result, the lights emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420 are emitted from the button. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside of the base 413 to the inside, and the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button top interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button bottom interior of the base unit 430 can be prevented. It is possible to prevent light emitted forward from the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413 . Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420, the operation button left inner decoration board 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button It is possible to prevent the LEDs mounted on the lower interior decoration board 436 from illuminating the parts other than the part to be luminous decoration, and the luminous decoration can be performed with good appearance.

[3-4b. frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button 410 from the front side, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in a shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame main body 416 attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 and having a circular central opening 416a, and frame main bodies 416 on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. a pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side to the frame, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front side to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a. there is

The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a which is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A plurality (six) of outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a and arranged in rows in the circumferential direction, and a notch 416c having a predetermined width in the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , is equipped with The central opening 416 a is formed to have substantially the same diameter as the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410 . As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening portion 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided three each on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by frame side lenses 417 from the rear side. The cutout portion 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

The frame main body 416 also includes a substantially tubular inner tubular portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening portion 416a and the outer peripheral opening portion 416b, and has a cutout portion corresponding to the cutout portion 416c. In the state where the production operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylindrical portion 416d is arranged so that the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420 are respectively arranged. and partitions between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b (see FIG. 52).

Further, the frame body 416 has a pair of mounting portions 416e that extend outward from the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery, respectively, and are mounted to the effect operation unit mounting portions 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. As shown in FIG. The frame main body 416 (effect operation unit 400) is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 at the left and right portions of the pair of attachment portions 416e and cutout portion 416c.

The frame main body 416 has a metal cover on substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the cutout 416c on the opposite side of the cutout 416c (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) across the central opening 416a. A glossy plated layer is formed.

The frame side lenses 417 close outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416 three each, from the rear side. The frame side lens 417 has a smooth surface with no unevenness on the front side, and a plurality of unevenness along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear side (see FIGS. 53 and 63). Light is refracted by these multiple unevennesses, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 has a substantially rectangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the cutout portion 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The frame top lens 418 has a smooth front surface. In addition, the frame top lens 418 has a plurality of concave and convex portions extending in a zigzag pattern on the rear surface side along the periphery of the central opening 416a and arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 51 and 63). reference). The rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen because light is refracted by these unevennesses.

The frame unit 415 is a state in which the production operation unit 400 is assembled, and the pair of frame side lenses 417 are arranged so that the second LEDs 422b and 423b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420 are respectively connected. , and the frame top lens 418 is positioned in front of the frame top lens decoration board 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted thereon can be decorated with light. .

[3-4c. Decoration board unit]
The decoration board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 57 and the like. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decoration board unit of the effect operation unit, seen from the front. The decoration board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400 .

The decoration board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 whose upper side is open, and an operation button left external decoration board 422 and an operation button right external decoration board 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the board base 421, respectively. , and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 .

The substrate base 421 is formed such that its inner peripheral side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and its outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415 .

The operation button left external decoration board 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421 . The operation button left external decoration board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner periphery of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of first LEDs 422a on the inner periphery of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. and a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right external decoration board 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421 . The operation button right outer decoration board 423 has a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner periphery of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of first LEDs 423a on the inner periphery of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. and a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along. Both front and rear surfaces of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are white.

The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

When the decoration board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400 , the rear end side of the cylindrical main body part 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421 . Further, in the decoration board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are positioned behind the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b, 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. As shown in FIG. In addition, in the state assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the frame The inner tubular portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 illuminates only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 with light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423, respectively. At the same time, only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated with light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b.

Also, the decoration board unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the entire production operation unit 400. FIG.

[3-4d. base unit]
The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60 and the like. FIG. 58(a) is a front perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit, and FIG. 58(b) is a back perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit exploded and viewed from the front. Also, FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit exploded and viewed from behind. The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 has the operation button 410 attached to it so as to be able to move forward and backward, and is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 .

The base unit 430 has four through holes 431a attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and penetrating through the central portion in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically, and a blind hole opened forward outside the through hole 431a. An annular unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, an operation button inner decorative member 432 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431 so as to cover the through hole 431a and extending short in the front-rear direction in a cylindrical shape having translucency, and an operation button. An operation button left interior decoration substrate 433 and an operation button right interior decoration substrate 434 are attached to the left and right sides of the through hole 431a in the front surface of the unit base 431 behind the button interior decoration member 432, respectively, and the operation button interior decoration member 432. An operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435 and an operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 at the rear, and a frame top lens attached to the upper front surface of the unit base 431. A decorative substrate 437 is provided.

The base unit 430 also includes four operation button springs 438 inserted into four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431, three sensor holders 439 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431, and each sensor holder. 439, three press detection sensors 440 for detecting press operations of the operation buttons 410, a production operation unit relay board 441 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431, and a relay board cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover the rear side.

The unit base 431 has a substantially circular outer shape and is slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415 . The unit base 431 is penetrated in the front-rear direction at the center thereof, and has a substantially rectangular through-hole 431a extending vertically. The through-hole 431a is sized to fit inside the cylindrical body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and is sized to allow the display screen of the door-frame-side effect display device 460 to pass through. A door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 .

The four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 are formed at the four upper, lower, left and right corners outside the through hole 431a at positions corresponding to the four guide bosses 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. As shown in FIG. These holding holes 431b have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c so that the guide boss portion 413c can be slidably inserted therein.

More specifically, the upper left holding hole 431b out of the four holding holes 431b is arranged to extend from the center of the unit base 431 to the center of the unit base 431 from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated counterclockwise by about 30 degrees. The upper right holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b rotates clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 431 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410). is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of . On the other hand, the two lower holding holes 431b among the four holding holes 431b are formed on the opposite side of the center of the unit base 431 from the upper two holding holes 431b. .

In addition, the unit base 431 has a light shielding wall portion 431c projecting forward in a flat plate shape from a portion where the operation button upper internal decoration substrate 435 is attached and a portion where the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 is attached. It has The light-shielding wall portion 431c allows the frame top lens 418 to be decorated with light only by the frame top lens decoration substrate 437. FIG.

The operation button inner decorative member 432 has a substantially cylindrical peripheral wall portion 432a that extends short in the front-rear direction, and a curved surface that closes the front end side of the peripheral wall portion 432a and protrudes forward at the center. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening 432c extending vertically through the front plate portion 432b, a flange portion 432d extending outward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d. and a plurality of mounting bosses 432e projecting rearward from the base 431 and mounted on the unit base 431.

A peripheral wall portion 432 a of the operation button inner decorative member 432 is formed to have an outer diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 . An opening 432c penetrating through the front plate 432b is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460. As shown in FIG.

The operation button inner decorative member 432 has a smooth surface without irregularities on the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b.

The operation button interior decoration member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is recessed in an arc shape and extends in the front-rear direction, and includes a plurality of first button interior decoration portions 432f provided in the circumferential direction. , is formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b, bulges out in an arc shape, and extends in a modified octagonal shape centering on the center of the front plate portion 432b, and concentrically around the center of the front plate portion 432b. A plurality of second button interior decoration portions 432g (see FIG. 63) are provided in a shape. The second button interior decoration portion 432g is formed to have portions extending parallel to the four inner peripheries of the opening 432c.

The operation button interior decoration member 432 is formed of a transparent member. The operation button interior decoration member 432 has a lens effect formed by the first button interior decoration portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b, so that the rear side cannot be clearly seen. .

The operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 each have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. By emitting light, the operation button interior decoration member 432 can be decorated with light emission. By luminous decoration of the operation button inner decoration member 432, the inside of the operation button 410 and the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be luminous decorated.

A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration board 437, and the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be decorated with light emission by causing the LEDs to emit light.

The LEDs mounted on the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436, and the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 are full-color LEDs. It is said that The operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436, and the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 have white front surfaces. .

The operation button springs 438 are coil springs and are inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 from the front. The operation button spring 438 has a rear end in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 431b when assembled to the effect operation unit 400, and a front end serving as a guide boss protruding rearward from the body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. It abuts on the rear end of the portion 413c. These operation button springs 438 urge the operation button 410 forward.

The three pressure detection sensors 440 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 . More specifically, the three pressure detection sensors 440 are arranged on the front surface of the unit base 431, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 431b, the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the remaining one on the lower left side. are attached via sensor holders 439 to the lower right side of the holding holes 431b. The three pressure detection sensors 440 are attached to the center of the unit base 431 at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction. These three press detection sensors 440 can detect three detection pieces 413 d of the operation button 410 .

The production operation unit relay board 441 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 on the left side (right side in front view) of the through hole 431a in rear view. The effect operation unit relay board 441 includes an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, and an operation button upper inner decoration board. 435, for relaying the connection between the inner decoration board 436 under the operation button, the frame top lens decoration board 437, the pressure detection sensor 440, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100. It is.

The relay board cover 442 extends leftward in front view from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the effect operation unit relay board 441 and has a leg portion 442 a attached to the lower rear surface of the unit base 431 . When the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 is assembled to the door frame 3, the lower surface of the leg portion 442a extends substantially horizontally, and the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 is positioned between the bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. to form a slight gap (see FIG. 26). As a result, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pushed downward or hit, the frame unit 415 is not moved until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. The attachment portion 416e, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the like bend downward, thereby absorbing the impact. After the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit cover 326 are restricted. 326a and the like can be prevented from being damaged by avoiding the application of excessive force.

[3-4e. Door frame side effect display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55 and the like. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces forward from the opening 432c of the operation button inner decorative member 432 in the base unit 430, and the operation button 410 is transparent. The display screen can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the central portion, and an effect image can be displayed on the display screen.

The door frame side effect display device 460 is mounted on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461 having a square display screen on the front and the liquid crystal display device 461, and is also mounted on the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. and a mounting bracket 462 in the shape of a rectangular tube with a bottom. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16:9 and a diagonal length of approximately 4.3 inches. The mounting bracket 462 has an outer periphery formed in the same shape as the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device 461 , and is mounted so that the bottom of the bottomed cylindrical shape contacts the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461 .

When the door frame side effect display device 460 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the liquid crystal display device 461 penetrates the through hole 431a of the unit base 431 from the rear side, and is displayed inside the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button inner decorative member 432. (see Figure 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is positioned near the front end of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and faces forward through an opening 432c that penetrates the front plate portion 432b.

The door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image based on the control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 on the liquid crystal display device 461 .

[3-4f. Effects of production operation unit]
The effects of the production operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63 and the like. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the sectional view of the production operation unit of FIG. 51. FIG. FIG. 62(a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut away to be hidden by the first button decorative portion of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows a site|part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site|part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the production|presentation operation unit. FIG. 63(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. is.

The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when the game ball is hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player can operate the effect operation unit 400. The player can be entertained by participating in the performance presented to the player by operating the button 410.例文帳に追加

The performance operation unit 400 is formed to have a total height substantially equal to the height of the portion below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 . Further, the performance operation unit 400 is formed to have a full width slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. - 特許庁The effect operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction under the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) when viewed from the front.

The production operation unit 400 has the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 . When the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. is formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper part of the plate unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. installed as. As a result, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis line CL of the transparent operation button 410 that protrudes forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is inclined so that it moves upward as it goes forward. Thus, when the player sits down in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is placed above the plate unit 320 (the effect operation unit 400). Since it is positioned in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes through the vicinity of the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projection view from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). Therefore, the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 inside the operation button 410, and the like can be visually recognized in good condition.

The effect operation unit 400 has four guide bosses 413c of the operation button 410 slidably inserted into four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and is biased forward by an operation button spring 438. As shown in FIG. In a normal state (a state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the operation button spring 438 pushes the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 toward the frame unit 415 . It abuts on the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In the normal state, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 (center axis line CL side). there is In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that protrudes forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface), a portion protruding forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 51, etc.).

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is set to about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end thereof) faces the frame unit with respect to the direction of the central axis CL of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves backward along the center axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. When the rear end of the operation button 410 contacts the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 that protrudes forward in a curved surface shape (shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter compared to the performance operation button provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. likely to be To be more specific, the operation buttons for presentation in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that their central axes extend substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the presentation operation unit 400 of the present embodiment are attached. is mounted with the central axis CL inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. A portion of the operation button 410 away from the center axis CL is pressed.

By the way, since the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed on a flat surface to be pressed by the player, if the operation buttons are enlarged while the portions to be pressed are made flat, If a portion of the operation button deviated from the center is pressed, the surface to be pressed is tilted so that the pressed portion retreats first, and the operation button cannot be retracted straight. There is a possibility that the pressing operation becomes impossible.

On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface shape (partial shape of a substantially spherical surface) that bulges forward. Therefore, when a position distant from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. can be done. Therefore, even if any position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without being tilted. You can fully enjoy the performance to operate.

In addition, the effect operation unit 400 has the vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front surface of the board base 421 of the decoration board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is plated so that the effect operation unit 400 can be suspended. Since it is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the attachment part. , the entire effect operation unit 400 can be greatly (strongly) vibrated, and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the effect operation unit 400. - 特許庁In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly below the position (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 61) that is relatively easy for the player to press, the player who presses the operation button 410 It is possible to transmit strong vibrations to the player, and the player can be surprised and entertained with the performance.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the plate unit cover 326 form the lower surface. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or struck, the frame is not held until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The attachment portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the like bend downward, thereby absorbing the impact. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect operation unit 400 is regulated, and the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the plate unit cover 326 are attached to the effect operation unit. It is possible to avoid applying an excessive force to the portion 326a and the like, and to prevent damage to the effect operation unit 400 and the like. Therefore, when the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is pressed and an effect is presented to the player, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit is not pressed. Since the 400 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid the interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the decline in the interest of the player, and reduce the increase in the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to damage. can be suppressed.

As described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that is pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) projecting forward, and thus is formed in a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity of the button lens 411 are higher than those of the case, and even if the button lens 411 is hit strongly, the impact can be dispersed over the entire button lens 411, making it difficult to break.

63, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button inner decorative member 432 are made of transparent members. The decoration by unevenness such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button interior decoration portion 432f, and the second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the back side is the front side (player side). ). In addition, since the plate thickness changes in the parts where these uneven decorations are formed, the light is refracted in a complicated way, so it is difficult to see the rear side through the parts where the uneven decorations are formed. .

Since the effect operation unit 400 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center, the first button decoration portion 411a is decorated with unevenness. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear at the outer peripheral portion of the portion inside the button lens 411 . Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rear in the direction of the center axis CL), there are the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the inner decorative member 432 of the operation button. 432a, and the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap is positioned from the front side (player side) to close the gap on the outer circumference of the operation button inner decorative member 432. can be made invisible. As a result, even if the operation button interior decorative member 432 whose position is fixed is provided inside the operation button 410 that can be pressed, deterioration of the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the player from having an unpleasant feeling, and it is possible to arrange the operation button internal decoration member 432 in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and to improve the appearance of the operation button 410.例文帳に追加

More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is configured such that the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 are arranged so that the outer circumference of the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 is adjusted. The unit base 431, the decoration board unit 420, and the like on the rear side (back side) of the outer side are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411.例文帳に追加Specifically, in FIG. 62, the cross-hatched portion surrounded by the one-dot chain line is hidden from the player's side. In this way, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outer side and the inner side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 are difficult to see and hidden. It is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, in turn, the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in rows in the circumferential direction. A second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 arranged inside and behind the operation button 410 extends in a modified octagonal shape around the center axis CL. As shown in FIG. 63, the concave-convex line of the first button decoration portion 411a and the concave-convex line of the second button inner decoration portion 432g intersect with each other. The decoration can be shown to the player.

Also, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends). The second button interior decoration part 432g can present a deep and three-dimensional geometric pattern to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second inner button decoration portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the concave-convex line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g is changed, the player can see the decoration with movement, and the player can be entertained.

In this way, the effect operation unit 400 provides the player with moving and three-dimensional decoration using the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, the pachinko machine 1 can strongly attract the interest of the players and have a high appeal.

In addition, in the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), behind the operation button inner decorative member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button An upper interior decoration board 435 and an operation button lower interior decoration board 436 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surfaces thereof emit light, thereby causing the operation button interior decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 to emit light. can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be illuminated by the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433 , the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434 , the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435 , and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 . As shown in FIG. 52, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 are as follows. As viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is arranged inside the cylindrical main body portion 413a, so that the light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body portion 413a. , only the inside of the operation button 410 can be favorably illuminated.

In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is arranged behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 positioned near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 in the decoration substrate unit 420 is positioned behind the second button decoration portion 411b. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right external decoration board 423 are arranged, and by lighting these first LEDs 422a and 423a, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are decorated with light emission. can be done. As shown in FIG. 52, the first LED 422a of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right external decoration board 423 are formed by the cylindrical body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. 415 and the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a and the outer side of the inner cylindrical portion 416d, and the operation is facilitated. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be favorably illuminated.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 is arranged behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board A second LED 423b of 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be decorated with light emission by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right external decoration board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner tubular portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with good light. .

In addition, the production operation unit 400 has a frame top lens decoration board 437 in the base unit 430 arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 , and a plurality of lenses mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration board 437 . , the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light emission. A plate-shaped light shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward from the lower side of the portion of the base unit 430 to which the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached to near the rear end of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. Light from the LED of the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the side of the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably illuminated.

[3-4g. Overall configuration of second embodiment of production operation unit]
Next, a second effect operation unit 400A, which is a second embodiment of the effect operation unit 400, will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 71 and the like. FIG. 64(a) is a front view of a second effect operation unit having a different embodiment from the effect operation unit shown in FIGS. 48 to 63, and (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. FIG. 65(a) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 65(b) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG in FIG. 64(a). FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along line HH in FIG. 64(b). FIG. 69(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II in FIG. 64(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). Fig. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and Fig. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. It is a diagram.

The second effect operation unit 400A can be attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit 320 in place of the effect operation unit 400 described above. Like the effect operation unit 400, the second effect operation unit 400A can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. Below, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the same components as those of the effect operation unit 400 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The second effect operation unit 400A has a circular outer shape, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit attachment portion 326a, and a decoration board unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 with light emission. , the second base unit 450 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and having the operation button 410 and the decoration board unit 420 attached to the front surface, and the second base unit 450 visible from the player side through the operation button 410. A second effect display device 460A on the side of the door frame which is attached to the second effect display device 460A and can display a performance image, and a buffer unit 510 attached to the lower surface of the second effect display device 460A on the side of the door frame.

In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A, the surface of the second effect operation unit relay board 515 attached to the front view right side of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and the second effect operation unit relay board 515 and a relay board cover 516 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in a front view so as to cover it. The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are attached to the front view right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

The second effect operation unit relay board 515 includes an operation button left external decoration board 422, an operation button right external decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, a pressure detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decoration board 482, a switching drive motor 492, a projector 500, And it is for relaying the connection between the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 .

[3-4g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72 and the like. Fig. 72 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit and viewed from the rear. It is a diagram. The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A has a circular outer shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the center side except for the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 includes a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward, and the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 attached to the front side and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to hold the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 are provided. It has substantially the same configuration as the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400 .

The specific differences between the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 are that the pattern of the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the guide boss of the button base 413 are different. The shape of the portion 413c is different.

More specifically, as shown in the figure, the first button decorative portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A has one vertex toward the center of the button lens 411 at a portion in contact with the inner circumference of the button frame 412. A truss-like pattern in which a plurality of triangles facing the center and triangles with one vertex facing away from the center are alternately arranged along the entire circumference in a circumferential direction, and a button lens 411 in the truss-like pattern. , sides extending from both ends of the base to the center of the button lens 411, and oblique sides extending from the tips of the sides to the center of the base. , the oblique side of the right-angled triangle pattern, the side extending longer than the right-angled triangle pattern from the center of the base of the triangle of the truss pattern to the center side of the button lens 411, and the right-angled triangle shape from the tip of the side. and a pattern in the shape of a modified isosceles triangle composed of a side extending to the tip of the oblique side of the pattern.

That is, the first button decoration portion 411a is configured by combining a plurality of triangles. Although not shown, the triangles forming the first button decoration portion 411a are formed in a polyhedral shape with faces facing different directions. As a result, the front side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape, while the back side is formed in a polyhedral shape at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a. The plate thickness of the button lens 411 changes in a complicated manner at the portion , and the light passing through this portion is irregularly refracted. Therefore, at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, the player can see a geometric pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined, and at the same time, it is possible to obscure the rear member due to irregular refraction.

A guide boss portion 413c in the button base 413 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side. The guide boss portion 413c is inserted into the holding hole 451d of the second base unit 450, and a button shaft 452 held in the holding hole 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 in the tubular interior. is slidably inserted. In this example, the operation button 410 is attached to the guide boss portion 413c so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction by means of a button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 inserted from behind.

[3-4g-2. frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button 410 from the front side, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in a shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, and is given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

[3-4g-3. Decoration board unit]
The decoration board unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 57, 69 to 71 and the like. The decoration board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the second base unit 450 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. , the second effect operation unit 400A can be given vibration.

The decoration board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 whose upper side is open, and an operation button left external decoration board 422 and an operation button right external decoration board 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the board base 421, respectively. , and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 .

The decoration board unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the decoration board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400, and is given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

[3-4g-4. second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 73 and the like. FIG. 73 is a front perspective view of the second base unit of the second effect operation unit. The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the operation button 410 attached so that it can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, and the door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415. It is something that can be done.

The second base unit 450 includes a unit base 451 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415, and a unit base 451 that protrudes from the front surface of the unit base 451 and extends rearward into four cylindrical guide bosses 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. an operation button spring through which each of the four button shafts 452 is inserted to bias the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410 forward. (not shown), and three press detection sensors 454 attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 for detecting the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, respectively.

The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 includes an annular main body portion 451a, a cover portion 451b projecting rearward in a hemispherical shape from the inner peripheral edge of the main body portion 451a, and a front surface of the main body portion 451a. A through hole 451c that is substantially rectangular and extends vertically when viewed and penetrates the cover portion 451b in the front and rear direction, four holding holes 451d recessed rearward from the front surface of the main body portion 451a in the form of blind holes, and the main body portion 451a. An upper bearing portion 451e recessed in a semicircular (U-shaped) shape from the front to the rear in the upper portion of the body portion 451a, and a semicircular shape coaxially with the upper bearing portion 451e from the front to the rear in the lower portion of the main body portion 451a. A lower bearing portion 451f recessed in a (U-shape) and a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g formed on both left and right sides of the upper bearing portion 451e on the upper front surface of the main body portion 451a to restrict rotation of the screen unit 470. and have.

An annular body portion 451a of the unit base 451 has an inner circumference and an outer circumference that are substantially the same size as the board base 421 of the decoration board unit 420, which is formed in a C shape. A decoration board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the body portion 451a. The cover portion 451b is sized to accommodate the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, which is rotatably attached by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, without coming into contact with the screen unit 470 when it rotates. there is The through-hole 451c is sized to allow the projector 500 of the door-frame-side second effect display device 460A to pass through from behind.

The four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 are formed at the four upper, lower, right, and left corners of the front surface of the main body 451a at positions corresponding to the four guide bosses 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. As shown in FIG. These holding holes 451d are formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c so that the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted therein. Button shafts 452 are mounted coaxially with the central axes of these four holding holes 451d. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d protrudes forward from the front surface of the body portion 451a. By inserting the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d into the cylindrical guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410, the operation button 410 can be slidably attached in the front-rear direction via the guide boss portion 413c. can be done.

Of the four holding holes 451d, the upper left holding hole 451d extends counterclockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the direction. In addition, the upper right holding hole 451d of the four holding holes 451d rotates clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of . On the other hand, the two lower holding holes 451d among the four holding holes 451d are formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the upper two holding holes 451d. .

Operation button springs (not shown) are respectively inserted into the four holding holes 451d, and the front ends of these operation button springs come into contact with the rear ends of the guide bosses 413c, thereby allowing the operation buttons to move through the guide bosses 413c. 410 is urged forward.

The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U shape that is open at the front and extends rearward. The centers of the portions of the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f extending in a semicircular arc are coaxially positioned. The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A are inserted into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f from the front, and then the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are inserted from the front side. is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a, the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be rotatably supported.

The front surfaces of the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 have their extension lines (surfaces) passing through the central axis of the semicircular portion of the upper bearing portion 451e recessed backward in a U shape. , and separated in the circumferential direction by a predetermined angle around the central axis. These pair of rotation restricting portions 451g restrict the rotation range of the screen unit 470 by coming into contact with the stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 in the state assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. there is In this embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to an angular range of 90 degrees by a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

Although not shown, magnets are embedded in the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g, respectively, and are brought into contact with the rotation restricting portions 451g by being magnetically attached to the iron plate attached to the stopper 475b. The stopper 475b is made difficult to separate from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Therefore, the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the steel plate of the stopper 475b allow the screen unit 470 to be in the first position with the main screen 471 directed forward, or in the second position with the sub-screen 472 directed forward. The screen unit 470 can be held in one of two positions, and the screen unit 470 is prevented from turning by pressing the operation button 410 or vibrating with the vibration motor 424 or the like. The effect image by the second effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

The three pressure detection sensors 454 are mounted on the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 . More specifically, the three pressure detection sensors 454 are arranged on the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 451d, the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 451d, and the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 451d. are attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d. The three pressure detection sensors 454 are attached to the center of the unit base 451 at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction. These three press detection sensors 454 can detect the three detection pieces 413 d of the operation button 410 .

[3-4g-5. Door frame side second effect display device]
The door frame side second effect display device 460A of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71 and the like. The door-frame-side second effect display device 460A is attached to the second base unit 450 and allows the player to see the effect image through the transparent portion of the operation button 410 . The door frame side second effect display device 460A includes a screen unit 470 mounted rotatably about an axis extending vertically by an upper bearing portion 451e and a lower bearing portion 451f of a second base unit 450, and a second base. An upper bearing member 480 attached to the front upper portion of the unit 450 and rotatably attaching the upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450, and attached to the front lower portion of the second base unit 450. and a lower bearing member 485 rotatably mounting the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450 .

In addition, the door frame side second effect display device 460A includes a rotation drive unit 490 that rotates the screen unit 470 and is attached to the upper part of the second base unit 450, and a cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450. A projector 500 is arranged and capable of projecting and displaying an effect image on the screen unit 470 from the rear, and the projector 500 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 451 so as to cover the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear side. A box-shaped projector mounting member 505 with an open front and a left side of the rotary drive unit 490 on the top of the second base unit 450 in a front view are mounted so as to cover the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 from above. and two rotation detection sensors 507 attached to the upper cover 506 for detecting the rotational position (rotational position) of the screen unit 470 .

[3-4g-5a. screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71 and the like. The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the second base unit 450 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically. The effect image can be displayed (projected display) so that it can be visually recognized by the player.

The screen unit 470 includes a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 that is milky white and has translucency, and a disk-shaped center portion that is an axis. A sub-screen 472 that is curved to bulge outward in the direction and is milky white and has translucency, and a main screen 471 that protrude outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis from the center in the axial direction of both ends of the main screen 471 in a columnar shape. an upper shaft member 473 and a lower shaft member 474, an operating gear member 475 attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473 and having gear teeth 475a formed along approximately half of the outer circumference, and a sub-screen 472. A sub-screen decorative member 476 (see FIGS. 74 and 75, etc.) which is transparent and formed in a relief shape imitating a predetermined character (skull), and a sub-screen 472 attached to the back side of the sub-screen 472. A sub-screen decoration board 477 (see FIG. 75 etc.) having a plurality of LEDs 477a mounted on the surface facing the and a semi-arcuate peripheral edge decoration member 478 extending short along the edge.

The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is formed to have a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body 451 a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 . The main screen 471 is formed so that its length in the axial direction is approximately 4/3 times the radius of the semi-cylindrical shape. The main screen 471 is decorated so that both ends in the axial direction are bordered by the peripheral edge decoration portion 472 a of the sub-screen 472 and the peripheral edge decoration member 478 .

The sub-screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape matches the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which its central axis extends (see FIG. 74(b)). . The sub-screen 472 is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer periphery to the center side, and has a peripheral decorative portion 472a in which a plurality of square pyramid-shaped unevennesses are arranged in a circumferential direction, and the inner side of the peripheral decorative portion 472a is closed. and a curved screen portion 472b. A peripheral decorative portion 472 a of the sub-screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape so that the inner peripheral side protrudes in a direction away from the main screen 471 . The screen portion 472 b bulges in a spherical shape having a radius larger than that of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 in a direction away from the main screen 471 . A screen portion 472b of the sub-screen 472 is formed with a through hole, and a sub-screen decorative member 476 is attached so as to close the hole.

The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 and rotatably attached.

The operating gear member 475 protrudes outward from one of the gear teeth 475a that mesh with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotary drive unit 490 and is formed over a substantially half circumference, and from one of the circumferential ends of the gear teeth 475a. and a detection piece 475c protruding outward in a flat plate shape from the opposite side of the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a. The stopper 475b of the actuating gear member 475 is located in the concave portion 481a of the upper bearing member 480 which is recessed in an arc around the axis of the upper shaft member 473 in the assembled state of the second effect operation unit 400A. , the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted by coming into contact with a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 located at both ends in the recess 481a.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, an iron plate is attached to a portion of the stopper 475b that contacts the rotation restricting portion 451g, and this iron plate can be magnetically attached to the magnet embedded in the rotation restricting portion 451g. It's like

The screen unit 470 can rotate between a first position in which the main screen 471 faces forward and a second position in which the sub-screen 472 faces forward. The detection piece 475 c is detected by the rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506 .

The sub-screen decorative member 476 is attached to the screen portion 472b of the sub-screen 472. As shown in FIG. The sub-screen decorative member 476 is made of a transparent member and is formed in a skull-like relief, and the plate thickness changes in a complicated manner. it's getting harder. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the sub-screen decorative member 476 has characters "PUSH" formed in a skull-like relief.

The sub-screen decoration board 477 is attached to the back side of the sub-screen 472 so that a gap is formed between it and the sub-screen 472, and a plurality of LEDs 477a are provided on the front side (the side facing the sub-screen 472). is implemented. The sub-screen decoration substrate 477 has an outer shape smaller than that of the sub-screen decoration member 476 and has a white surface. By causing the LEDs 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 to emit light, the sub-screen decoration member 476 and the sub-screen 472 can be decorated with light. More specifically, the sub-screen decoration board 477 emits light from the LEDs 477a so that the "eyes" of the skull and the letters "PUSH" can be decorated with strong light emission.

In addition, since the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is arranged relatively close to the sub-screen 472 and does not have a member for diffusing light between itself and the sub-screen 472, when the LED 477a emits light, , the point light source of the LED 477a can be recognized by the player. Furthermore, the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 can block light from the projector 500 . Therefore, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 can be projected onto the sub-screen 472 by the projector 500 .

The peripheral edge decorative member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral edge decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and has a plurality of rows of quadrangular pyramid-shaped unevenness in the circumferential direction of the arc, similar to the peripheral edge decorative portion 472a. .

[3-4g-5b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are attached to the main body portion of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f that are open forward in the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. It is attached to the front surface of 451a. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are arranged in a state in which the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 are inserted into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 from the front, respectively. , the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably attached to the second base unit 450 by attaching them to the front surface of the unit base 451 .

The upper bearing member 480 includes a bearing member 481 attached to the upper portion of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e having an open front side, and a frame top lens decoration substrate 482 attached to the upper front surface of 481 . The bearing member 481 has a concave portion 481a that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear surface toward the front so that the center in the left-right direction is the deepest. The concave portion 481a of the bearing member 481 in the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape centering on the axial center of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 in the assembled state of the second effect operation unit 400A. A stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 in the unit 470 is inserted and arranged, and a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 are positioned at both ends of the arc of the recess 481a. The concave portion 481a recessed in an arc shape allows the stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 to rotate well between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

The frame top lens decoration board 482 of the upper bearing member 480 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface side, and is positioned behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 in the state assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. ing. As a result, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light emission by causing the LED of the frame top lens decoration substrate 482 to emit light.

The lower bearing member 485 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front of the lower bearing portion 451f. The lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 is inserted into the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, and the lower bearing member 485 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 451. can be rotatably mounted.

[3-4g-5c. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. The rotation driving unit 490 is attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 and can rotate the screen unit 470 . The rotary drive unit 490 includes a unit case 491 that is attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 and has a hollow interior, and a switching drive motor 492 that is attached to the lower surface of the unit case 491 and has a rotating shaft protruding into the unit case 491 . , a spur gear-shaped drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotary shaft of the switching drive motor, and a spur gear-shaped first drive gear engaged with the drive gear and rotatably mounted in the unit case 491 A transmission gear (not shown) meshes with the first transmission gear and can mesh with the gear teeth 475a of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470, and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. and a second transmission gear 495 in the form of a spur gear.

The second transmission gear 495 of the rotation drive unit 490 is engaged with the gear teeth 475a of the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 when assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. The rotation drive unit 490 rotates the switching drive motor 492 to rotate the screen unit 470 around an axis extending back and forth through the drive gear, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a. It can be rotated.

[3-4g-5d. projector]
Projector 500 of door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71 and the like. The projector 500 is arranged inside the hemispherical cover portion 451 b of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 and attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 via the projector attachment member 505 . The projector 500 can project and display the effect image on the main screen 471 or the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 by projecting the effect image toward the main screen 471 or the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 .

The projector 500 includes a cubic projector main body 501 attached to a projector mounting member 505, and a lens unit 502 projecting forward from the projector main body 501 in a columnar shape and projecting an effect image forward from the front end.

In this projector 500, the rear portion of the projector main body 501 is attached to the projector mounting member 505, and the lens portion 502 and the projector main body 501 pass through the through hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side and are arranged inside the cover portion 451b. Mounted as

The projector 500 can project an effect image over substantially the front surface of the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display a still image and a moving image as the effect image. This projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal projector and has an autofocus function.

[3-4g-5e. Projector mounting member]
The projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71 and the like. The projector mounting member 505 is formed in the shape of a box with an open front. The projector 500 is mounted inside, and the projector mounting member 505 is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 . The projector attachment member 505 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 to cover the cover portion 451 b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500 .

The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction. . The rear wall of the projector mounting member 505 is formed with a plurality of slits 505a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the heat emitted from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505a.

A second effect operation unit relay board 515 and a relay board cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 in front view.

[3-4g-5f. Upper cover and rotation detection sensor]
Upper cover 506 and rotation detection sensor 507 of door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71 and the like. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to cover the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 from above. The rotation detection sensor 507 is for detecting the rotational position of the screen unit 470, and is attached to the lower surface of the upper cover 506 while being separated from each other.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are attached at positions separated from each other by a rotation angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis of the screen unit 470. A detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are the detection piece 475c at the first position where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 faces forward, and the second position where the sub-screen 472 faces forward. The time detection piece 475c can be detected, respectively. Based on the detection signal of the detection piece 475c by these two rotation detection sensors 507, the rotation drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotation drive unit 490 is controlled.

[3-4g-6. buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71 and the like. The buffer unit 510 is attached to the lower surface of the door-frame-side second effect display device 460A, and absorbs the impact when the second effect operation unit 400A is hit from above, and the plate unit cover of the plate unit 320 is provided. 326 is transmitted to the bottom plate portion 326i.

The cushioning unit 510 is in contact with an elastically deformable plate-shaped cushioning member 511 whose top surface is in contact with the bottom surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and the bottom surface of the cushioning member 511. and a buffer base 512 mounted relatively accessible to the underside of the projector mounting member 505 .

The cushioning base 512 of the cushioning unit 510 includes a flat plate-shaped body portion 512a that abuts on the lower surface of the cushioning member 511, and leg pieces that protrude downward from both left and right sides of the body portion 512a when viewed from the front and extend in the front-rear direction. 512b and . The leg portion 512b of the cushioning base 512 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the state assembled to the door frame 3. As shown in FIG.

This cushioning unit 510 is designed so that the projector mounting member 505 attached to the base unit 430 compresses the cushioning member 511 in the cushioning unit 510 when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pushed downward or struck. down to . The impact is absorbed by compressing the buffer member 511 . Then, when the projector mounting member 505 moves further downward, the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 contacts the upper surface side of the main body portion 512 a of the buffer base 512 . Since the body portion 512a has a gap between it and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 by the left and right leg portions 512b, the projector mounting member abuts on the upper surface side of the body portion 512a. When the 505 moves further downward, the flat plate-shaped main body portion 512a is bent, and the bending of the main body portion 512a can also absorb the impact. Furthermore, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the main body portion 512a that is bent downward contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the tray unit cover 326, and further bending of the main body portion 512a is restricted. , the impact is transmitted to the plate unit cover 326 . In this way, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly hit from above, the impact can be absorbed in multiple stages, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit cover 326 can be absorbed. 326a and the like can be prevented from being damaged by avoiding the application of excessive force.

[3-4g-7. Effect of Second Production Operation Unit]
The effects of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77 and the like. FIG. 74(a) is an explanatory diagram of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and (b) is a sub-unit of the screen unit. FIG. 10 is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the screen directed forward; 75(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line JJ in FIG. 74(a), and FIG. 75(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK in FIG. 74(b). FIG. 76(a) is a view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen facing forward, and is hidden by the first button decorative portion of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. FIG. 11B is an explanatory diagram showing the part to be covered, and (b) shows the part to be hidden by the first button decorative portion of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the second effect operation unit in the state of (a). It is an explanatory diagram. FIG. 77(a) is a diagram of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub-screen facing forward, and is hidden by the first button decorative portion of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. FIG. 11B is an explanatory diagram showing the part to be covered, and (b) shows the part to be hidden by the first button decorative portion of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the second effect operation unit in the state of (a). It is an explanatory diagram.

The second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment changes the decoration inside the operation button 410, or The player can be entertained by displaying an effect image in 410, and the player can be made to operate the operation button 410 to participate in the effect presented to the player. be.

The second effect operation unit 400A has a total height substantially equal to the height of the portion below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 . Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is formed to have a total width slightly larger than 1/3 of the total width of the door frame 3.例文帳に追加The second effect operation unit 400A is arranged in the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) when viewed from the front.

The upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. As shown in FIG. The second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the plate unit 320 and is located between the lower end of the leg portion 512b of the buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. A gap is formed in the That is, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached only to the upper part of the plate unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

In addition, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. installed so as to be As a result, the second effect operation unit 400A is arranged so that the central axis CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 that protrudes forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is aligned with a vertical line. At an angle of 63 degrees to it, it is slanted to move upward as it goes forward. As a result, when the player sits down in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is placed above the plate unit 320 (the second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 passes through the vicinity of the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the game area 5a to the second effect operation unit 400A (the operation button 410), the operation button 410 can be viewed from the front (projection view from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). Therefore, the operation button 410, the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the operation button 410, etc. can be visually recognized in a good condition.

In the second effect operation unit 400A, button shafts 452 held in four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 slide on the four cylindrical guide bosses 413c of the operation button 410, respectively. It is movably inserted and biased forward by an operation button spring (not shown). In the normal state (state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is pushed to the frame unit 415 by the biasing force of the operation button spring. is in contact with the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In the normal state, the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A extends forward from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 from the central side (center axis CL side) of the button frame 412. Protruding. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that protrudes forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface), a portion protruding forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 67, etc.).

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is set to about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end thereof) faces the frame unit with respect to the direction of the central axis CL of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button 410 moves backward along the center axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 contacts the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 that protrudes forward in a curved surface shape (shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter compared to the performance operation button provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. likely to be To be more specific, the operation buttons for presentation in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that their central axes extend substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation of the second presentation operation unit 400A of this embodiment is Since the button 410 is attached with the center axis CL inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in a conventional pachinko machine, the button 410 moves away from the center axis CL of the operation button 410. The site will be pressed (see Figure 61).

By the way, since the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed on a flat surface to be pressed by the player, if the operation buttons are enlarged while the portions to be pressed are flat surfaces, When a part of the operation button deviated from the center is pressed, the surface to be pressed is tilted so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button cannot retreat straight. There is a possibility that the pressing operation becomes impossible.

On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment, the portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) that bulges forward. shape), when a position distant from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. can do. Therefore, even if any position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without being tilted. You can fully enjoy the performance to operate.

In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A has the vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front surface of the board base 421 in the decoration board unit 420, and as described above, the second effect operation unit 400A is suspended. Since only the upper portion is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the portion farthest from the attachment portion will vibrate. Since it is generated, the entire second effect operation unit 400A can be largely (strongly) vibrated, and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the second effect operation unit 400A. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly below the position (near the upper portion of the operation button 410) that is relatively easy for the player to press, the player pressing the operation button 410 is strongly vibrated. can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained with the performance.

Furthermore, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the bottom plate of the plate unit cover 326 A buffer unit 510 is arranged between the upper surface of the portion 326i. The cushioning unit 510 includes an elastically deformable cushioning member 511, and a gap is formed between the main body portion 512a and the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pushed downward or struck, the impact is multi-staged by the elastic deformation (compression) of the cushioning member 511, the deflection of the body portion 512a of the cushioning base 512, and the like. It is possible to avoid the application of excessive force to the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, etc., and damage to the second effect operation unit 400A etc. can be avoided. can be prevented. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation is performed. Since the button 410, the second effect operation unit 400A, and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid the interruption of the game due to damage, suppress the decline in the player's interest, and make it difficult to damage. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

In addition, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses and operates is formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, compared with the case of a flat plate shape, The strength and rigidity are high, and even if the button lens 411 is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed over the entire button lens 411, making it difficult to break.

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are made of transparent members, the first button decorative portion formed on the back side thereof The uneven decorations such as 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) (see FIG. 63). In addition, in the parts where these uneven decorations are formed, the light is refracted in a complicated way because the board thickness changes, so it is difficult to see the rear side through the parts where the uneven decorations are formed. .

Since the second effect operation unit 400A is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center, the plurality of first button decoration portions 411a It is possible to make it difficult to see the rear at the portion of the outer peripheral edge of the portion inside the button lens 411 by decorating the unevenness by combining the triangles. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rear in the direction of the central axis CL) are the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device. 460A is located between the outer circumference of the screen unit 470, and the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap allows the screen unit 470 to move from the front side (player side) to the outside or rear side of the screen unit 470. can be made invisible. As a result, even if the door frame side second effect display device 460A is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating. Discomfort can be prevented, the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be arranged in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

To be more specific, the second effect operation unit 400A uses the first button decorative portion 411a, the second button decorative portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to produce the effect in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, etc., which are located on the rear side (deep side) outside the outer periphery of the main screen 471, the sub-screen 472, etc., can be viewed from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. made invisible. Specifically, in the first position where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 faces forward, the upper and lower outer sides of the main screen 471, the left outer side of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and the right side of the peripheral decorative member 478 The outer portion (in FIG. 76, the cross-hatched portion surrounded by a dashed line) is made invisible to the player.

On the other hand, in the state of the second position in which the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 faces forward, the portion outside the annular peripheral edge decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 (in FIG. ) is hidden from the player side. In this way, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, etc., the outside and the back side of the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 are made difficult to see. It can be hidden, and the appearance of the operation button 410 and the second effect operation unit 400A as a whole can be improved.

When the main screen 471 is in the first position facing forward, the screen portion 472b of the sub-screen 472 is adjusted by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, etc. of the button lens 411. Also, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are difficult to see (see FIG. 76). This makes it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the sub-screen 472 and the fact that the main screen 471 is rotatable. When the button 410 is moved beyond the expectation of the player, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the state of the second position where the sub-screen 472 faces forward, the first button decorative portion 411a, the second button decorative portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like of the button lens 411 allow the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft Member 474 is obscured (see Figure 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub-screen 472 (sub-screen decoration member 476) is rotatable. Players can be entertained.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has a button lens 411 through which the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged on the rear side of the operation button 410 can be visually recognized. The door frame side second effect display is provided with a polyhedral first button decoration portion 411a that combines a plurality of triangular surfaces within a predetermined width, and is arranged inside and behind the operation button 410. The device 460</b>A is provided with a peripheral decoration part 472 a of a sub-screen 472 in which a plurality of square pyramids are arranged in line, and a peripheral edge decoration member 478 . As a result, the triangular decoration (first button decorative portion 411a) arranged on the front side and the square decoration (peripheral edge decorative portion 472a and peripheral edge decorative member 478) arranged on the rear side overlap so as to cross each other. This makes it possible to show the complicated geometric pattern to the player, improve the appearance, and suppress the decline in interest of the player.

In addition, as described above, since the first button decoration portion 411a mainly having a triangular shape and the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a and the peripheral edge decoration member 478 mainly having a square shape are separated in the front-rear direction, the player's eye is When the position moves, the degree of overlap between them changes, so that the geometric patterns that appear to overlap change, making it possible to show the player a moving decoration, and at the same time, the player can see a three-dimensional decoration with depth. can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged inside and behind the operation button 410, the screen unit 470 is rotated by driving the switching drive motor 492 to turn the main screen 471 forward, or the sub screen 472 can be directed forward, and the decoration consisting of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, when the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. A geometric pattern decoration in which the decoration consisting of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a row cuts through the decoration consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape on the first button decoration portion 411 a of the button lens 411 . can be shown to the player. On the other hand, when the sub-screen 472 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74(b), the peripheral edge decorative portion 472a extends in an annular shape, and the decoration consists of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in an annular shape. However, the player can see the decoration of the geometric pattern that overlaps the decoration consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape on the first button decoration portion 411 a of the button lens 411 . Therefore, by rotating the screen unit 470, the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed. The change can suggest to the player the arrival of a chance or the like, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the loss of interest.

In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A has screens having different switchable forms (main screen 471 and sub-screen 472) in the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410. Since the unit 470 and the projector 500 for projecting and displaying the performance image on the screen unit 470 are provided, the performance image completely different from the performance image displayed by the liquid crystal display device can be displayed, and the player has a strong impact. can be given and entertained. More specifically, the screen unit 470 includes a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 and a disk-shaped sub-screen 472 having a relief-shaped sub-screen decorative member 476 in the center. They are spaced apart in the circumferential direction by a rotation angle of 90 degrees around the axis.

In the door frame side second effect display device 460A, in the state of the first position where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 faces forward, the central axis of the semi-cylindrical shape extends in the left-right direction. When viewed from the front, it looks like a square (rectangle) extending vertically (see FIG. 74(a)). When the effect image is projected forward from the projector 500 arranged behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75(a)), and is milky white with translucency. Through the main screen 471, the effect image projected from the front side can be viewed. Since the main screen 471 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a smooth surface, the effect image is also curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. As a result, while the display screen of a general liquid crystal display device is flat, the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is different from the main screen 471, to surprise the player, to draw the player's attention to the main screen 471, and to entertain the effect image projected and displayed on the main screen 471.例文帳に追加be able to.

On the other hand, in the state of the second position in which the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 faces forward, the center axis of the disc-shaped center substantially coincides with the center axis of the operation button 410, and the circular operation button 410 is seen from the front. A sub-screen decorative member 476 resembling a skull appears in the center (see FIG. 74(b)). In this state, when the effect image is emitted forward from the projector 500 arranged at the rear, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 . By the way, since the flat plate-like non-translucent sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is attached to the rear side of the sub-screen 472, the effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 is projected at the portion of this sub-screen decoration substrate 477. is blocked, and the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected onto the central portion of the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 (see FIG. 75(b)). Therefore, on the sub-screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the peripheral portion except for the central portion where the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is projected. At this time, if the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub-screen decoration board 477 is made to emit light, the central portion of the sub-screen 472 can be decorated with light, and the sub-screen provided in the center of the sub-screen 472 can be decorated with light. The screen decoration member 476 can be decorated with light. In addition, by causing the LEDs 477a of the sub-screen decoration board 477 to emit light, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration board 477 projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 by the light from the projector 500 can be made difficult to see. The entire side can be decorated brightly.

With the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the door-frame-side second effect display device 460A causes the LEDs 477a of the sub-screen decoration board 477 to emit light, and also displays the effect image (moving image) forward from the projector 500. When irradiated, an effect image is displayed on a portion of the sub-screen 472 where the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is not projected, that is, a portion outside the sub-screen decoration member 476 made of skull-like decoration. The sub-screen decorative member 476 located inside is decorated with light emission by the LEDs 477a of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477. As shown in FIG. In this state, the outer side of the luminous decoration of the fixed sub-screen decorative member 476 is decorated with the effect image (moving image), and a decorative effect completely different from the luminous decoration of the decorative members in the past pachinko machines. The sub-screen 472 can be shown to the player, giving a strong impact to the player and drawing the player's attention to the sub-screen 472 . Also, in this state, the light of the LED 477a shines brighter (with higher luminance) than the brightness of the effect image inside the effect image. can be displayed to strongly attract the interest of the player and to display a performance image that further entertains the player.

In this way, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the decoration of the screen unit 470 (peripheral edge decorative portion 472a and peripheral edge decorative member 478) in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can strongly attract the player's interest and have a high appealing power because the movement and the three-dimensional decoration can be shown to the player.

In addition, the second production operation unit 400A can irradiate a sub-screen decoration board 477 with an LED 477a mounted on the front side behind the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), or irradiate light such as a production image forward. The second effect display device 460A on the side of the door frame having a projector 500 is provided, and the inside of the operation button 410 can be favorably decorated with light emission by the second effect display device 460A on the side of the door frame.

In addition, behind the second effect operation unit 400A and the second button decoration portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 in the decoration substrate unit 420 is provided. and the first LED 423a of the operation button right external decoration board 423 are arranged, and by lighting these first LEDs 422a and 423a, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are decorated with light emission. be able to. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right external decoration board 423 are formed by the cylindrical body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. 415 and the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a and the outer side of the inner cylindrical portion 416d, and the operation is facilitated. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be favorably illuminated.

Furthermore, the second effect operation unit 400A is arranged behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer A second LED 423b is arranged on the decoration substrate 423, and the frame side lenses 417 can be decorated with light emission by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right external decoration board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner tubular portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with good light. .

In addition, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the frame top lens decoration substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415. By causing the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decoration substrate 482 to emit light, the frame top lens 418 can be favorably decorated with light emission.

In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A has display screens of different forms by rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged inside and behind the operation button 410. An effect image can be displayed by switching to the main screen 471 or the sub-screen 472, and the player can be presented with an effect that is impossible in a conventional pachinko machine, in which the shape of the display screen changes (switches). , the player can be entertained with a strong impact.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 78 to 81. FIG. Figure 78 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a front perspective view of the door frame left side unit, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. 1 is a perspective view seen from . FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 81 is a sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 78(a). The door frame left side unit 530 is arranged above the tray unit 320 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (door frame left side decorative board 160). It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100 . The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the left side of the through hole 111 in the front view of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the left unit base 531. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffuser lens member 532 attached to the front surface, and a translucent property arranged in front of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown), and a left unit top that is attached to the upper front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, protrudes forward in a cylindrical frame shape, and extends vertically. a decoration base 534, a left unit lower decoration base 535 attached to the front lower portion of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decoration lens member and protruding forward in a frame shape shorter than the left unit upper decoration base 534; A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front sides of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535, and the left unit. and a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536 .

A left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating back and forth on the front surface. As illustrated, the plurality of openings 531a include circular holes and vertically extending rectangular holes. The left unit base 531 has LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and door frame left side lower decorative board 162). It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. The openings 531a of the left unit base 531 are formed so that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the door frame 3 is assembled. The left unit base 531 is made of an opaque member.

The left unit diffuser lens member 532 is made of a transparent member and is vertically divided into an upper diffuser lens member 532A and a lower diffuser lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a circular lens portion 532a that is circular in front view and corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a rectangular lens portion that is square in front view and corresponds to the square opening 531a. and a lens portion 532b. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532a and square lens portion 532b. formed.

A circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. With this circular lens portion 532a, the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged in the rear can be emitted forward in the form of dots. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be decorated with light emission by the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 532c recessed rearward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusion lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffuse reflection portion 532c on the front surface. , an input lens portion 532e that bulges rearward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and an input lens portion 532e on the outside of the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface that extends forward as it moves away from the input lens portion 532e. and a forward reflecting portion 532f that is slanted for movement.

The front diffuser lens portion 532d of the square lens portion 532b is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. More specifically, the front diffuser lens portion 532d has grooves recessed rearward in an arc shape in a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and a mountain portion between the grooves extends forward. It bulges out in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. Further, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portions and the peak portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with respect to the radially extending line that divides it in the circumferential direction.

The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 532e. These plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portions are formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f has a triangular cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, in which the peaks between the grooves are formed in a sawtooth shape. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that the grooves and peaks move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that groove portions and ridge portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with respect to the radially extending line dividing the portion in the circumferential direction. The radially extending line that divides in the circumferential direction coincides with the radially extending dividing line in the front diffuser lens portion 532d.

When the rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

Light emitted forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input into the square lens portion 532b from the input lens portion 532e. Since the input lens portion 532e bulges rearward into a curved surface (convex lens shape), it refracts the light that spreads forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a so as to travel forward in parallel. Almost all of the light can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 532c. Then, the light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is directed perpendicularly to the longitudinally extending axis (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. direction), and travels outward along the front surface of the square lens portion 532b from the center side. Also, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection portion 532c travels from the central side to the outside (direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected outward from the central side in the rectangular lens portion 532b substantially parallel to the front surface of the left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame reaches the saw-shaped forward reflecting portion 532f, it is reflected forward by the surface of the forward reflecting portion 532f. reflect to the side. At this time, since the rear surface of the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that it moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as it moves away from the center. (see Figure 81). As a result, the light that is reflected outward over the entire thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction by the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is sequentially forwardly reflected by the front reflection portion 532f as it goes from the center to the outside. can be reflected.

The light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f passes through the front diffusion lens portion 532d and is emitted forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b. At this time, since the front diffusing lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f can be diffused in various directions. light can be emitted substantially uniformly forward (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) from the front surface of the .

In the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflection portion 532f, the square lens portion 532b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric grooves by a plurality of lines extending radially, and then forming a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves with the dividing lines as boundaries. are shifted in the radial direction, and the concentric arc-shaped grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted forward from the front surface of the rectangular lens portion 532b has a concentric striped pattern of light and shade. It is possible to avoid becoming light, and to irradiate forward light with more uniform density. As a result, the multifaceted decorative portion in front of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission.

A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 . The left unit decorative lens member includes a circular decorative portion formed in a portion positioned in front of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and a portion positioned in front of the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. and a multifaceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and which extends short in the front and rear directions. The polyhedral decorative part has a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts arranged in a vertical direction on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a polyhedron consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in a vertical direction on both sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is shaped like this. The circular decorative portion and the polyhedral decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561 a and the polyhedral decorative portion 561 b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550 .

The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536 . In addition, the left unit decorative lens member is configured such that the circular decorative portion is projected forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 by the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532, and the multifaceted decorative portion is projected forward from the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. By the light irradiated to each of them, they are decorated with light emission.

The left unit upper decoration base 534 has a rectangular shape extending vertically in a front view, and is formed in a rectangular tubular shape extending back and forth. The left unit upper decoration base 534 has a portion forming the lower surface of the outer circumference inclined so as to protrude downward from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower part of the portion penetrates in the front-rear direction. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is made of an opaque member.

The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed in a U shape that opens upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is inclined from the approximate center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves rearward as it goes upward. This left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed of an opaque member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530 . The left unit decorative cover 536 has a vertically intermediate portion that is bent rearward. A V-shaped part whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the unit lower decorative base 535 connects the lower end of the upper V-shaped part and the upper end of the lower V-shaped part. It is composed of a linear part and a.

The left unit decorative cover 536 is attached at both upper and lower ends to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is made of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative members 537 extend short in the vertical direction and are attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is made of an opaque member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86 and the like. Fig. 82 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. 1 is a perspective view seen from . FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame right-side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame right-side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 85 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 82(a). FIG. 86(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 82(a), and FIG. 86(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 82(a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320 .

The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the right side of the through hole 111 in the front view of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface of the right unit base 551. and a door-frame right-side decorative board 552 attached to the front side of the door-frame right-side decorative board 552, which is mounted on the front side of the right unit base 551 on the left side of the front view center and extends in the vertical direction and the front-back direction. A transparent plate-shaped right unit left diffusion lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decoration member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decoration member. and a transparent plate-like right unit left cover 555 attached to the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of 554 .

In addition, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 in front view, and on the front side of the right unit base 551 on the right side of the center in front view and the right unit left diffusion lens. A transparent plate-shaped right unit right diffusion lens member 556 that is attached to the member 553 and extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and is attached to the right side surface of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and is decorated. and a right unit right cover 558 in the form of a transparent plate attached to the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. there is

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and is open on the front and right sides. A box-shaped opaque right unit left light shielding member 559 and an opaque right light shielding member 559 attached to the left side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and a right unit right light shielding member 560 having a flat plate shape.

The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and has a translucent right diffuser having a polyhedral decoration on the front end. It is mounted on the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the unit decorative lens member 561 , the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 , the front end sides of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 . A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating in the front and rear direction, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover. and a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of 563 . Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to penetrate the right unit base 551 vertically, and is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570 . A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The right unit base 551 is made of an opaque member.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative board 552 includes a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a left LED 552b mounted on the center of the front surface in the left-right direction. and a plurality of medium LEDs 552c. The left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is for lighting up the right unit left decorative member 554 through the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 . Also, the right LED 552b is for lighting and decorating the right unit right decoration member 557 via the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. FIG. The middle LED 552c is for decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is white on both front and rear surfaces. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative board 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is connected to the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 553b projecting from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in front view in a short flat shape, A plurality of notch portions 553c are cut out in a rectangular shape from the right end of the rear wall portion 553b to the left when viewed from the front, and a plurality of notch portions 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. 554, input lens portions 553e protruding rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a and provided in a plurality in the vertical direction, and on the right side of the main body portion 553a when viewed from the front. A plurality of side reflection portions 553f are arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is in the center in the vertical direction.

The body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a vertically extending quadrangular shape in side view, and the upper corner on the front end side is obliquely cut in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is slanted to move to the Also, as shown in FIG. 86, the main body portion 553a is aligned with the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move to the right in front view as it goes forward from the rear end side. Slightly slanted. The front end of the main body portion 553 a projects forward farther than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3 .

The right end of the rear wall portion 553b extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 contacts the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

A plurality of cutouts 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 . When the door-frame right-side unit 550 is assembled, the inner LEDs 552c of the door-frame right-side decorative substrate 552 face forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the plurality of inner LEDs 552c emit light from the right unit decorative lens member 561. can be decorated.

The housing recess 553 d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of the outer circumference substantially matches the outer shape of the left decorative member 554 of the right unit. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 553e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, when the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is vertically divided into 6 equal parts, it is formed at substantially the center in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 553e has a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending square protrudes rearward, and a concave portion forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved in a spherical shape. and a part. These input lens portions 553e are positioned just before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in the assembled state of the door frame right side unit 550 respectively. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body portion 553a.

A plurality (six) of the side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 553f is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface on the side farther from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f has a cross-sectional shape, when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 553e, formed in a sharp triangular shape in which the peaks between the grooves face toward the center. , the whole is formed in a saw-like shape. In addition, the side reflecting portions 553f are formed so that groove portions and ridge portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with radial lines separating the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves in the circumferential direction as boundaries. ing.

In this right unit left diffusion lens member 553, the light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 is directed into the body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e. is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted by the curved surface so that the light from the left LED 552a spreads. will be radially diffused toward the front from the center.

The body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door-frame right-side decorative substrate 552 so as to move to the right in front view as the whole goes forward. Light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decoration board 552 and incident on the main body 553a through the input lens 553e hits the flat left surface of the main body 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the body portion 553a due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the body portion 553a, and is reflected toward the side reflecting portion 553f on the inner surface of the left surface. becomes.

The light incident forward into the body portion 553a from the input lens portion 553e hits the sawtooth side reflecting portion 553f, is reflected leftward in front view, and travels outward from the left surface of the body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 passes through the main body portion 553a and is irradiated to the left side. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected leftward by the side reflecting portion 553f in the main portion 553a and the light emitted rightward from the side reflecting portion 553f are emitted from the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 to the left. Since the light reflected to the right and passed through the body portion 553a is irradiated to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the body portion 553a can be decorated with good brightness. can.

In the side reflection portion 553f, a plurality of concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of lines extending radially, and the plurality of concentric circular grooves are shifted in the radial direction with respect to the dividing lines to form concentric circular grooves. are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, the light emitted outward (leftward) from the left surface of the main body 553a is prevented from becoming light with concentric striped pattern shading. This makes it possible to irradiate leftward light with more uniform intensity. As a result, the right unit left decorative member 554 housed in the housing recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission.

Since the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is made of a transparent member, the side reflection lens member 553 formed on the opposite side from the front view left side of the main body portion 553a (the side where the accommodating recessed portion 553d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines in the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflection portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion. portion can be decorated with the side reflecting portion 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and decorations such as the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is designed to have The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 .

The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially bilaterally symmetrical with the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall projecting short to the left in front view from the rear side of the main body portion 556a. 556b, a plurality of notch portions 556c that are cut out in a rectangular shape from the left end of the rear wall portion 556b to the right when viewed from the front and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction; A front view of a housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, a plurality of input lens portions 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a and are provided in the vertical direction, and the main body portion 556a. A plurality of side reflection portions 556f are arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is centered in the vertical direction on the left side.

The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 has a vertically extending rectangular front end with an upper corner notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and a lower side extending upward toward the front. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to the right direction, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main body portion 553 a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 . Also, as shown in FIG. 86, the main body portion 556a is positioned with respect to the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move leftward in front view as it goes forward from the rear end side. Slightly slanted. The front end of the main body portion 556 a projects forward farther than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3 .

The left end of the rear wall portion 556 b extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 abuts against the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

A plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of the cutouts 556c correspond to the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. As shown in FIG. The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 . Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, a square opening penetrating back and forth between the notch portion 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the notch portion 556c of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. is formed, and the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be favorably decorated with light emission by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The housing recess 556 d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit. Thereby, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 556e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, when the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is vertically divided into six equal parts, it is formed at the approximate center in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 556e has a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending square protrudes rearward, and a recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved in a spherical shape. It has a part and a. These input lens portions 556e are positioned in front of the right LEDs 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in the assembled state of the door frame right side unit 550 respectively. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body portion 556a.

A plurality (six) of the side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 556f is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves circumferentially divided by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface on the side farther from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f has a cross-sectional shape, when cut in the radial direction centered on the input lens portion 556e, formed in a sharp triangular shape in which the peaks between the grooves face toward the center. , the whole is formed in a saw-like shape. In addition, the side reflecting portions 556f are formed so that the groove portions and the ridge portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with respect to the radial line that divides the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

In this right unit right diffusion lens member 556, the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is directed into the body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted by the curved surface so that the light from the right LED 552b spreads. will be radially diffused toward the front from the center.

The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the main body portion 556a moves to the left in front view as the whole goes forward. Light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decoration board 552 and incident on the main body 556a through the input lens 556e hits the flat right surface of the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the body portion 556a due to the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the body portion 556a, and is reflected toward the side reflecting portion 556f on the inner surface of the right surface. becomes.

The light incident forward into the body portion 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits the sawtooth side reflecting portion 556f, is reflected rightward in front view, and travels outward from the right surface of the body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (to the left in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 passes through the main body portion 556a and is irradiated to the right side. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected rightward by the side reflecting portion 556f in the main portion 556a and the light emitted leftward from the side reflecting portion 556f are emitted to the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560. Since the light reflected to the right direction and passed through the body portion 556a is irradiated to the right side, the right decorative member 557 of the right unit attached to the right side of the body portion 556a can be decorated with good brightness. can.

In the side reflection portion 556f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with respect to the dividing lines to form the concentric arc grooves. are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, the light irradiated outward (rightward) from the right surface of the main body portion 556a is prevented from becoming light with concentric striped pattern shading. It is possible to irradiate rightward light with more uniform density. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 housed in the housing recess 556d on the right surface of the main body 556a can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission.

In addition, since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is made of a transparent member, it is formed on the opposite side from the right side of the main body portion 556a in front view (the side where the housing recess 556d is formed). A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves and radially extending lines in the portion 556f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflection portion 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion. portion can be decorated with the side reflecting portion 556f.

The right decorative member 557 of the right unit is formed in a thin sheet shape, and decorations such as the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is designed to have The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially bilaterally symmetrical with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555 . Further, the decoration applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 when viewed from the side. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape that is open on the front and right sides. The right unit left light shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 559b projecting from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in front view in a short flat shape, and a rear wall portion 559b. A plurality of notch portions 559c are cut leftward from the right end of the wall portion 559b in a front view and have a plurality of cutout portions 559c formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. A plurality of flat reinforcement portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a are provided.

The main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a vertically extending rectangular shape in which the upper corners on the front end side are notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side extends upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape inclined so as to move, and has substantially the same outer shape as the body portions 553 a and 556 a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 .

The left end of the rear wall portion 559b extends to the right from the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 contacts the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

A plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of the cutouts 559c correspond to the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 . The plurality of notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, respectively. Therefore, when the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 559c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c emit light from the right unit decorative lens member 561. can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided in three sets spaced apart by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, one pair of reinforcing portions 559d having a height substantially equal to the left and right widths and spaced apart in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559 d is formed at a position behind a decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563 . The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are enhanced by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

The right light shielding member 560 of the right unit has a shape in a side view such that the upper corner on the front end side of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the body portion 559 a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 . The right unit right light shielding member 560 closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 .

The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 as shown in FIG. It is arranged so as to be close to the body portions 553 a and 556 a of the left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 . As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the horizontal direction, forming a space extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction with a predetermined width in the horizontal direction. . Through the space formed between the body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560, light emitted forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is emitted from the right unit decoration. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

In addition, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of an opaque member, and the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 illuminate forward, respectively. The light emitted is prevented from interfering with each other. Only the middle LED 552c can be used for luminous decoration.

Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged behind each of the divided spaces because the internal space is vertically divided into four by the three sets of reinforcing parts 559d. It is possible to prevent light from interfering between the spaces by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552, which is located in front of each space of the right unit decorative lens member 561. , can be independently decorated with light. In other words, the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550 can be vertically divided into a plurality of (four) areas, and each area can be illuminated independently.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 . The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and formed with a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is depressed and which extends short in the front-rear direction. The polyhedral decorative portion 561b has a plurality of rows of quadrangular pyramid-shaped parts arranged vertically on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of rows of polyhedrons made up of a plurality of triangles on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed into a shape as shown.

More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 has a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and multifaceted decorative portions 561b divided into four spaces by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d of the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three regions located in the front, the circular decorative portion 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction is provided with one multifaceted decorative portion 561b on each of the upper and lower sides. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 . The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563 . The right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated with light emission by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged in the rear.

The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front and upper ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 . The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover both the left and right outer sides near the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 . The front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 projects slightly forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . This right unit decorative base 562 is formed of an opaque member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so as to be able to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562 . The right unit cover 563 is made of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative members 564 extend short in the vertical direction and are attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is made of an opaque member. The three decorative members 564 vertically divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four.

When the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame left side unit 530 protrudes forward in a large plate shape, and slightly forward than the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. there is The door frame right side unit 550 includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides projecting, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end. can be decorated with luminescence.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It is possible to exhibit a function and effect like a partition between. As a result, the players playing the pachinko machine 1 can be given the illusion that they are playing in a private room, and the players can play in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around them. can be done.

In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, in a game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side, even if the door frame right side unit 550 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the island facility can be installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be conspicuous in a game hall where many pachinko machines are arranged. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are decorated with light, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not positioned near the front of the pachinko machine 1, the book can be seen from a distance. The existence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the players.

Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides By making the member 561 or the like luminous and decorated in a peculiar manner, the staff of the game hall can immediately be notified of the occurrence of the trouble and be made to recognize it, and can quickly deal with the trouble. Therefore, the interruption of the game by the player can be resolved early, and the player's frustration and loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. 87(a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame top unit viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the rear. 90 is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 87. FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is mounted above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit 570 includes a center base 571 mounted in the center in the horizontal direction above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and mounted on both left and right sides of the center base 571. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and extending to the left and right, with the center in the left and right direction protruding forward. A pair of openings 574a passing through the pair of upper speakers 573 in front of the pair of upper speakers 573 in a box shape with an open rear, and a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to the vicinity of the center. It has a plurality of slits 574b (three on each side) which are vertically spaced apart from each other, and are attached to the front sides of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572. A unit main body 271, and a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal, which is arranged on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 and is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. ing.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the top inner decorative member 576 having translucency, and to the rear side of the top inner decorative member 576. A door frame top middle decorative substrate 577 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a plurality of slits 574b attached to the front surface of the unit body 271, respectively, and left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576. A plurality of transparent plate-shaped light guide members 578 (three on each side) extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 across the opening 574a, and a top inner decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 271. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 attached to the left and right sides and respectively covering the front surfaces of a plurality (three) of light guide members 578, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decoration. A top center left decorative member 581, which is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front side of each lens member 580 and extends from both left and right sides of the top center decorative member 576 to near the center side end of the opening 574a, and A top middle right decorative member 582 is provided.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of both left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 271, and LEDs are mounted at portions facing the left and right outer ends of the plurality (three) of light guide members 578, respectively. A door frame top left decorative board 583 and a door frame top right decorative board 584 pass through, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed on both left and right sides of the center in the left and right direction on the rear side of the unit main body 271. A pair of substrate bases 585 attached to the respective parts, and a door attached to the front surfaces of the pair of substrate bases 585 and having a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted behind the slit 574b of the unit main body 271. It is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 on the front side of the frame top center left decoration board 586 and the door frame top center right decoration board 587, and the door frame top center left decoration board 586 and the door frame top center right decoration board 587, respectively. A pair of light shielding members 588 are provided.

The door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 inside the unit main body 271, and a central base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. An attached relay board cover 590, an upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271, and a unit cover 591 so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 271. and a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271 .

A central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. The center base 571 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward, and has a plurality of unevenness on the front surface. A pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. When the pair of upper speakers 573 are assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the respective front surfaces thereof are obliquely attached so that the side closer to the center of the door frame top unit 570 in the left-right direction moves rearward. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone speakers capable of outputting sound over a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that the lower portions near the left and right ends of a square extending in the left and right direction bulge downward when viewed from the front. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that a square extending in the left and right direction is notched with a trapezoid narrowing upward from the lower end side when viewed from the front. The unit main body 271 has a rectangular shape extending to the left and right in a plan view, and a portion of about 1/2 of the total width (length in the horizontal direction) centered on the center in the horizontal direction on the front edge side of the rectangle. A trapezoid protruding forward and a quadrangle protruding short forward with the front end side of the trapezoid as a long side are combined to form a shape. Therefore, the unit main body 271 is arranged such that both sides of the portion protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface are aligned with the lines connecting the left-right end portions of the unit main body 271 and the left-right direction end portions of the front ends of the portions protruding forward. It is located posteriorly (recessed).

The unit main body 271 is formed with openings 574a penetrating in the front-rear direction, respectively, from the left and right ends of the front surface to the positions outside the forward-projecting parts. In addition, the unit body 271 has a plurality of slits that extend left and right at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and that penetrate in the front-rear direction at a portion that protrudes forward in a trapezoidal shape on the front surface and that extends obliquely. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend laterally from the vicinity of the front end of the front surface of the unit main body 271, which extends obliquely forward, to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Also, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction so as to be separated vertically by three.

The unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c formed by notching forward from the rear end toward the front in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d formed by notching from the rear end toward the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. , is equipped with An upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 is closed by an upper cover 591. As shown in FIG. Also, the lower opening 574 d is closed by a lower cover 592 .

The unit main body 271 also includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that its front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. This unit main body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271 . The top middle decorative member 576 has a shape when viewed from the front that is a modified pentagon in which the center of the lower side of the substantially square in the horizontal direction is bent downward, and extends outward in the horizontal direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the modified pentagon. It is formed in a shape that is a combination of a substantially right-angled triangle connecting the tip of the pentagon and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined such that the modified pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 has a three-dimensional shape as a whole and is translucent.

The door frame top middle decorative board 577 is arranged behind the top middle decorative member 576 in a state in which the front surface is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward so as to follow the front surface of the modified pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576 . side mounted. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top interior decoration substrate 577, and the interior top decoration member 576 can be decorated with light emission by causing the LEDs to emit light.

The light guide member 578 is made of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape conforming to the shape on both the left and right sides of the front end of the front surface of the unit body 271 protruding forward. The side near the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 is defined as the end side, and the side near the center is defined as the center side. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape with a large radius so as to move forward from the central end side of the straight portion 578a toward the central side. The straight portion 578a of the light guide member 578 has a depth in the front-rear direction smaller than the height in the vertical direction, and the arc portion 578b has a depth in the front-rear direction larger than the height in the vertical direction. The straight portion 578a of the light guide member 578 has a constant vertical height, while the circular arc portion 578b has a vertical height that decreases toward the center. When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is positioned immediately before the opening 574a of the unit body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit body 271 from the front. there is

The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and formed of sawtooth unevenness, a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b and formed of a plurality of irregularities, It has

When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both left and right outer ends of the light guide member 578 face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input portion 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top center left decorative board 586 or the door frame top center right decorative board 587. FIG. When the light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both left and right outer ends, the light is transmitted to the straight portion 578a. As the light travels toward the center inside, the light is sequentially reflected forward from the end portion side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and the portion in front of the straight portion 578a of them is decorated with light emission.

Light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top center right decorative substrate 587 enters the light guide member 578 from a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is diffused widely into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be decorated with light.

In this way, the light guide member 578 is connected to the LEDs 583 a and 586 a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 , or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 . By guiding the light from the LEDs 584a and 587a, the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front can be decorated with good (uniform) light.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271 . The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. A decorative lens portion 579 a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the shape of the light guide member 578 and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578 . On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, concavities and convexities of truncated square pyramids protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right sides.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574 e of the unit body 271 . That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 . The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated by the LEDs 583 a and 586 a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 via three light guide members 578 .

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271 . The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. A decorative lens portion 580 a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578 and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578 . On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, concavities and convexities of truncated square pyramids projecting forward are arranged in rows on the left and right sides.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574 f of the unit body 271 . That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 . The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated by LEDs 584 a and 587 a of a door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and a door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via three light guide members 578 .

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574 a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576 . The top center left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in the state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front surface is the top left. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 579 . The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574 a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576 . The top center right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in the state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front surface is the top right. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 580 . The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

The door frame top left decorative board 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted directed rightward. The door frame top left decorative board 583 has an LED 583a mounted at a position facing the left end surface of three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 90). ). The three LEDs 583a can be made to emit light independently. A portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit main body 271 is illuminated by the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be decorated with luminescence.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted directed leftward. The door frame top right decorative board 584 has an LED 584a mounted at a position facing the right end surfaces of three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 90). ). The three LEDs 584a can be made to emit light independently. By means of the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit main body 271 is illuminated via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminescence.

The pair of board bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion in the unit main body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of board bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrical with each other. The substrate base 585 includes side walls that are substantially square in side view and have sides that extend vertically and forward and backward, rear walls that are rectangular in front view and extend outward in the left and right direction at right angles from the rear sides of the side walls, A line connecting the upper sides of the side walls to the middle is used as the oblique side, and the upper side of a substantially right-angled triangle connects the upper sides of the side wall and the rear wall. and a right-angled triangular lower wall, and is formed in a triangular prism-like box shape with an open space between upper and lower oblique sides. The board base 585 is attached to the unit main body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit main body 271 . A door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 or a door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 is attached to the substrate base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The door frame top center left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the left rear side of the left-right center of the unit main body 271 . be done. The door frame top center left decorative board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction. It is in a slanted state. As a result, when the door frame top center left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b are formed on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. becomes almost parallel to .

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top center left decorative board 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271 . As a result, when the door frame top center left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570 , a plurality of LEDs 586 a face forward from the three slits 574 b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 . The door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 586a to light-embellish a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 near the top center decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is mounted on the board base 585 mounted on the rear side of the unit main body 271 on the right side of the left-right center so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front. be done. The door frame top center right decorative board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. It becomes inclined. As a result, when the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b are formed on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. becomes a state approximately parallel to .

A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top center right decorative board 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271 . As a result, when the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570 , a plurality of LEDs 587 a face forward from the three slits 574 b on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 . The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a to light-embellish a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 near the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

A pair of light shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 271 at positions between the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 587 and the unit main body 271 . The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed substantially bilaterally symmetrical with each other by an opaque member. The light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower portions of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top center right decorative substrate 587 which are arranged in rows corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. partitioning. With this light shielding member 588, light can be guided forward only by the LEDs 586a and 587a positioned immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 579 can be guided forward. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be satisfactorily light-emitting and decorated in an independent state.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571 . The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. It relays the connection between the frame top center right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 . The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door main body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550 . The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590 .

The door frame top unit 570 has a top middle decorative member 576 projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the front surfaces of both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are curved backward. Therefore, the player can be given the illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest in the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted.

In addition, the door frame top unit 570 attaches the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center to the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 . It is formed so as to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed on both left and right ends of the unit main body 271. As shown in FIG. As a result, the front upper portion of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated with the door frame top unit 570 .

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each in the vicinity of both left and right ends where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are arranged. The speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are separated vertically from the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be listened to by the player in good condition, and the player can enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

Further, the door-frame top unit 570 has a top left decorative lens member 579 and a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top right decorative lens member 580, so that the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 583 are arranged. Light from substrate 584, door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be directed to top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580, and top left decorative lens member. 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be well decorated with light emission. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can light-embellish the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3 including the front side of the left and right upper speakers 573 .

[3-8. Effects of door frame]
Effects of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a through-hole 111 penetrating through the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 in the vertical and horizontal directions larger than those of the conventional pachinko machine. , the vertical height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the horizontal width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 is reduced. is made smaller. As a result, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , corresponds to a game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 has an effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 protruding forward below the through hole 111. , and the front surface of the lower half (the portion below the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (the front surface of the front lower decorative portion 326c) is hollowed backward (dish unit 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the production operation unit 400, the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 are positioned rearward. ing. As a result, the performance operation unit 400 attached to the center front surface of the plate unit 320 in the left-right direction looks like it protrudes forward greatly, so that the performance operation unit 400 is conspicuous and emphasized to the player. , and the effect operation unit 400 can be strongly focused.

The door frame 3 tilts the performance operation unit 400 arranged in front of the plate unit 320 below the through hole 111 so that the large semispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. Therefore, when the player sits down in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation buttons 410 face the player's head (face), and the player lowers his/her line of sight and presses the production operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen almost in the front, and the large and round operation button 410 can be strongly recognized, and the expectation for the performance using the operation button 410 can be heightened. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good condition, and the effect image can be fully enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with the operation button 410 which is large in diameter and protrudes forward in a round shape and has a diameter substantially equal to the total height of the plate unit 320, the operation button 410 can be operated by moving the hand over a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the "quick press" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward in a round shape, is mounted in an inclined state, it is possible not only to press it from above like the operation button of a conventional pachinko machine, but also to press it from the left or right side. The operation buttons 410 can be operated satisfactorily from either side or from the front, and the performance using the operation buttons 410 can be made more enjoyable by the operation buttons 410 with good operability.

Further, the door frame 3 is attached with the effect operation unit 400 in a state of being suspended by the plate unit 320, and is provided with a vibration motor 424 for generating vibrations in the lower part of the effect operation unit 400. When vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 according to the state, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the player is startled by pressing the operation button. The production using 410 can be made even more enjoyable.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (effect operation unit 400) extending over the entire height of the plate unit 320 at the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320. Since the lower plate 322 underneath is less conspicuous, it is possible to make it easier for players who are familiar with the conventional pachinko machine to recognize that it is clearly different, and appeal strongly attracting the interest of the players. The pachinko machine 1 with high power can be obtained.

Further, the door frame 3 is formed so as to wrap the lower plate 322 to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d that opens on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower tray 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower tray opening 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 can be sufficiently secured. In addition, since the rear portion of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts his/her left hand into the lower plate 322 or puts his left finger on the lower plate opening 326d, Since it is difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower tray 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of incongruity, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game, and increasing the size of the lower tray opening 326d. The fact that the lower plate 322 has a larger volume than that can also be made tactilely recognizable.

Further, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper tray 321 are discharged to the lower tray 322, and a lower outlet for discharging game balls from the lower tray 322 to a dollar box or the like below the tray unit 320. The countersunk ball extraction hole 322a is linearly arranged in the front-rear direction, and is arranged on the right outside of the lower dish opening 326d (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in front view. That is, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a are connected to the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outer side of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the appearance of the tray unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be improved. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in the lower tray 322 of the door frame 3, the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is arranged in front of (directly in front of) the lower tray ball supply port 323c. As a result, the game ball discharged from the upper tray 321 or the like to the lower tray 322 is immediately discharged from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a to the dollar box or the like below as soon as it enters the lower tray 322. At this time, since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper tray 321 and the like to the dollar box through the lower tray 322 also increases. can't see This allows the player to have the illusion that the game balls on the upper tray 321 or the game balls or the like paid out from the payout device 830 with the upper tray 321 being full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and to make the player concentrate on the game (striking operation of the game ball, effect images, etc.) and suppress the decline in interest. can.

In the lower tray 322, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a at a position closer to the front left of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, and the lower tray 322 is erected on the right side of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a. Since the raised wall part is obliquely curved to face the direction of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 is directly discharged. It can be guided to the hole 322a, or it can be reflected by the wall on the right side and indirectly guided to the ball hole 322a. As a result, while the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is located in the area on the left side of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a in the lower tray 322. (Lower tray first area A1), since it can be ejected downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball circulating in the lower tray 322 is not visible to the player. Game balls can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower plate opening 326d of a plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 faces forward, between the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a (the performance operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower tray opening 326d or puts his hand into the lower tray 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be favorably output forward, and the sound of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. In addition, when the player puts his or her hand into the lower tray 322 or approaches it, the player can feel the vibration caused by the deep bass sound from the speaker 921 forwardly outputted from the lower speaker port 326e. It is possible to entertain the person and suppress the decline of interest.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a plate-shaped right side unit 550 projecting greatly forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player who plays the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. It is possible to give the illusion that the player is there, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around.

Further, the door frame 3 can be decorated with light on the front end and the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward. The pachinko machine 1 can notify the existence of the pachinko machine 1 even from a distance such as from a lateral direction along the island facilities, even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1 inside, and has a high appeal to the players. machine 1.

In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 above the through hole 111, and the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are The top middle decorative member of the door frame top unit 570 is more concave than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576. 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of 576 are positioned rearward. As a result, only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the top middle decorative member 576 can be made conspicuous and emphasized to the player, and the top can be seen to be emphasized. Strong attention can be drawn to the middle decorative member 576 .

By the way, the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine is equipped with a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other to the left and right, and the two upper speakers stand out. On the other hand, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 has a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal on both left and right ends. A speaker 573 is provided, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from both left and right sides of a central top middle decorative member 576 through the front of a speaker cover 575 to both left and right ends are provided. The entire front surfaces of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light. As a result, the upper part of the front face of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 are not conspicuous in the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to be highly appealing to the player by allowing the player to recognize at a glance that it is there, and the pair of upper speakers 573 can entertain the player with high-quality stereo sound. can.

In this way, the door frame 3 of this embodiment has the effect operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 below and above the through hole 111. Since each of them protrudes greatly forward at the center in the horizontal direction, the virtual line passing through the center in the horizontal direction is conspicuous, and the decoration with a sense of uniformity in the upper and lower parts can be seen by the player, and the decoration with a sophisticated feeling can be provided. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appeal.

In addition, since the door frame 3 projects forward the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 and the production operation unit 400 arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction, the top middle decorative member 576 When the effect operation unit 400 is decorated with light, the player can see a light emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front face of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the line of sight of the player is arranged at the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 of the production operation unit 400 or the like.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the back. Also, FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. As shown in the figure, the body frame 4 of this embodiment is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein. The body frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front so that it can be opened and closed. It is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

The main body frame 4 of this embodiment consists of a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 which is partly insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and capable of supporting the outer circumference of the game board 5, and a main body frame base 600. It is attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side of the front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. A body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 600 in front view are provided. .

The main body frame 4 is attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 600, and has a ball launching device 680 for hitting game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the right side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. A locking unit 700 for locking between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, is attached to the rear side along the upper side and left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 that pays out game balls to the cage player side, a substrate unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a back side of the main body frame base 600 that can be opened and closed. A back cover 980 covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the body frame base 600 is provided.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, the body frame base 600 of the body frame 4 in this embodiment has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The main body frame base 600 has a game board insertion opening 601 which penetrates in the front and rear direction from a position slightly below the upper end to a height range of about 3/4 of the total height, and into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side. A game board mounting portion 602 forming the lower side of the board insertion opening 601 and on which the game board 5 is mounted, and a left and right bottom end of the game board 5 protruding upward from the center of the game board mounting portion 602 in the left-right direction. and a game board regulation section 603 that regulates backward movement.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 includes a shooting device attachment portion 604 for attaching a ball shooting device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 in front view, and a launch device attachment portion 604 on the right side of the shooting device attachment portion 604 in front view. A cylinder insertion opening 605 through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and a door of the board unit 900 through which the board unit 900 penetrates in the lower left side from the left-right center of the game board mounting portion 602 when viewed from the front. A connection opening 606 that faces the frame relay board 911 forward and a circular opening 606 that penetrates forward and backward at the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 602 in front view and faces the speaker unit 920 in the board unit 900 forward. and a speaker opening 607 .

Further, the body frame base 600 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 601 when viewed from the front. It has a rearward extension 608 to which it is attached. The body frame base 600 of the body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of both upper and lower ends of the left end in the front view on the rear surface, and has upper hinge attachments for attaching the body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640 . A portion 609 and a lower hinge mounting portion 610 are provided.

The main body frame base 600 is rotatably attached to an opening cover 615 that opens and closes the connection opening 606, and to a position slightly lower left than the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 when viewed from the front. , and a game board lock member 616 capable of regulating forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 601 .

[4-2. Body frame side upper hinge member and body frame side lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94 . The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 and the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, respectively.

The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge body 621 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending plate-like plate is bent downward into an L shape, and a columnar shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge body 621. A body frame upper hinge pin 622 pivotally supported by the cage outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and a left side of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 in front view penetrates the upper hinge body 621 and pivotally supports the door frame side upper hinge member 140. and a door frame upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the main body frame base 600 at a portion of the upper hinge body 621 that is bent downward.

The main body frame side lower hinge member 640 includes a lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear part of a horizontally extending plate-like plate is bent upward into an L shape, and the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 vertically penetrates. The outer frame lower hinge hole (not shown) pivotally supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and a horizontally extending flat plate disposed on the upper side of the lower hinge first body 641. A lower hinge second body 643 in which the rear portion of a shaped plate material is bent upward into an L-shape, and a lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side of the door frame 3 penetrating vertically at the front end of the lower hinge second body 643. The door frame hinge hole 644 for pivotally supporting the lower hinge second body 643 extends upward from the left end behind the door frame hinge hole 644 in the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 643. and a regulating piece 645 for regulating the rotation range of.

The lower hinge second body 643 has a horizontally extending portion spaced above the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 641 and is bent upward to form a lower hinge first body 641 . It abuts on the front surface of the upwardly bent portion of the main body 641 . The body frame side lower hinge member 640 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the body frame base 600 by bending upward portions of the lower hinge first body 641 and the lower hinge second body 643 .

[4-3. Reinforcing frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. FIG. The reinforcement frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 600 . The reinforcing frame 660 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view that is U-shaped with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In addition, in the reinforcement frame 660, the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end restricts the forward and vertical movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 601 of the main body frame base 600. A set of left positioning members 661 are attached with a space therebetween in the vertical direction.

The reinforcing frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600, and the left side of the main body frame 4 (game board 5) passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is passed through. Incorrect tool insertion can be prevented.

[4-4. ball launcher]
The ball launching device 680 of the body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91, 93 and 94. FIG. The ball shooting device 680 is a device for hitting game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 . This ball shooting device 680 changes the striking strength of the game ball according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 .

The ball launcher 680 includes a flat plate-shaped launch base 681 attached to the launcher attachment portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 681 when viewed from the front. A firing solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid extending through and extending forward, a ball hitting mallet 683 having a proximal end attached to the rotating shaft of the firing solenoid 682, and extending obliquely upward to the left from the vicinity of the tip of the ball hitting mallet 683. A shooting rail 684 is attached to the front surface of the shooting base 681 so as to allow the game balls to roll thereon.

This ball launching device 680 is configured such that game balls are supplied from the ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 684, and the game balls are supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 684. When the handle 302 is rotated, the shooting solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the ball hitting mallet 683 hits the game ball. The game ball hit by the ball hitting mallet 683 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the shooting rail 684 and hit into the game area 5a.

In addition, if the hit game ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball, etc., the distance between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) , the ball drops into the foul ball receiving port 275 of the foul cover unit 270 below, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 270, and is discharged to the lower tray 322.

[4-5. locking unit]
A locking unit 700 for the body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. FIG. The locking unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4, and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. FIG. The locking unit 700 includes a unit base 701 attached to the right side surface of the rearwardly extending portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locks protruding forward from the unit base 701 and capable of locking with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 702, a plurality of outer frame hooks 703 projecting rearward from the unit base 701 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and a columnar shape projecting forward from the lower portion of the unit base 701, A projection protrudes from the front end in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and engages with a rotation transmission member 212 of an opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3 to transmit the rotation of the cylinder lock 211, and lock the door according to the rotation direction of the key. and a key cylinder 710 for unlocking either the frame hook 702 or the outer frame hook 703 .

[4-6. Payout unit]
A payout unit 800 of the body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 113. FIG. 95 is a front perspective view of the dispensing unit, and FIG. 96 is a rear perspective view of the dispensing unit. Also, FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. Also, FIG. 99(a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the dispensing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 99(b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 101(a) is a front perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, and FIG. 101(b) is a rear perspective view of the dispensing device. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device viewed from the front, and FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 104(a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line QQ in (a). Also, FIG. 105(a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is closed by the ball removing movable piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 105(b) is an explanatory view showing the state in which the ball removing passage is opened by the ball removing movable piece. is.

FIG. 106(a) is a front perspective view of the upper full ball path unit in the dispensing unit, and FIG. 106(b) is a rear perspective view of the upper full ball path unit. Also, FIG. 107(a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full ball path unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 107(b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full ball path unit viewed from the back. be. Further, FIG. 108(a) is a front perspective view of the lower full ball path unit in the dispensing unit, and FIG. 108(b) is a rear perspective view of the lower full ball path unit. FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full ball path unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full ball path unit viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 111(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening/closing door is closed in the lower full-tank ball route unit, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening/closing door is open. . FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full-tank ball path unit. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the payout unit.

As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the payout unit 800 of this embodiment includes an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600, and an upper portion of the payout unit base 801. A ball tank 802 is a box-shaped opening that extends leftward and rightward and stores game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) of the game hall. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right for guiding the game ball in the landing ball tank 802 to the left in a front view is provided. Inside the tank rail 803, the game balls are guided to the left and arranged in front and rear two rows by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 113) swingably hanging down from above.

In addition, the payout unit 800 includes a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 in front view and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner. A payout device 830 which is detachably attached to a payout unit base 801 and pays out game balls guided by a ball guiding unit 820 one by one based on instructions from a payout control board 951 housed in a payout control board box 950. and has. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, the game balls circulate in two rows, and the game balls are paid out one by one from the payout device 830. - 特許庁

Furthermore, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides downward the game balls paid out by the payout device 830, and the game balls are stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full discharge port 850e, and the upper full ball passage unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801 and discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball passage unit 850 A normal guiding path 861 guides forward the game ball discharged from the front end of the door frame 3 to the penetrating ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, and guides forward the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e to guide the game ball forward and guides the game ball forward from the front end of the door frame 3. A full-tank guideway 862 that guides to the full-tank ball receptacle 274, and a guideway opening/closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full-tank guideway 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4, and a lower full ball path unit 860 with

[4-6a. ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 extending vertically and having an open rear side, a box-shaped rear case 822 attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and having an open front side, and a front case. 821 and a rear case 822, and a flat plate-shaped partition plate 823 that partitions the front case 821 and the rear case 822; A rod-shaped shaft member 824 is attached, and a pair of movable piece member front 825 and movable piece member rear is rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and arranged in the front case 821 and the rear case 822, respectively. 826 , and a dead ball detection sensor 827 that is attached in the front case 821 and capable of detecting the rotational positions of the pair of front movable piece member 825 and rear movable piece member 826 .

The front case 821 has a ball guide inlet 821a that is open at the top of the right side so that game balls can pass through, and a ball guide outlet that is open at a position on the right side of the center of the bottom in the left-right direction so that game balls can pass through. 821b, and a guide passage 821c that communicates with the ball guide inlet 821a and the ball guide outlet 821b and allows game balls to flow. The guide passage 821c has an introduction portion 821d that obliquely extends from the ball guide inlet 821a to the vicinity of the left end so as to be lower at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a middle height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introduction portion 821d. It is composed of a detection portion 821e that extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering portion 821f that extends in a meandering manner across the width of the front case 821 from the detection portion 821e. Further, the front case 821 has a notch portion 821g on the wall on the right side of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c when viewed from the front.

The rear case 822 has a ball guide inlet 822a that is open at the top of the right side so that game balls can pass through, and a ball guide outlet that is open at a position on the right side of the center of the bottom in the left-right direction so that game balls can pass through. 822b, and a guide passage 822c that communicates with the ball guide inlet 822a and the ball guide outlet 822b and allows game balls to flow. The guide passage 822c has an introduction portion 822d that obliquely extends from the ball guide inlet 822a to the vicinity of the left end so as to be lower at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a middle height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d. It is composed of a detection portion 822e that extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering portion 822f that extends in a meandering manner across the width of the rear case 822 from the detection portion 822e. Further, the rear case 822 has a notch portion 822g on the wall on the right side of the detection portion 822e in the guide passage 822c when viewed from the front.

The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrical to the front case 821 in the left-right direction. there is

The front and rear ends of the shaft member 824 are attached to positions below the upper ends of the cutouts 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

The movable piece member front 825 includes a vertically extending flat plate-like movable piece 825a, a shaft hole 825b that passes through the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 825a. The extending portion 825c extends rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a perpendicularly to the right surface of the movable piece 825a. A connecting portion 825d, a weight mounting portion 825e having through holes projecting outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and near the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the extending portion 825c. A detection piece 825f that extends outward from the right end in a flat plate shape and can be detected by the dead ball detection sensor 827, and a flat plate shape that extends outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d. and a stopper piece 825g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 825b, the front movable piece member 825 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight mounting portion 825e projecting from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is positioned directly below the shaft hole 825b. Then, the movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, when the ball guide unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, and the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guide passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g is It comes into contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 821c (the detection portion 821e). Since the stopper piece 825g abuts against the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from rotating further in the direction of protruding into the guide passage 821c (leftward in front view). In addition, when the front movable piece 825 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 825a toward the wall of the guide passage 821c (to the right in front view), the left surface of the movable piece 825a moves toward the wall of the guide passage 821c. match the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f of the front movable piece member 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the dead ball detection sensor 827. As shown in FIG. In other words, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 821c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 is non-detected.

The rear movable piece member 826 includes a vertically extending flat plate-shaped movable piece 826a, a shaft hole 826b that passes through the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 826a. The extending portion 826c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 826a perpendicularly to the right surface of the movable piece 826a connects the extending portion 826c and the movable piece 826a and extends in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. A connection portion 826d, a weight attachment portion 826e having a through-hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extension portion 826c and the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connection portion 826d and passes through in the front-rear direction, and the extension portion 826c. A detection piece 826f that extends outward from the right end in a flat plate shape and can be detected by the dead ball detection sensor 827, and a flat plate shape that extends outward from a position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d. and a stopper piece 826g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 826b, the rear movable piece member 826 rotates by its own weight so that the weight mounting portion 826e projecting from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is positioned directly below the shaft hole 826b. Then, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, when the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch portion 822g of the rear case 822, and the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g is closed. It comes into contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 822c (the detection portion 822e). Since the stopper piece 826g abuts against the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from rotating further in the direction of protruding into the guide passage 822c (leftward in front view). When the lower end of the movable piece 826a of the rear movable piece 826 is rotated in a direction (rightward in front view) to approach the wall of the guide passage 822c, the left surface of the movable piece 826a moves toward the wall of the guide passage 822c. match the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f of the rear movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. As shown in FIG. In other words, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 822c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 is non-detected.

The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls lined up in a line in the front and rear direction by the tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case 821 in the state where the game balls are lined in a line. 822 can be guided in two rows one behind the other to a dispenser 830 below (see FIG. 113). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are separated by the partition plate 823, the game balls circulating through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and can be circulated well. can be done.

Also, when the game ball circulates in the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guide unit 820, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a A front movable piece member 825 and a rear movable piece member 826 rotate in a direction corresponding to the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. As a result, the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and it is found that there is a game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

When the game balls are paid out by the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guide unit 820, the game balls in the guide passages 821c and 822c flow downstream. When the game balls flow through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game balls flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d increases, and the game balls flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d are moved to the movable pieces above the detection portions 821e and 822e. It rebounds to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Due to the contact of the game ball, the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate, and the vibration causes the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c to get caught or enter. It is possible to remove dust, dirt, and the like that have fallen on the surface, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be rotated satisfactorily by their own weight and the like.

In addition, the ball guide unit 820 detects game balls flowing through the guide passages 821c and 822c by means of separate front and rear movable piece members 825 and 826, respectively. Since the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the rear movable piece member 826 are detected by one ball-out detection sensor 827, when there are no game balls in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c, the front of the movable piece member The movable pieces 825a and 826a of the rear 825 or the movable piece member 826 are rotated so as to protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball is gone are detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. be. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the running out of game balls at an early stage, the game balls can be quickly replenished, and the time during which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, thereby reducing the interest of the player. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, by screwing metal screws as weights into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e of the front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826, the weight of the front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 and the weight can be reduced. Thus, the lower end sides of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in a direction projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c. In addition, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached outside the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower ends protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is removed. , dirt, etc. will not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt will not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls. Therefore, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be prevented from rotating properly.

In this way, the ball guide unit 820 of the present embodiment has movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 that protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c through which the game balls circulate due to their own weight. By attaching weights made of metal screws to the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface that contacts the game ball, the weight of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 and the weight of the weight make the movable piece The lower end sides of 825a and 826a can be made easier to rotate (project) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. In addition, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached outside the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower ends protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is removed. , dirt, etc. will not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt will not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls. Therefore, the movable pieces 825a and 826a (front movable piece member 825 and rear movable piece member 826) can be prevented from rotating.

In addition, since metal screws as weights are screwed into weight mounting portions 825e and 826e, which are through holes, even if the front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 are frequently rotated, the weight does not move. The front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 (weight attachment portions 825e and 826e) are not separated from the front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826, and the front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 can be maintained in good condition for a long period of time. . Further, the weights can be easily attached to the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 simply by screwing metal screws into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, thus simplifying the work of attaching the weights. Therefore, the cost for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the guide passages 821c and 822c are provided with the introduction portions 821d and 822d for guiding the game balls toward the movable pieces 825a and 826a upstream of the portions where the movable pieces 825a and 826a protrude inside. As the game balls flow through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the game balls contact the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the contact of the game balls can vibrate the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, the vibration of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can remove dust and other debris caught or entered between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c. The front piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 can be rotated well.

Therefore, since the front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 can be satisfactorily rotated, the state (presence or absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects due to erroneous detection or the like. In addition, even if the game balls supplied to the payout device 830 run out of the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a. The game balls can be replenished at the same time, and the time during which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, thereby suppressing the decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. dispensing device]
The dispensing device 830 of the dispensing unit 800 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105. FIG. The payout device 830 has a box shape with an open rear side, and has a payout inlet 831a that is open at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface so that game balls can pass through, and an opening near the left end of the bottom surface in front view so that game balls can pass through. a ball withdrawal outlet 831c that is open near the right end of the bottom surface in a front view so that game balls can pass therethrough; and a payout passage 831d that communicates the payout inlet 831a and the payout outlet 831b and allows game balls to flow. , and a ball extraction passage 831e that branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball extraction outlet 831c, through which game balls can flow. It has a box shape with an open front side, a payout port 832a that is open at the center in the left-right direction on the top surface so that game balls can pass through, and a payout port 832a that is open near the left end of the bottom face when viewed from the front so that game balls can pass through. An exit 832b, a ball extraction exit 832c that is open near the right end of the bottom surface in a front view so that game balls can pass through, a payout passage 832d that communicates between the payout inlet 832a and the payout outlet 832b and allows game balls to flow, and a payout A rear box 832 having a ball extraction passage 832e branching from the middle of the passage 832d and communicating with a ball extraction outlet 832c through which game balls can flow is provided.

The dispensing device 830 has a shallow box-shaped front cover 833 that is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and has an open rear side, and is attached to the inside of the front box 831, and the rotating shaft passes through the front box 831. A payout motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, a drive gear 835 attached to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834, and the drive gear 835 meshing with each other to be rotatable between the front case 831 and the front cover 833. A spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to the intermediate gear 836, a driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and the driven gear 837 are rotatably penetrated. A shaft member 838 whose end penetrates the front case 831 and is attached to the rear case 832, and dispensing passages 831d and 832d of the front case 831 and the rear case 832, which are rotatably attached by penetrating the shaft member 838. and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 installed between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 839. ing.

Further, the dispensing device 830 includes a flat partition plate 841 mounted between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and separating the dispensing passage 831 d of the front box 831 and the dispensing passage 832 d of the rear box 832 . and the rear box 832, a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting game balls paid out by the rotation of the payout vane 839 and discharged from the payout outlets 831b, 832b; 831e, 832e are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and the ball removing movable piece 843 capable of closing the ball removing passages 831e, 832e; A ball removing lever 844 is provided so as to be vertically slidable on the upper right side surface of the box 832 when viewed from the front and makes the ball removing movable piece 843 rotatable or non-rotatable.

The dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view from the dispensing inlet 831a toward the ball outlet 831c, and extends downward at a height of about 1/3 of the total height of the front box 831 from the upper surface. After bending to extend vertically to the left near the center of the total height so as to extend substantially horizontally, it extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 from the left end of the left and right width of the front box 831. It is bent like a crank so as to be positioned directly above the dispensing outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 of the total height of the front box 831 from the bottom surface, and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 831b. A pay-out vane 839 is arranged at a portion bent like a crank in the pay-out passage 831d.

On the other hand, the ball extraction passage 831e is formed by further extending a portion of the dispensing passage 831d that extends diagonally to the lower right from the dispensing inlet 831a, and is located from a height of about 1/3 of the total height of the front box 831 from the upper surface. It branches up to the height near the center.

In addition, the front box 831 is formed with a guide shelf 831f that protrudes rearward as it goes downward at a portion extending vertically toward the dispensing outlet 831b in the dispensing passage 831d, and on the upper part of the right side when viewed from the front. A lever mounting portion 831g for mounting the ball extracting lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down is provided.

A discharge passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right in a front view from the discharge inlet 832a toward the ball extraction outlet 832c, and extends downward at a height of about 1/3 of the total height of the rear box 832 from the upper surface. After bending to extend vertically to the left near the center of the total height so as to extend substantially horizontally, it extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 of the left and right width of the rear box 832 from the left end. and extends perpendicularly to the dispensing outlet 832b so as to be positioned directly above the dispensing outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 of the total height of the rear box 832 from the bottom surface. A payout vane 839 is arranged at a crank-shaped bent portion in the payout passage 832d.

On the other hand, the ball extraction passage 832e is formed by further extending a part of the dispensing passage 832d that extends diagonally to the lower right from the dispensing inlet 832a. It branches up to the height near the center.

Further, the rear box 832 is formed with a guide shelf 832f protruding forward as it goes downward at a portion extending vertically toward the dispensing outlet 832b in the dispensing passage 832d, and on the upper part of the right side in front view. A lever mounting portion 832g for mounting the ball extracting lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down is provided.

The dispensing passages 831d, 832d and the ball extraction passages 831e, 832e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The delivery passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream of the portion where the delivery vane 839 is arranged. A payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f, 832f and the payout outlets 831b, 832b. In other words, the game balls that have circulated through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game balls that have circulated through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are positioned between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the guide shelves 831f and 832f, respectively. It is detected by one payout detection sensor 842 as it is brought near the boundary.

The driven gear 837 has a spur gear portion 837a that meshes with the intermediate gear 836, and radially protrudes from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at intervals of 60 degrees in the circumferential direction. A plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connecting portion 837c that protrudes in a cylindrical shape rearward from the center of the gear portion 837a and has unevenness formed on the peripheral surface of the rear end thereof and that can be connected to the delivery blade 839. .

The delivery blade 839 has a cylindrical base portion 839a extending in the front-rear direction, through which the shaft member 838 is inserted, and protrudes in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a. and a plurality of (three) front blades 839b protruding in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base tube portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so as to alternate from the rear end of the base tube portion 839a to the front blades 839b ( 3) A rear blade 839c and a connected portion projecting forward from the front end of the base cylindrical portion 839a in a cylindrical shape and having projections and depressions formed on the peripheral surface of the front end so as to be connectable with the connecting portion 837c of the driven gear 837. 839d and .

Three front blades 839b and three rear blades 839c of the delivery blade 839 are provided at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. direction and extends outward at an angle of 60 degrees. In the payout blade 839 of this embodiment, three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) are connected by an arc recessed toward the center, and the diameter of the arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), a ball housing portion 839e capable of housing only one game ball is formed.

In addition, the three front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c are formed such that the diameter D1 of their outer peripheries around the axis of the base tube portion 839a is 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. Also, a diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a to the portion of the arc between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (the ball containing portion 839e) that is closest to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a. is formed to be approximately 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1-diameter D2)/2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1 to 0.1 of the outer diameter of the game ball. four times.

Therefore, it is possible to hold about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer circumference of the game ball by the arc portion (ball housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). can. In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball can be accommodated. As a result, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be quickly accommodated between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (ball accommodation portion 839e).

When the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the dispensing vanes 839 of the present embodiment have the front vanes 839b positioned in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear vanes 839c positioned in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832. Game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be paid out respectively. In addition, the delivery vane 839 is arranged at a part bent like a crank below the center of the total height of the front case 831 and the rear case 832 in the delivery passages 831d and 832d. More specifically, in the dispensing passages 831d and 832d, the center of rotation of the dispensing vane 839 is positioned directly below the portion extending vertically downward from the vicinity of the center of the overall height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. As shown in FIG. At the portion of the dispensing passages 831d and 832d bent in a crank shape, the wall (inner wall) on the far side from the dispensing blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the dispensing blade 839 and extends from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. In this embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the arcuate portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. .

As a result, when the game ball that has flowed down on the payout blade 839 comes into contact with the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c, the payout device 830 passes through the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d. is not discharged downward from the dispensing outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 839e, it moves with the rotation of the payout blade 839, can pass through the crank-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d, and exits the payout outlets 831b and 832b. emitted downwards.

In addition, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is set to about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the ball housing portion 839e is used to set the diameter D1 to 1 of the outer diameter of the game ball. Since the depth is set to 1/7 to 1/4, the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 can be made as small as possible and the time required to store the game ball can be shortened. As a result, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated quickly, the game ball can be accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 839e and sent to the payout exits 831b, 832b. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of game balls to be put out per unit time than before, and to shorten the time required for putting out game balls.

The ball-removing movable piece 843 has a body portion 843a that extends vertically and forwards and backwards in a plate-like shape and has a bent lower portion that is formed in a V shape when viewed from the front, and a cylindrical shape that extends forwards and backwards at the upper end of the body portion 843a. A shaft tube portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, respectively, a protruding portion 843c protruding from the upper part of the bent outer surface of the body portion 843a, and the body portion 843a. A weight attachment portion 843d (see FIG. 105) made of a through hole penetrating back and forth is provided in the bent lower portion.

When the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball removing movable piece 843 is oriented so that the lower part of the main body part 843a extends diagonally to the lower left when viewed from the front, and the shaft tube part 843b at the upper end is positioned to eject the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is rotatable at a portion extending obliquely to the lower right in front view from the dispensing inlets 831a and 832a and at a position outside the wall on the right side in front view slightly above the downward bending portion. installed in the

In the normal state of the dispensing device 830 of the present embodiment, the ball extracting lever 844 is slid downward, and the lower part of the ball extracting lever 844 hits the projecting portion 843c of the ball extracting movable piece 843 from the right side in front view. in contact with As a result, the ball removing movable piece 843 is restricted from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 105(a)).

In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843 bent in a V-shape, the upper side of the bent portion extends vertically, and the lower side of the bent portion extends diagonally to the lower left when viewed from the front. extends to The lower end of the main body portion 843a is located near the part where the dispensing passages 831d, 832d and the ball extraction passages 831e, 832e branch off. Therefore, the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball removing movable piece 843 (body portion 843a), and the left side of the body portion 843a forms a part of the wall of the dispensing passages 831d and 832d. are doing.

The ball removing movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed so that the center of gravity of the ball removing movable piece 843 is positioned on the left side of a vertical line passing through the center of the shaft tube portion 843b in a normal state when viewed from the front. Although a force to rotate counterclockwise in a front view is applied by , the counterclockwise rotation is restricted by the ball removing lever 844, so the normal state is maintained.

When the ball removing lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower part of the ball removing lever 844 is separated from the projecting portion 843c of the movable ball removing piece 843, and the movable ball removing piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Movement restrictions are lifted. Therefore, the ball removing movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise due to its own weight so that the center of gravity is positioned directly below the shaft tube portion 843b. The ball removing movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the right side surface of the lower portion of the main body portion 843a contacts the left side surface of the member forming the right side surfaces of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (see FIG. 105(b)). As a result, the ball extraction passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game balls entering from the payout inlets 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball extraction movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball extraction movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view to open the ball extraction passages 831e and 832e, and the balls flow through the opened ball extraction passages 831e and 832e and are discharged downward from the ball extraction outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

In this embodiment, since the ball removing movable piece 843 is provided with the weight mounting portion 843d, the ball removing lever 844 is slid upward by screwing a weight made of a metal screw into the weight mounting portion 843d. When the restriction on the counterclockwise rotation in the front view is released, the lower end of the ball removing movable piece 843 protrudes into the ball removing passages 831e and 832e by the weight of the ball removing movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front).

In addition, in the normal state in which the ball extraction lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball extraction passages 831e and 832e, the game balls entering from the payout openings 831a and 832a are pushed into the main body portion 843a of the ball extraction movable piece 843. Since it abuts, the ball removing movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the abutment of the game ball. Therefore, the vibration of the movable ball removing piece 843 can remove dust, dirt, and the like that are caught or entered between the lower end of the movable ball removing piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball removing passages 831e and 832e. It is possible to prevent the ball removing movable piece 843 from becoming unable to rotate due to being bitten by dust or the like.

In addition, since the metal screw serving as the weight can be screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d formed as a through-hole, even if the ball removing movable piece 843 rotates frequently, the weight does not move to the ball removing movable piece 843. The ball extracting movable piece 843 can be maintained in good condition for a long period of time without being detached from (the weight mounting portion 843d). In addition, the weight can be easily attached to the ball-removing movable piece 843 simply by screwing a metal screw into the weight attachment portion 843d. can reduce the cost associated with

By the way, if the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball removing movable piece 843 for a long period of time, fine dust may adhere to the rotating shaft of the ball removing movable piece 843 or the rotating shaft may rust. In some cases, it may be difficult for the pull-out movable piece 843 to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game balls entering from the payout openings 831a and 832a are brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843, so that the ball removing movable piece 843 moves the ball removing path 831e. , 832e are closed, the ball removal lever 844 for releasing the closing is slid upward to unlock the game ball. The ball removing movable piece 843 can be rotated to reliably open the ball removing passages 831e and 832e.

Therefore, when the ball extracting lever 844 is operated to open the ball extracting passages 831e and 832e, the ball extracting movable piece 843 can be rotated satisfactorily, so that the game ball extracting operation can be reliably performed. , it is possible to improve workability during maintenance and the like.

[4-6c. Upper full tank ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. FIG. The upper full ball path unit 850 is attached to a position below the dispensing device 830 in the dispensing unit base 801 . This upper full ball path unit 850 is attached to the dispensing unit base 801 and has a box-like upper full tank base 851 with an open rear side, and an upper full tank base 851 attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 851 with an open front side. A box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a dispensing device pressing member 853 rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full tank cover 852 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 830 upward are provided.

In addition, the upper full ball path unit 850 has an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that is open upward at the left side of the left and right center in the front view on the top surface so that the game ball can pass through, and a right side from the left and right center in the front view on the top surface. The upper ball extraction inlet 850b, which is open upward so that the game ball can pass through, is formed between the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852, and is received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper ball storage passage 850c having a predetermined width through which game balls circulate, a normal discharge port 850d that opens downward at a portion immediately below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c, and an upper ball storage. A full tank discharge port 850e that opens downward at a portion other than the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the passage 850c, and an upper ball storage passage that protrudes upward from between the normal discharge port 850d and the full tank discharge port 850e. and a partition piece 850f that partitions the lower part in 850c into the left and right.

In addition, the upper full tank ball path unit 850 includes an upper ball removal passage 850g that guides down the game ball that has entered from the upper ball removal inlet 850b, and an upper part that is open downward at the lower end of the upper ball removal passage 850g. A ball extraction outlet 850h is provided. The upper full ball path unit 850 has a normal discharge port 850d, a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper ball extraction port 850h arranged in order from the left side in a front view and opening downward. Also, the upper full-tank ball path unit 850 has a back cover attachment portion 854 for attaching the back cover 980 to the right end of the upper full-tank base 851 .

This upper full-tank ball path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, and the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located directly below the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830, and the upper ball takeout inlet 850b are located directly below the ball extraction outlets 831c and 832c of the dispensing device 830. As shown in FIG. In addition, when the upper full ball path unit 850 is assembled to the dispensing unit 800, the normal discharge port 850d, the full ball discharge port 850e, and the upper ball extraction outlet 850h are normal guideways of the lower full ball path unit 860. 861, a full tank guideway 862, and a lower ball extraction guideway 865 are respectively opened directly above the rear end opening (see FIG. 113).

In the upper full-tank ball path unit 850, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 and discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. When the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, a game ball entering the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a opens directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. It is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d.

When the inside of the upper tray 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls and the game balls cannot be stored, and when the normal guide path 861 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860 is filled with game balls, the normal discharge occurs. The outlet 850d is closed. When a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than the partition piece 850f, the game balls newly entered into the upper ball storage passage 850c climb over the partition piece 850f and become full. The ball is discharged downward from the tank outlet 850 e and is sent to the lower tray 322 through the full tank guiding path 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860 .

In this way, the upper full ball path unit 850 automatically moves the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 downward from the upper tray 321 in accordance with the amount of game balls stored in the upper tray 321 of the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the plate 322 .

[4-6d. Lower full tank ball route unit]
The lower full ball path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 108 to 112. FIG. The lower full ball path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full ball path unit 850 on the dispensing unit base 801 . The lower full ball path unit 860 guides forward the game balls released from the normal outlet 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 and guides them from the front end to the through ball path 273 of the door frame 3 through the normal guide path 861. and a full guideway 862 that guides game balls released from the full ball outlet 850e of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and guides them from the front end to the full ball socket 274 of the door frame 3; A taxiway opening/closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the taxiway 861 and the full-tank taxiway 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, a closing spring 864 biasing the front end opening of the .

In addition, the lower full ball path unit 860 guides the game balls released from the upper ball extraction outlet 850h of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward, and guides them forward from the right end of the center in the front-rear direction onto the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900. A lower ball extraction guideway 865 is provided that discharges to the.

In the lower full-tank ball path unit 860, a normal guideway 861, a full-tank guideway 862, and a lower ball-out guideway 865 are arranged in order from left to right in front view. The normal guideway 861, the full tank guideway 862, and the lower ball extraction guideway 865 are open upward at their rear ends. In addition, the normal guideway 861 and the full-tank guideway 862 extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side becomes low with a width where a plurality of game balls are arranged side by side. Further, the full tank guideway 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal guideway 861 . These normal guideway 861, full tank guideway 862, and lower ball extraction guideway 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 which can be divided into upper and lower parts, as shown.

The guideway opening/closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867, and is rotated clockwise in front view by a closing spring 864. energized. More specifically, at the front end of the lower full-tank ball path unit 860, the full-tank guideway 862, which opens to the right of the front end opening of the normal guideway 861 in front view, is one game with respect to the normal guideway 861. It is placed at a position lower than the height of the sphere. The guideway opening/closing door 863 is attached at a position below the normal guideway 861 and on the left side of the full-tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable about a longitudinally extending axis.

The guideway opening/closing door 863 includes a rotatably attached disk-shaped base portion 863a, and a first door plate portion 863b extending obliquely to the upper left from the base portion 863a in a flat plate shape and capable of closing the front end opening of the normal guideway 861. , a second door plate portion 863c extending in a flat plate shape to the right from the base portion 863a and capable of closing the front end opening of the full-tank guideway 862; , and an operating projection 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the tip of the extension 863d and is capable of coming into contact with the door opening/closing contacting portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 on the door frame 3 .

Here, closing the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full-tank guideway 862 means that it is not necessary to seal the openings, and it is sufficient that game balls cannot pass through them. The actuating protrusion 863e is formed in a short circular arc shape centering on the base portion 863a when viewed from the front, and the front end surface is inclined so as to protrude forward as it approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. are doing.

The guideway opening/closing door 863 is urged in a clockwise direction in front view by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863c is pushed downward from the front end opening of the full-tank guideway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867. By contacting the boss portion 867a protruding forward, the rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted.

When the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the lower full-tank ball path unit 860 of this embodiment has a front end that is connected to the foul cover unit 270 of the door frame 3, the through-ball passage 273, the full-tank ball socket 274, and the door opening/closing contact. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 281 (see FIG. 112). When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the guideway opening/closing door 863 is not in contact with the operating protrusion 863e. , the second door plate portion 863c is stopped in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. As shown in FIG. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are positioned in front of the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862, closing the front end openings (Fig. 111). (a)). Therefore, in this state, the game balls in the normal guideway 861 and the full-tank guideway 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal guideway 861 and the full-tank guide No game balls are spilled from the path 862 .

When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening/closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operation protrusion 863e of the guideway opening/closing door 863, and the door opening/closing contact portion 281 is operated. Due to the inclination of the front end face of the protrusion 863e, a force acts to rotate the guideway opening/closing door 863 counterclockwise in a front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 864. As shown in FIG. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c that have closed the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 rotate away from the front end openings, and the normal guideway 861 And the front end opening of the full-tank guideway 862 is opened (see FIG. 111(b)). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate portion 863b is positioned below the front end opening of the normal guideway 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is positioned above the front end opening of the full tank guideway 862. .

When the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full-tank guideway 862 are opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the body frame 4, and the normal guideway 861 and the full-tank guideway 862 are closed. A penetrating ball passage 273 and a full-tank ball socket 274 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located in front of the front end opening of the guideway 862. A game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full tank ball socket 274 side.

In this manner, the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made different in the vertical direction, and the guideway opening/closing door 863 is rotated, so that the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 can be adjusted. Since it is designed to be opened and closed, the operation range of the guideway opening/closing door 863 can be narrowed as much as possible, and the opening/closing mechanisms of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 can be miniaturized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be utilized more effectively.

In the payout unit 800 of this embodiment, when the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is full of game balls and the game balls cannot be released to the upper plate 321, more game balls are released from the payout device 830. is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the normal guide path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 is filled with game balls. Then, when game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guide path 861 is filled with game balls, the game balls are normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850. When it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it flows to the full tank discharge port 850e side, and from the full tank discharge port 850e, the full tank guideway 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, The payout of game balls to the lower tray 322 through the foul cover unit 270 is automatically switched. After that, when game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower tray 322 is filled with game balls in addition to the upper tray 321, and the lower tray 322 cannot be supplied with game balls, the foul cover unit 270. A game ball is stored in the storage passage 277 of . When game balls are stored in the storage passage 277 and the movable piece 278 rotates and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 are filled with game balls. is notified, and the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is canceled.

It should be noted that the stop of the game ball payout by the payout device 830 in response to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279, for example, until the game ball is stored in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270 until the movable piece 278 is detected In this state, the number that can fill the upstream storage passage 277, the full guide passage 862 of the lower full ball passage unit 860, and the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full ball passage unit 850 When the game balls are paid out, the payout device 830 may stop the game ball payout. As a result, a larger number of game balls can be stored than in a conventional pachinko machine, so in a game state in which a large number of game balls are paid out, such as during a jackpot game, the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 are displaced by the payout of the game balls. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being full of game balls, and to entertain the players by dedicating themselves to the big win game.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
A substrate unit 900 of the body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. FIG. The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600, and a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front and having a bass speaker installed therein. 921, a power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and housing a power supply board therein, and a power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and inside the box. An interface control board box 940 housing an interface control board, and a payout control board 951 installed across the power board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of game balls are housed inside. A payout control board box 950 is provided.

The substrate unit 900 includes a door frame relay substrate 911 attached to the front surface of the substrate unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600 . The door frame relay board 911 relays the connection between the dispensing control board 951, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the door body relay board attached to the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. It is for A payout device 830 is controlled by a payout control board 951 housed in a payout control board box 950 .

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 114 to 120 and the like. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. 117 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the game board shown in FIG. 117 and viewed from the front, and FIG. 119 shows the game board shown in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from the back. FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the function display unit enlarged from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which game balls are struck by the player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. As shown in FIG. The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front structural member 1000 that is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to cover the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that partitions, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, and the game is played by hitting the game ball into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game contents to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown).

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front surface of the game panel 1100. and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A game board side performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side performance display device 1600. - 特許庁

The game panel 1100 has a transparent flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000, and holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. and a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 includes a plurality of general winning openings 2001 which are always open to accept the game ball hit into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to accept a ball, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. A second start port 2004 that enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by this, and the first special lottery that is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. A big prize winning opening 2005 is provided in which game balls can be accepted either according to the result of the lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a big winning port 2005. A start port unit 2100 and a start port unit A lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of 2100 when viewed from the front and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and a side unit attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It has an upper part 2300 and a frame-like center accessory 2500 having a gate part 2003 and a second starting port 2004 attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the back wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600 is provided.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back top left movable effect unit 3200 attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side in the front view, and the back box. A back left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in the back box 3010, and a back upper center attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view. A movable effect unit 3400 and a back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 are provided.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front constituent member 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119 and the like. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from a lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in the front view along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending obliquely to the upper right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 and the impact part 1006 with which the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Further, the front structural member 1000 includes the outer side of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 near the lower ends thereof extending substantially vertically, the outer side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1008 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1008 projects backward from the security cover 200 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security concave portion 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire attempts to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the crime prevention concave portion 1008. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front component 1000 also has a plurality of positioning projections 1009 projecting rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002 . By inserting these positioning protrusions 1009 into inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 , the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 .

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 projecting rearwardly from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned between the panel holder 1120 (the game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. FIG.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1011 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch 1011 is aligned with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, these notches 1011 and 1127 are passed through the lower full ball path. Front end openings of a normal guideway 861 and a full tank guideway 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 115, 116, 118, 119, and the like. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if obstacle nails are planted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed through the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

In addition, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of fitting holes 1113 which are circular holes arranged near the outer circumference and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and long holes 1114 arranged near the outer circumference at the lower left portion and penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in the vertical direction. , is equipped with These fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 are arranged outside the game area 5 a and are used for positioning with the panel holder 1120 . Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engaging stepped portions 1115 recessed on the front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engaging stepped portions 1115 are cut out to approximately half the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a like the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114, It is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120 .

In addition, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. By fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1009 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116, the inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 and has a holding stepped portion 1121 recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and a front-to-rear direction inside the holding stepped portion 1121 having a size substantially equal to that of the game area 5a. and a through hole 1122 penetrating through.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110 , and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 is the same as the panel holder 1120 . Almost flush with the front surface. Further, the holding stepped portion 1121 is formed in such a size that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 on the front inner peripheral surface thereof. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the elongated hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding stepped portion 1121, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding stepped portion 1121. It extends and has a plurality of projecting pins 1123 that can be fitted into and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 . By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engaging claw 1124 and an engaging piece 1125 that engage with the engaging stepped portion 1115 at positions corresponding to the engaging stepped portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 . More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is arranged above the holding stepped portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging stepped portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding stepped portion 1121. It protrudes toward and elastically engages with the engaging stepped portion 1115 . The engaging claw 1124 is sized so that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120 .

The engaging piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding stepped portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engaging stepped portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 . The engaging piece 1125 is arranged along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 on the upper side ( center side) by a predetermined amount. By engaging the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging claws 1124 and the engaging pieces 1125 , the panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120 .

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has an out port 1126 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the rear lower side of the out port 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1126. - 特許庁

Further, the panel holder 1120 has a notch portion 1127 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This cutout portion 1127 is aligned with the cutout portion 1011 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, these cutout portions 1011 and 1127 are penetrated to form the lower full ball path unit 860. Front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full-tank guideway 862 face forward.

The panel holder 1120 also has a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front structural member 1000 . By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front structural member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front structural member 1000, and the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the front structural member 1000. 1120 (gaming panel 1100) can be positioned.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the notch 1127 . The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129 .

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 , the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 . As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guide section 1003 and discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 .

[5-2a. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the game panel 1100 described above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel in a form different from that of FIG. 117, seen from the front together with the front structural member, substrate holder, and main control unit. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 121 as viewed from behind. The game panel 1150 is made of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). This game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 described above.

The game panel 1150 is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer shape of the front component 1000 . The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out guide portion 1003 of the front structural member 1000 in the lower part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In the game panel 1150, the rear lower side of the out port 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1151.例文帳に追加

In addition, the game panel 1150 has a cutout portion 1152 having the same shape as the cutout portion 1011 of the front structural member 1000 and a cutout portion 1152 which penetrates in the front-view left side of the lower end in the front-rear direction and which is open downward, and which is located above the cutout portion 1152 in the vertical direction. and a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

In addition, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of inner rails penetrating in the front-rear direction so that the positioning projections 1009 can be fitted in positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning projections 1009 projecting rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component member 1000. A fixing hole 1154 is provided. In addition, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front structural member 1000 . By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front component 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel 1150 can be attached to the front component 1000. 1150 can be positioned.

Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating back and forth for mounting the front unit 2000 in the same manner as the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 described above. ing.

The game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 , and the out port 1151 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front structural member 1000 . As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guide section 1003, and discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 119 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is slanted downward toward the center in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below when assembled on the game board 5 . As a result, all of the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 can be received. It is possible to discharge downward from the discharging portion 1201 that is positioned.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 119 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents, payout of game balls, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When one sealing mechanism is used to close the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be traced. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the play area 5a, as shown. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 120). This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 120, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED for displaying the game status, and four LEDs for displaying the results of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing game balls through the gate section 2003. Ordinary pattern display 1402 consisting of, normal holding indicator 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball to the gate part 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002 A first special design indicator 1403 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the first special lottery result, and a first special reservation consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls to the first start port 2002 A number indicator 1404, a second special symbol indicator 1405 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the second start port 2004, and a second start port 2004 A second special reservation number indicator 1406 consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" etc., the big winning opening 2005 A round indicator 1407 consisting of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern is mainly provided.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although illustration is omitted, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control part for controlling effect images. .

[5-7. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116. FIG. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at substantially the center thereof. This game board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 . This game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and is capable of displaying still images and moving images.

The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a right fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface when viewed from the front. This game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves which are open on the left inner circumferential surface in a front view inside a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010 described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. The two left fixing pieces 1601 are inserted into 3010c from the oblique rear of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the mechanism 3020 downward.

[5-8. front unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. FIG. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. , and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 .

The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving a game ball hit into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are located within the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions, a gate part 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and a game ball A second starting port 2004 that enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing through the part 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a big prize winning port 2005 that enables acceptance of game balls according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

A plurality of general winning holes 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged substantially directly below the impact portion 1006 on the upper right side in the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged right below the gate portion 2003 to the right in front view. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1126 .

In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a big winning port 2005. A start port unit 2100 and a start port unit A lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of 2100 when viewed from the front and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and a side unit attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It comprises an upper part 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 which is attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has a gate part 2003 and a second starting port 2004. - 特許庁

The starting port unit 2100 is arranged directly above the out port 1126 in the vicinity of the lower end portion of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In this starter opening unit 2100, the first starter opening 2002 opens upward to a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time, and the big winning opening 2005 receives a plurality of game balls at once ( For example, 4 to 6 pieces) extend to the left and right with an acceptable size, and are formed so as to be openable and closable according to the game state.

The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 capable of receiving game balls at all times.

The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front in the game area 5a, at the upper left side of the lower side unit 2200 in the front view, slightly below the center in the vertical direction. When the upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball that has flowed down along the inner rail 1002 is directed to the right (game area 5a). center in the left-right direction).

The center accessory 2500 is arranged above the starter unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center when viewed from the front. installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and through the frame, the game board side effect display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 and the effect units provided in the back unit 3000 are visually recognized from the front. be able to. The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 .

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, except for the lower side, so that a game ball hit into the game area 5a is projected inside the frame. It is impenetrable.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 which is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side in the front view so that game balls in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball which has entered the warp entrance 2520 can be released into a frame. It has a warp exit 2522 that is open and a stage 2530 that rolls the game ball discharged from the warp exit 2522 in the left-right direction and then discharges it into the game area 5a. A starting port unit 2100 is arranged directly below the stage 2530, and when a game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received in the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-9. back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. FIG. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 on the game panel 1100 . Also, behind the back unit 3000, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached.

The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front. The rear wall has a square opening 3010a. A box-shaped performance drive board box 3042 is provided so as to be rotatable about an axis extending left and right along the axis and housing the performance drive board.

The back unit 3000 includes a back left center decorative unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back top left movable effect unit 3200 attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side in the front view, and the back box. A back left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in the back box 3010, and a back upper center attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view. A movable effect unit 3400 and a back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 are provided.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front, and has a square opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall and a plate frame-like shape protruding rearward from the periphery of the opening 3010a at intervals. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c recessed outward from the inside of the frame on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view, into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted. , and a notch portion 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached from the rear end to the rear wall of the back case 3010 at the center in the vertical direction of the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view.

The opening 3010 a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 . Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the game board side effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface in a vertically slidable manner.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting each movable effect unit and the like at appropriate positions.

The back unit 3000 uses a back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, a back top left movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, a back top middle movable effect unit 3400, and a back bottom front movable effect unit 3500, etc. , luminous effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

[6. Game content]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 114 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are released by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. , the ball passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game ball is started. A game ball hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the more the handle is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. , the game ball can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle pegs (not shown) are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and game balls are placed on the obstacle pegs. By abutting, the falling speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest part in front view, it hits a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown), The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down. When the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 , it is supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530 .

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves left and right, and is released forward. When a game ball is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, it is received by the first start hole 2002 with a high probability because it is positioned directly above the first start hole 2002. - 特許庁When the game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. - 特許庁A game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the open big winning opening 2005, or the like.

By the way, if the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it will be moved to the center in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300, There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the starting port 2002 or the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

On the other hand, when the game ball hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (so-called right hitting), On the downstream side, it flows through a region provided with a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 .

Then, when the right-handed game ball passes through the gate part 2003, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and if the lottery result of the normal lottery is "normal hit", the second start port 2004 is opened for a predetermined time ( For example, between 0.3 to 10 seconds), it will be in an open state, and the reception of game balls to the second start port 2004 is possible. Then, when the game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, 4) game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. be.

In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by passing game balls through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the indication of the result of the normal lottery (for example, 0.5 hours). 01-60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The second starting port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

In addition, if the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 before the normal lottery result is indicated after the game ball passes through the gate part 2003, the normal lottery result cannot be suggested. The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the previous suggestion of the result of the ordinary lottery ends. Further, the upper limit of the number of retained lottery results is set to four, and even if the game balls pass through the gate section 2003, the game balls exceeding the upper limit are discarded without being retained. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 sets an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot", " A lottery for the special lottery result that generates a medium hit, a small win, a variable probability win, a reduced time win, etc. is performed. Then, the special lottery result of the lottery is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special fluctuation time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn by receiving the game ball in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include "loss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", " 15R big hit”, “probability change (probability change) hit”, “time saving (time reduction) hit”, “probability change time saving hit”, “probability change time saving hit”, etc.

If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state , After the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state in which it is possible to receive game balls in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When game balls are received in the big winning opening 2005 when the big winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls are sent from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. is dispensed to the upper tray 321 . Therefore, when the big winning hole 2005 is capable of receiving game balls, by allowing the big winning hole 2005 to receive the game balls, a lot of game balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

If the special lottery result is a "small hit", the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a predetermined short period of time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) to accept a game ball. Repeat the opening and closing pattern multiple times (eg, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the large winning opening 2005 becomes an open state capable of accepting game balls, or the opening to the big winning opening 2005 When any of the conditions of acceptance of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, a predetermined opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game ball unacceptable in a closed state is set. Repeat a number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R big win", 5 rounds for "5R big win", and 15 rounds for "15R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "big hit", after the end of the big win game, change the probability that the special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn ("variable hit"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. There is a "hit" to do ("time saving hit").

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery to the acceptance of the game ball into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the special lottery result drawn is suggested, the first start port 2002 and the second Since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started when the game ball is accepted in the second start port 2004, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. be. The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being held. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600 . The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time, and then suggesting the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the game board side effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and a special lottery result is suggested as a effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the game board side effect display device 1600 is variably displayed by changing each symbol row in a state in which three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are arranged in the horizontal direction. The pattern rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three stopped and displayed pattern rows are combined corresponding to the result of the special lottery. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous game state (for example, a small winning game, a big winning game, etc.) occurs according to the drawn special lottery result.

The time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates). A longer time is set for the function display unit 1400 than the time until the finalized image is displayed.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 on the door frame 3 is displayed according to the special lottery result. Operation button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various decorations of center accessory 2500, various decorations of back unit 3000, back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, back upper left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect By appropriately using the unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc., it is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc., and the game can be played by various effects. It is possible to keep the player's interest in the game from declining.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in this embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main frame 4 in this embodiment is the main unit of the present invention, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of this embodiment is the present invention. , the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment and the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in this embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

In addition, the decorative member inside the operation button of the base unit in this embodiment, the main screen 471 and sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are the second decorations of the present invention, The second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432, the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the peripheral edge decoration member 478 each correspond to the second decoration portion of the present invention. .

Further, each LED and sub-screen decoration substrate mounted on the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 in this embodiment. The LED 477a of 477 is the light emitter of the present invention, the door frame side effect display device 460 of the present embodiment is the back side decoration means of the present invention, the frame unit 415 of the present embodiment, the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and The unit bases 451 of the second base unit 450 each correspond to the base portion of the present invention.

[8. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the effect operation unit 400 (or the second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 bulging forward in the door frame 3 is performed. When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A) 472a, sub-screen decorative member 476, peripheral decorative member 478, etc.), decoration in which the first button decoration part 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlap, etc. Since it is possible to show the player the decoration full of decorativeness with a sense of perspective, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and to differentiate it from other pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 can be made expensive.

In addition, the operation button internal decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. are arranged in the movement direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). In addition, since the button lens 411 is supported by the unit base 431 (unit base 451) so that it can be moved by the player's operation, the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move it. Then, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second inner button decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) approach or separate, A change in the distance between the first button decoration portion 411a and the second inner button decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral edge decoration member 478, etc.) changes the distance between the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411a. It is possible to change the perspective of the decoration that appears to overlap with the button interior decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral edge decoration member 478, etc.). The decoration (intersection mode) by the second button interior decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral edge decoration member 478, etc.) can be changed by the player himself, and the player can It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, which is the side opposite to the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A), the first decorative body Since a space is formed between the second decorative body and the player, the distance from the button lens 411 to the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button of the operation button inner decorative member 432 The distance to the inner decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) is greatly different, and the button lens 411 is operated to move it. When the position of the player's eyes moves even when the screen is not on, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second inner button decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) are displayed. Since the intersecting state (overlapping condition) between the two is changed, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Furthermore, since the outer peripheral edge of the transparent button lens 411 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a having a radial decoration toward the center, the central side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration portion 411a is not provided The operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 on the back side can be visually recognized well through the first button decoration portion 411a. The player's line of sight can be directed to the center of the button lens 411 by the decoration of , and through the center of the transparent button lens 411, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) or the door frame It is possible to draw the player's attention to the side effect display device 460 strongly.

In addition, since the operation button inner decorative member 432 is provided with the second button inner decorative portion 432g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centering on the center, the button lens 411 can be seen from the outside. The decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a and the decoration of the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 intersect with each other, so that the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g The pachinko machine 1 can be made to have a high appeal to the players by making the decoration by the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g conspicuous. can.

In addition, since the decoration of the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 has a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centering on the center, the second button inner decoration portion 432g By the decoration, the player's line of sight and interest can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 visible in the center of the operation button inner decorative member 432, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. can.

Furthermore, each LED mounted on the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 (or the sub-screen decoration substrate 477) When the LED 477a) emits light, the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) can be decorated with light emission, and the button lens 411 can also be decorated with light emission. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the player can also be entertained by light emission decoration. At this time, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) are operated by the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). Since the light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the decoration substrate 436 can be diffused, in the second button interior decoration portion 432g, the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, and the operation button top Direct light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the interior decoration substrate 435 and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 emits light for decoration. Indirect light diffused by the portion 432g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) is used for luminous decoration, while the second button inner decorative portion 432g (sub-screen decorative member 476) is strongly luminous-decorated. Since the first button decoration portion 411a is weakly illuminated, the LEDs of the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 are illuminated. (or the LED 477a) is illuminated, and the perspective is emphasized when the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) are viewed from the outside. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing by showing the decoration to the player and strongly attracting the interest of the player.

In addition, since the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door There is no need to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move to a portion outside the outer circumference of the frame-side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame The side second effect display device 460A) can be spread outward to be made as large as possible, and the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged. 460A) can be highlighted. In addition, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for movement outside the button lens 411, by arranging the frame unit 415 outside the button lens 411, the whole pachinko machine 1 can be The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly decorative and highly appealing to strongly attract the interest of players by improving its appearance.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, the button lens 411 has a flat shape when the player hits the button lens 411 and applies an impact to a part of the surface. As compared with the case, the applied impact force is easily distributed over the entire button lens 411, so that the button lens 411 can be made difficult to break (hard to break). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the breakage of the button lens 411 during the game, which interrupts the game and makes some players feel frustrated and lose interest. By making it difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 can be viewed from the front through the through hole 111 in the door frame 3. The unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 protruding forward on the side has an outer diameter of 10 cm. Operation buttons 410 that are movable (advance and retreat) by being operated by the player with a circular shape of about 15 cm within a range of ~30 cm, and decoration inside the operation buttons that can be seen from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation buttons 410 Since the member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged in the frame are attached, the conventional Since the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) having as large an operation button 410 as possible can be seen at a position where the storage tray for the game balls is conspicuous in the pachinko machine, the player can see the performance operation unit 400 at a glance. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 is highly appealing. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and a translucent second button decoration is provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. 411b, and attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b. First LEDs 422a and 423a for decorating the second button decoration part 411b with light emission and second LEDs 422b and 423b for decorating the frame side lens 417 with light emission are provided, and the frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided. An inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 partitioning the decoration portion 411b, and a main body portion 413a and an inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 partitioning the second button decoration portion 411b and the central side of the button lens 411. Therefore, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411, and the second LED 422b , 423b can be prevented from illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be independently decorated with light emission. can. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly decorated with light emission, and a good-looking light emission effect can be performed. In addition, by appropriately combining lights off, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, etc., for the frame side lenses 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b that are adjacent to each other, various patterns of light emission effects can be performed. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored, entertains the player, and suppresses the decline in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the first LEDs 422a and 423a that decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b that decorate the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are combined into one operation button left outer decoration. Since the board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are provided and the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the second button decoration portion Compared to the case where 411b (operation button 410) is provided with a substrate, the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be kept away from the second button decoration portion 411b as much as possible, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be sufficiently emitted. It is possible to irradiate the second button decoration portion 411b in a diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly decorated with light emission, the appearance of the light emission decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, and the player's interest is strongly attracted. At the same time, the player can be entertained, and the decline in interest of the player can be suppressed.

Further, since the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (the second base unit 450), the operation button left external decoration board 422 moves along with the movement of the operation button 410. Also, the wiring connected to the operation button right external decoration board 423 is not bent or stretched, and disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (the second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring will not be disconnected. The player can be entertained with the luminous decoration without any problem, and the loss of interest of the player can be suppressed.

In addition, since the second button decorative portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the transparent button lens 411 can be passed through the rear operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460. When looking at (door frame side second effect display device 460A), the outer edges of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is decorated, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. By appropriately lighting the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen behind. As described above, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417, which decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411, can be decorated with light emission in various patterns. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the light emission effect, the operation of the operation button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be strongly attracted. It is possible to entertain the effect image or the like by the effect display device 460A) and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the button lens 411 (operation button 410) provided with the second button decorative portion 411b on the outer edge can be operated by the player, the operation button 410 can be operated by the player during execution of the player participation type production. By allowing the operation, the player can enjoy the operation of the operation button 410 (player-participation type performance), and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. Then, when executing the player-participation type production, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are decorated with light emission, thereby attracting the interest of the player to the operation button 410. Therefore, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained by participating in the player participation type production.

Furthermore, since only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 is provided with the opaque main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f that can be decorated with light emission by the first LEDs 422a, 423a, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 can be The portion closer to the center than the button decoration portion 411b is not decorated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the center side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is brightened so that it is positioned backward. It is possible to prevent the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from becoming difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration part 411b can be decorated with light emission in a good state, and the transparent button lens 411 can pass through the transparent button lens 411 to the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460). The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can be sufficiently entertained with decorations, light-emitting effects, and the like, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, since the inner cylindrical portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 having the frame side lenses 417, on the rear side of the frame unit 415, the frame side lenses 417 and the second button decoration of the operation button 410 are arranged. The portion 411b can be completely partitioned by the inner cylindrical portion 416d. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) of the inner tubular portion 416d near the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423, light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b is emitted. Since the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 416d is positioned closer to the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 than the diffusion range, the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external Even if a gap is formed between the decoration substrate 423 and the front surface, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b illuminates the second button decoration portion 411b. never do. Therefore, it is possible to realize the pachinko machine 1 that reliably blocks the light by the inner cylindrical portion 416d and reliably exhibits the above-described effects.

In addition, since the body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (the button lens 411), the rear side of the operation button 410 has the second button decorative portion 411b. and the central side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned by the body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f. On the other hand, the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423 are located near the end (rear end) of the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423 in the main body portion 413a. , the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not pass through the rear end of the main body portion 413a, and the entrance of the light to the central side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 is completely blocked. can be done. Therefore, the second button decoration part 411b can be illuminated in a favorable state by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the transparent button lens 411 can be passed through the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 ( The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can be sufficiently entertained with the decoration and the light emission effect, thereby suppressing the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration is placed in front of the outer portion of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the portion 411b is positioned, the operation button inner decorative member 432 (the door frame side second The second button decorative portion 411b can make the outside members and the rear side (back side) of the effect display device 460A) difficult to see, thereby preventing deterioration of the appearance of the operation buttons 410.例文帳に追加Also, at this time, if the second button decoration portion 411b is decorated with light emission by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b is changed by the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect Since the outer side and the rear side of the display device 460A) are relatively dark, the members on the outer side and the rear side of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made difficult to see. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the operation button inner decorative member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the player can A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b The side lens 417 has an arcuate shape. Therefore, by appropriately emitting light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, it is possible to produce a light emission effect such that the light circulates around the outer edge of the operation button 410, or light emission such that the light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to show the player an effect, a light-emitting effect in which light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., the player can be kept from getting bored with various light-emitting effects, and the player can enjoy it. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper tray 321 used for the game by hitting the game balls stored in the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 in the door frame 3 into the game area 5a is formed. At the same time, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and lower side of the upper plate 321 to create a mounting space of a predetermined size behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). The remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed, the portion corresponding to the lower plate first region A1 of the lower plate main body 325 is arranged on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed from that portion. Since the part corresponding to the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 is extended inside to attach the lower plate 322 capable of storing game balls, the lower plate 322 looks small when viewed from the front. As a result, the lower plate 322 can be made inconspicuous, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be relatively conspicuous. Therefore, when the present pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be seen at the position where the upper tray and the lower tray are vertically aligned in the conventional pachinko machine. A highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of making a player recognize that it is different from a conventional pachinko machine at a glance and strongly attracting the interest of the player. can.

In addition, in the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, it extends upward from the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery, and extends to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Since lower tray covers 340, 340A for regulating the movement of game balls are provided, the game balls in the lower tray 322 are prevented from coming into contact with the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A). , and the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 and the game balls stored in the lower tray 322 contact or press the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball does not come into contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the game ball does not damage the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the breakage of the performance operation unit 400 (the second performance operation unit 400A), thereby preventing the player from losing interest, and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Also, lower plate covers 340, 340A for restricting movement of game balls to the remaining space side of the main body standing wall portion 325b and the mounting space 326j are provided in the portion of the lower plate second area A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322. , it is possible to prevent game balls from entering (spilling out) from the lower tray main body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or uncomfortable due to the game ball entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322 is covered by the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the game ball supplied into the lower plate 322 bounces within the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be reliably prevented from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. In addition, since the portion of the lower tray second area A2 of the lower tray main body 325 is covered by the lower tray covers 340 and 340A, the player can easily move the lower tray main body 325 toward the lower tray first area A1 (lower tray opening). 326d) into the lower tray second area A2, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A can prevent the fingertips from entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. etc. can be prevented from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), etc., and the player can play in a safe state. can be done.

Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), impact and pressure due to the contact of the game ball against the lower plate covers 340, 340A is not transmitted from the lower tray covers 340, 340A to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and damage to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is ensured. can be prevented.

In addition, in the portion of the lower tray second region A2 in the lower tray main body 325 of the lower tray 322, since the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is provided in front of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is opened. In this state, the game balls discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can enter the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a as it is and be discharged downward (dollar box), and the game balls can be discharged downward (dollar box). It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, since the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are provided as described above, the game ball will not reach the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since abutment on the rear side can be prevented, damage to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be prevented, interruption of the game can be reduced, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 is higher toward the front, the game ball heading toward the front end side of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is tilted. By climbing the bottom, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, since the speed of the game ball contacting the lower tray covers 340, 340A can be slowed down, the lower tray covers 340, 340A reliably restrict the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. In addition, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game ball hits the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the main body vertical wall portion 325b, thereby suppressing damage to them.

Further, since at least the lower tray covers 340, 340A are formed as separate members, when the lower tray covers 340, 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired only by replacing the lower tray covers 340, 340A. 1 can be reduced.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center of the front in the left-right direction bulges most forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game such as receiving game balls into the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. After the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 is provided, the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most forwardly bulging portion thereof, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the plate unit cover 326. and a lower plate 322, and the storage plate (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) is provided with the outer side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front. It has a lower tray first area A1 and a lower tray second area A2 positioned in the rear space of the installation space 326j behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be conspicuous, and the storage plate (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) can be made smaller and less noticeable. can. Therefore, since the conspicuous production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen in the part where the upper tray and the lower tray were visible in the conventional pachinko machine, the game machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine for the player. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing and capable of strongly attracting the player's interest.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is Although it is small, the first portion of the lower plate main body 325 having the lower plate second region A2 located in the space behind the installation space 326j behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. Since the extension part 325B, the second extension part 325C, and the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are provided, game balls can be stored in a range (lower tray second area A2) of the lower tray 322 that cannot be seen from the front. can. Therefore, since a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured contrary to the appearance from the front, the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of game balls in the lower tray 322.例文帳に追加This allows the player to enjoy the game and suppress the loss of interest.

Furthermore, the lower tray main body 325 and the main body portion 325A having the lower tray first area A1, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A having the lower tray second area A2, the first extension section 325B and the second extension section Since the lower tray 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the portion 325C, a plurality of lower tray covers 340, 340A having different sizes, the first extension portion 325B, the second extension portion 325C, etc. are prepared in advance. By attaching the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C of sizes corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the mounting space 326j in the plate unit cover 326, etc. The volume of dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension portion 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the space behind the mounting space 326j. Since the size of this rear space depends on the rearward projection amount of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), various production operation units 400 (second production operation unit 400A) with different rearward projection amounts can be used. The lower plate 322 can be adapted to the production operation unit 400A), and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

In addition, since the lower plate 322 is provided with a bottom wall portion 325a and a main standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a downwardly recessed container-like shape and a game ball. can be reliably stored. In addition, since the lower tray covers 340 and 340A have the cover vertical wall section 340a that rises from the upper end of the main body vertical wall section 325b of the lower tray main body 325, various shapes of the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are prepared in advance. By combining (attaching) the lower tray covers 340 and 340A having shapes corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space behind the mounting space 326j, etc., various forms can be accommodated. It is possible to achieve the same effects as those described above.

In the lower tray 322 composed of the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray covers 340 and 340A, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325. Therefore, since the part of the lower tray 322 on which the game balls are placed is the lower tray main body 325, the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray covers 340, 340A are placed on the part where the load of the game balls is increased due to the storage. There are no boundaries (joints, dividing lines PL). Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower tray main body 325, even if many game balls are stored, the lower tray cover 340, 340A will not be pulled away from the lower tray main body 325. It does not work, and can prevent the lower tray covers 340 and 340A from coming off the lower tray main body 325.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an upper plate capable of storing game balls is provided below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game is performed such that the game balls are accepted in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. 321 and a lower plate 322, and a lower plate ball supply port 323c and a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322 by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction. Since more than half of the lower tray 322 including the and is made invisible (hardly visible) from the front (player), the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made neat and attractive, and the player is interested. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing, capable of strongly attracting . In addition, since the game ball heading from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is made difficult to see by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the player can play the game inside the lower tray 322. It is possible to prevent the player from being distracted by making it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the ball, and to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the bottom plate of the lower plate 322 to guide the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a Since the part between the ball extraction hole 322a and the game ball guided by the guide means such as the ball guide part 322c and the buffer part 322d is made difficult to see, if the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is kept open, , the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c are guided by the guiding means and are smoothly (immediately) ejected downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a. It is possible to create the illusion that the game balls are discharged below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322.例文帳に追加This makes it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and allows the player to devote himself to the game to suppress the loss of interest.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a difficult to see from the front, so it is probable that In addition, the lower tray ball supply port 323c, the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, and the like are positioned behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). That is, since half or more of the lower plate 322 is made to wrap around behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front is different from the actual size of the lower plate. Since the size (capacity) of 322 is large, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 compared to its appearance.

Also, in the state where the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is open, the game ball released into the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is transferred to the lower tray ball supply port 323c on the bottom surface of the lower tray 322 Since the guide means such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d, which are located between the ball hole 322a, the ball can be smoothly guided to the lower plate ball hole 322a and discharged to the bottom of the lower plate 322 (dollar box). , the game ball can be prevented from circulating in the lower tray 322, and the game ball circulating in the lower tray 322 can be reliably made invisible from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls in the lower tray 322, thereby preventing the player from being distracted and suppressing the loss of interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is kept open, the game ball supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is immediately released by the ball guiding portion 322c or the like without making the player aware of it. Since the ball can be ejected downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the player is given the illusion that the game ball is ejected below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322.例文帳に追加can be done. As a result, it is possible to make the player less likely to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and to make the player concentrate on the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), since more than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game ball in the plan view of the bottom plate 322 is made invisible from the front, the bottom plate visible from the front Since the actual lower tray 322 is larger than the visible size with respect to the size 322, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured as with the lower tray of the conventional pachinko machine.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 protruding forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game such as receiving game balls into the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. Effect operation unit attachment for attaching a large effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having the same height as the total height of the plate unit cover 326 at the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. In addition to having a portion 326a, the lower plate front decorative portion 326c on the left and right sides of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is recessed so as to be scooped out rearward from the center in the vertical direction. Because of the shape, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a can be seen to protrude greatly forward, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect The operation unit 400A) can be conspicuous. Therefore, the large production operation unit 400 (the second production operation unit 400A) can be seen in an emphasized state at the position where the upper tray and the lower tray were arranged vertically in the conventional pachinko machine. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be highly appealing by making the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine just by looking at it. The lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the plate front lower decorative portion 326c recessed rearward on both the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. A part is wrapped around the back of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 (volume of the lower plate 322) can be sufficiently secured. The player does not have to worry about the lower plate 322 being filled with game balls while playing, and the player can concentrate on the game, enjoy the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when the player puts his or her hand into the lower plate 322 from the front, the fingertips will not touch the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall of 322 (the front surface of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like. As a result, it is possible for the player to perceive that a sufficient amount of game balls is secured by touch, and in a state in which the game balls are stored in the lower tray 322, Since it is possible to recognize that many game balls are stored in the space, the player can be given a feeling of satisfaction, and the game can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed. In addition, since the fingertips of the hand placed in the lower tray 322 are less likely to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322, the lower tray cover 340, etc., the player feels the same as the lower tray in the conventional pachinko machine. As a result, players accustomed to conventional pachinko machines can be prevented from feeling a sense of incongruity, and the players can be relieved and their interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (rear), even if the front side is small, a sufficient storage amount of game balls can be secured. In other words, since the portion on the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made small, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) where the lower plate 322 is open. , and the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) can be relatively conspicuous. Therefore, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be provided while sufficiently securing the amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the player can be attracted. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the lower tray cover 340 covers the sides and upper part of the portion of the lower tray 322 that wraps around behind the production operation unit 400 (the second production operation unit 400A), the player cannot move inside the lower tray 322. When a player puts his or her hand in, it is possible to prevent the fingertip or the like from touching the inner surface of the plate unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) and get injured. The game can be played in a safe state. Also, the lower tray cover 340 can prevent game balls from entering (spilling out) from the lower tray 322 into the tray unit cover 326 .

Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is arranged in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be operated from the player side. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous and highly appealing, capable of strongly attracting the interest of the players, and the decoration by the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be easily seen. By doing so, it is possible to entertain the decorations and effects of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) and suppress the decrease in interest of the player.

Further, since the lower tray 322 is provided with a lower tray ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper tray 321 and a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a that penetrates vertically so as to be openable and closable, the conventional pachinko machine can be used. Since it has the same function as the lower tray 322, when a player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine plays a game with this pachinko machine 1, the function of the lower tray 322 is not confused and the same as the conventional one. The game can be played with a relaxed feeling, and the player can concentrate on the game and enjoy the game. In addition, since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a are respectively arranged behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when viewed from the front, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a are arranged. A pachinko machine with a high appealing power, in which a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is not visible from the player side, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted. machine 1.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the dish unit 320 protruding forward below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a of the door frame 3. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting effects to the player on the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326. The operation button inner decorative member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A screen unit 470) decorating the outside of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) An operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 whose diameter is about 15 cm and whose center bulges in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) is attached. A tubular button base 413 that includes a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412 and protrudes from the button lens 411 side toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side. , the first button decorative portion 411a, the button base 413, etc. allow the operation button inner decorative member 432 (door frame side second It is possible to reduce visibility of the outer edge and the back side (rear side) of the screen unit 470) of the two-effect display device 460A, and the appearance of the operation buttons 410 can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the appearance of the operation button 410, the operation button inner decorative member 432 provided inside, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc., and improve the appearance of the player. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410 allow the button lens 411 and the button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) to pass through the gap between the button lens 411 and the button base 413. Since it is possible to make the outer edge and inner side of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) difficult to see, by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) can be 470) is relatively large, it can be satisfactorily hidden by the first button decoration part 411a and the like, so that while preventing deterioration in appearance, a large operation button with an outer diameter of about 15 cm can be used. 410 (button lens 411) can be implemented without problems. Therefore, since the operation buttons 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous and the player's interest is strongly enhanced. The pachinko machine 1 can be made attractive and highly appealing.

Further, since the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) projecting in a cylindrical shape from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative member 432 ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed obliquely, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield the objects outside the operation button internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) so that they cannot be seen. The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

In addition, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (semispherical shape) that bulges in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the portion near the outer periphery of the button lens 411 The surface is a plane formed by the front end side opening of the button base 413 (a plane perpendicular to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are aligned, that is, the advancing/retreating direction of the operation button 410). ), the light is easily refracted when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, the first button decorative portion 411a, the second button decorative portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge are combined to form the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470). ), the outer edge of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470), the back side, and the like can be made difficult to see through the gap between them, so that the above-described effects can be achieved reliably.

In addition, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 increases. The side effect display device 460 (the second door frame side effect display device 460A) can be made larger or made easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device can entertain the player through the operation button 410.例文帳に追加460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be easily provided, and the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the players more can be embodied.

Furthermore, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is provided with design (decorativeness). can be made to face, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played.

In addition, in the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 is made opaque. It is possible to reliably hide the inner side of the operation button 410 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) from being seen through the gap between the lens 411 and the inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470). It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 and the like.

In addition, the button frame 412 is provided with an opaque button frame 412 covering the entire circumference with a predetermined width from the outer peripheral end of the button lens 411 to the inside. Since the gap between the body portion 413a of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) in the operation button 410 can be made difficult to see from the side, the body portion 413a and the operation button interior decoration member 432 ( The gap between the screen unit 470 and the screen unit 470) can be increased, and the space for moving the operation button 410 and the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be easily secured. can be moved well.

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the operation button 410 can be moved smoothly and easily because there is no directivity in the outer periphery compared to the polygonal shape. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, it can be pressed without any problem, and the player can surely enjoy the player-participation type performance using the operation button 410, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, since the operation button 410 is made large, when the player participatory effect is executed in which the player operates the operation button 410, it is possible to easily operate the operation button 410 without confirming the position of the operation button 410. Since the operation button 410 can be easily touched and pressed, the player can easily participate in the player-participation type performance using the operation button 410, which amuses the player and reduces interest. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the player's interest is manipulated by presenting the effect image according to the game state. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) In addition to being able to entertain the performance, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410 by means of a performance image or light-emitting performance by the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A). , the decline in interest can be suppressed by making the player actively participate in the player-participation type performance and amusing it. In addition, by executing the performance within the operation button 410, it is possible to make some players think that something good will happen, thereby heightening the expectation for the game and suppressing the decrease in interest. can be done.

In addition, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 of the large operation button 410 (the portion inside the first button decoration portion 411a). Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the operation buttons 410 of the pachinko machine 1 are clearly different from the operation buttons of the conventional pachinko machine, and the appeal to the players is high. It can be used as a pachinko machine 1, and at the same time, heightens the player's expectation for the performance using the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) in the operation button 410.例文帳に追加It is possible to suppress the decline in interest of the player.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

In the above-described embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 has the first button decorative portion 411a formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the button lens 411 without the first button decorative portion 411a may be used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation button 410 has the opaque button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side may be formed along the entire circumference at a portion of the lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412 .

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (the second Although the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) projecting cylindrically toward the second base unit 450) side is shown, it is not limited to this, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the second effect on the door frame side are shown. At least one may protrude toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to partially surround the entire outer periphery of the display device 460A. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape that follows the outer circumference of the button lens 411 or a shape that does not follow the outer circumference of the button lens 411 . The button base 413 may have decorations (planar decorations such as pasting stickers or printing, or three-dimensional decorations such as reliefs) on the inner wall side. Furthermore, the button base 413 may be translucent or opaque. Also, the button base 413 may be colored or may be colorless and transparent. Also, when the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable that at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side is subjected to light diffusion processing such as embossing, slits, prisms, and the like.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward only from the left outer portion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is shown. but not limited to, recessed backward from both left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and a lower plate that is connected to each other behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) 322 may be used, and only the portion on the right outside of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is recessed rearward, and a part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) wraps around to the rear. You can let it be.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the shape of the portion (front lower decorative portion 326c) of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) is curved rearward. Although an example of a concave shape is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the front surface may be concave like a polygonal prism or a polyhedron.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. , ``equipped with a rotating body having a decoration on its surface,'' ``equipped with a decoration with a decoration and a movable device for moving the decoration,'' and ``a game Equipped with decorations that three-dimensionally mimic characters, items, logos, and scenes (diorama), etc., in line with the concept of the game machine", "Characters, items, logos, and predetermined patterns in line with the concept of the game machine" You may attach members, such as a unit or a panel provided with decorations, such as , by a seal, printing, etc., etc. Moreover, the member attached to the attachment space 326j (the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a) does not need to be one, and a plurality of (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

In the above-described embodiment, the dish unit cover 326 is provided with the frontwardly opening effect operation unit attachment portion 326a for attaching the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). However, the plate unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) that does not have an opening (effect operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) A space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the plate unit cover. It should be noted that the front surface of such a plate unit cover should preferably be decorated with characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. in line with the concept of the game machine by means of stickers, printing, attachment of decorative members, or the like. .

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game balls in the plan view of the lower plate 322 is covered by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as a cover. Although an example is shown in which it is difficult to see from the front, the present invention is not limited to this. The entire plate 322 may be made invisible from the front.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are arranged in an arc shape partially in the circumferential direction. , and the second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be formed in an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the second button inner decorative portion 432g of the operation button inner decorative member 432 in the effect operation unit 400, a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown. The decoration is not limited to this, and the second inner button decoration portion 432g may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including ovals) centering on the center.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410, the operation button inner decorative member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect are arranged on the rear side. Although the rear member such as the display device 460A is shown to be visible at all times, it is not limited to this. may be provided with a variable light transmitting means that allows the rear side to be visually recognized by satisfying the above. Here, as the variable light transmitting means, there are two types of means, such as a magic mirror, which makes the rear side visible due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side, and a liquid crystal film, which becomes transparent when the power is turned on and off. or become opaque so that the rear side can be visually recognized”, and the like. In addition, the front member and the rear member may be relatively movable, or relatively non-movable.

At least one of the front member and the rear member has a variable light transmission means, so that only the front member or both the front member and the rear member are visible in a normal state, The decoration of the visible member can be shown to the player. In a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member arranged behind the rear member) that cannot be seen in a normal state can be seen. A member and a back member, or a front member, a back member and a member behind the back member can show overlapping decorations. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player using the front member and the rear member, making it difficult for the player to get tired of the game and entertaining the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

More specifically, for example, if the front member has a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, only the front member is decorated by darkening the rear side of the front member. It can be visually recognized by the player. Then, when the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by light from a light emitting part such as an LED, the sufficient condition of the variable light transmission means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear member passes through the front member. The member can be visually recognized, and the player can see the decoration in which the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member overlap.

Alternatively, if the front member is transparent and the rear member has variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member in a normal state. A player can be shown the surface and decoration of the Then, when the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light from the light emitting part such as the LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmission means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member. Through the member, the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decoration such as a character) can be seen by the player.

Furthermore, when both the front member and the rear member have variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, only the decoration of the front member can be seen by the player, When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by light emitted from a light-emitting portion such as an LED, the condition for the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be visually recognized through the front member. The decoration by the rear member can be shown to the player. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light emitted from the LED or the like (or the space between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by the light emitted from the LED or the like). ), and the conditions for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front and rear members are satisfied, respectively, and the member behind the rear member (for example, a display device, a decoration such as a character) through the front member and the rear member. can be shown to the player. Accordingly, by appropriately selecting the portion to be brightened by the light of the light emitting portion, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages, and the player can enjoy various decorations.

In the above specific example, since the variable light transmission means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror when the rear side is darkened. A glittering decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means is explained as something like a magic mirror. In addition, if a liquid crystal film or the like is used as the variable light transmission means, it can transmit light even in an opaque state (it has translucency). If the rear side of the member can be brightened (or decorated with light) by the light of the light emitting part such as an LED, it is possible to show the player a variety of effects such as light emitting effects and decorative effects. .

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 128. FIG. 123 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board and the peripheral control board, FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 123, and FIG. 126 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 123, and FIG. 127 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 123; FIG. 128 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 128 is a block diagram around a sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal display control unit.

As shown in FIG. 123, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control board 1310, a payout control board 951 and a peripheral control board 1510, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board 1310 will be described, and then the payout control board 951, the power supply board 931, and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 123, the main control board 1310, which controls the progress of the game, controls power-on processing executed when the power is turned on, and when the power is turned on, the main control board 1310 is executed after a predetermined period of time has passed and the game operation is executed. A main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor containing various control programs such as a main control program to be controlled, a ROM for storing various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., and detection signals from various detection switches are input. A main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and a predetermined voltage power failure or instantaneous and a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors signs of power failure.

The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a incorporates a non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a to identify the individual (a unique code that exists only in the world). Since the ID code assigned once is stored in a non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a includes a hard random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in A hard random number circuit 1310an” is built in. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value to 32767 as the maximum value is preset), A predetermined value is not fixed as an initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit is configured so that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value to a clock signal ( Based on a clock signal output from a main control crystal oscillator (to be described later), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without overlapping at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When finished, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without duplication. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are respectively input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, in the main control input circuit 1310b, information based on detection signals from various detection switches input to various input terminals thereof is not reset by a main control system reset, which will be described later, so that various signals based on the information It is configured as a circuit output from an output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND). A main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function having a reset terminal provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information, and a main control output circuit without a reset function 1310cb having no reset terminal and not having a reset function. and consists of The main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by resetting the main control system, which will be described later. is configured as a circuit in which no signals based on are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit that outputs a signal based on it from its various output terminals.

As shown in FIG. 123, shown in FIG. 114, the first starting hole sensor 4002 that detects the game ball entering the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole sensor 4002 that detects the game ball entering the second starting hole 2004 A detection signal from the starting gate sensor 4004 and the general winning gate sensor 4020 that detects a game ball that has entered the general winning gate 2001 and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are sent to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port. 114, a gate sensor 4003 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, a count sensor 4005 for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005, and attached to the rear unit 3000 shown in FIG. Detection signals from a magnetic detection sensor 4024 that detects cheating using a magnet and a vibration detection sensor 4026 that detects cheating that affects the fall of the game ball by shaking or hitting the game machine are detected by the game board. 5, and input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca based on the detection signal from each of these switches. 1310ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and outputs a drive signal from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starter solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, or outputs a drive signal to the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the first special symbol display device 1403 via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, the panel relay board 4161, and the function display unit 1400 , Second special symbol indicator 1405, first special reservation number indicator 1404, second special reservation number indicator 1406, normal symbol indicator 1402, state indicator 1401, and round indicator 1407 or output a drive signal do.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. By outputting various information (game information) related to the game to the board 951 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function, the main control with the reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In this embodiment, non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the first starting sensor 4002, the second starting sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005. , general winning hole sensors 4020, 4020 use contact type ON/OFF mechanical switches. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so the first starting hole sensor 4002, the second starting hole sensor 4004, and the Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 4003 also occurs frequently. For this reason, long-life proximity switches are used for the first starter sensor 4002, the second starter sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. FIG. Also, when a big winning game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and game balls enter frequently, so that the count sensor 4005 frequently detects the game balls. For this reason, the count sensor 4005 also uses a long-life proximity switch. On the other hand, in general winning openings 2001 and 2201 into which game balls do not enter frequently, detection by general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 does not occur frequently. For this reason, the general prize winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 use mechanical switches that have a shorter life than the proximity switches.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs to the main control board 1310 a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, thereby inputting the predetermined serial input port from the main control input circuit 1310b. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it sends a signal (main pay ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with a reset function. It outputs to the circuit 1310ca, and outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function. , various commands are transmitted as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function.

Here, the main peripheral serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around a main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control serial I/O ports, etc., are connected to the bus 1310ah. (See FIG. 133). The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, etc. (Fig. 133). The main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec. It is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea to start transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits multiple commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec after setting multiple commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. ) and BC0 (see FIG. 129). This capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from power on. Is output from the payout control board 951, through the main control input circuit 1310b, is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU1310a, and is completely erased from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU1310a (cleared).

[7-2. Payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 124, a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls includes a payout control unit 952 for performing various controls related to payout, an operation switch 954 for performing various functions, and a state display of the pachinko machine 1 . and an error LED indicator 860b. In addition, the operation switch 954, which also functions as a RAM clear switch, controls the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on the detection signal output by being operated. .) outputs a RAM clear signal to completely erase the information stored in the memory.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 124, a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on, and also controls payout of game media that is executed after a predetermined time has passed since the power is turned on. A payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor containing various control programs including a payout control program that controls operations, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., and detection from various detection switches related to payout A payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and a drive signal for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6. The payout control MPU 952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"). It also has a built-in watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program serially converts various information (game information) on the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout to the main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. to receive serial data. In addition, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the game ball payout operation, and operates the operation switch 954 as an error cancellation unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to the first error cancellation command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence commands and error cancellation navigation commands are sent as serial data to the payer. As a signal, serial data is output to the reception port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port 952b (command transmission means). In addition, this payout control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main processing is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is executed and payout control is started, the payout When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

Further, this payout control program outputs a door frame open command (first door open command) when a detection signal (door frame open detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame open switch 618. , when a detection signal (body frame open detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the body frame open switch 619, a body frame open command (first body frame open command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (body frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the body frame open switch 619, a body frame closing command (first body frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information that the detection signals from the various detection switches are respectively input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 952b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information It is configured as a circuit output from an output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and various signals are input to its various input terminals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like. A payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information, and a payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb having no reset terminal and having no reset function. and consists of The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the payout control system reset described later. is configured as a circuit in which no signals based on are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit that outputs signals based on it from its various output terminals.

A ball run-out detection sensor 827 for detecting run-out of game balls in the supply passage of the ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting game balls released from payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. A detection signal from a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is inputted to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a through a payout control input circuit 952b. Note that, for the sake of explanation later, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 is simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are applied to the payout control input circuit 952b. input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

Further, a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the board 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b in the form of serial data at the input terminal of its serial input port, and receives an operation signal (detection command) of the operation switch 954. signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a payout control signal with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function.

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. Various commands are transmitted from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310 as serial data.
When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951 to that effect. This signal (primary payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control input circuit 952b.

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. Outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, or outputs the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the error LED indicator By outputting the drive signal for displaying on 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, the drive signal is outputted from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED indicator 860b.

The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board with the payout control board 951), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out) Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it informs that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the dispensing device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is "ball caught" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotator and the game ball engage near the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830, making it difficult to rotate the payout rotator. ), and when the number "3" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "payout detection sensor error" is occurring), and when the number "5" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "retry error" (specifically, that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached the preset upper limit). is displayed, and when the number "6" is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored). game ball is full), and when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR unconnected" (electrical connection at any point from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6 is disconnected), and when the number "9" is displayed, it is "in stock (with prize ball stock (not paid out))" (specifically, game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached the predetermined number of balls).

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of game balls actually put out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. , the number of game balls actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 784 via a resistor (not shown).

In addition, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) regarding the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LED and photo IC built-in). ), the number of game balls and various information (game information, contents of errors related to the payout operation of game balls, or the fact that there was an error) are communicated to the hall computer installed in the hall computer.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are in a state of being electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers. It is designed to prevent the computer from malfunctioning or breaking down, and the main control board 1310 that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 that controls payout etc. It is designed not to malfunction or break down due to application of abnormal voltage. The hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

A game ball lending request signal from the ball lending button 328 and a prepaid card return requesting signal from the return button 329 are first sent to the frequency display plate 365, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and then the game ball lending device connection terminal plate. 869 to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input/output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and sends a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball lending/returning display unit 330. This signal is output to the lending device connection terminal plate 869 , the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the frequency display plate 365 , and this signal is input to the ball lending/returning display section 330 . In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending/returning display section 330 receives the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

In addition, the power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 has a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 129) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. there is Due to this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various kinds of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the operation signal is transmitted through the payout control input circuit 952b to the payout control MPU 952a. It is input to the input terminal of the input port, and the payout control MPU 952a judges it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is designed to be completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is also output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb.

[7-2-2. Exchanging various signals with the connection terminal board for rental equipment such as game balls]
Here, exchange of various signals between the payout control section 952 and the CR unit 6 and exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 125, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, and also connects the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365. (To be exact, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. , the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay The terminal plate 880 and the degree display plate 365 are electrically connected). Between the board between the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control board 951, between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay The terminal plate 880 is electrically connected to the substrate, and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the frequency display plate 365 are electrically connected by wiring (harness). AC 24 V, which will be described later, is supplied from the power supply board 931 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 . The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V")) from the supplied AC 24V by a built-in voltage generating circuit (not shown), and generates the voltage together with the ground LG. , to the payout control board 951 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 , and to the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 . .

A ball lending button 328, which is a push button switch, is mounted on the component surface of the frequency display plate 365 at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch is mounted at a position corresponding to the returning button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. A return button 329 is mounted, and a ball rental/return display section 330 as a segment display is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining rental display section 363 of the rental ball unit 360 .

The ball lending button 328 and return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 . When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via a ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 . When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device. Input is made to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869 .

The ball lending/returning display unit 330 is composed of three segment displays arranged in a row, and the segment displays of the three digits are sequentially driven one by one by a so-called dynamic lighting method. The lighting of the digit segment indicators is controlled. With such lighting control, the ball lending/returning display section 330 displays the balance of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays an error in the CR unit 6 . The ball rental/return display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a single-digit segment display out of three-digit segment displays, and the designated single-digit segment display. segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be displayed by lighting the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal When input through the plate 880, the 1-digit segment displays are sequentially illuminated according to the input digit signals DG0-DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A-SEG-G, and these 3-digit segment displays are displayed. The content of the luminescence of the vessel can be visually recognized through the remaining lending display portion 363 .

A CR unit lamp 365 d is mounted on the degree display plate 365 adjacent to the ball lending/returning display section 330 . A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to the CR unit lamp 365 d via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880 . A predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lendable signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via a CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 with a built-in voltage creation circuit, and when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are valid and the ball lending state is possible controls the logic of the ball lendable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending/returning display unit 330 through current limiting resistors mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 .

In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is sent from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When input, the ball rental request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 issues a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of rental balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which is equivalent to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. BRQ is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input, outputs EXS, which is a signal for notifying the start or end of one payout operation, to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. to output to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board for connecting the game ball lending device PRDY, which is a signal to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is possible or not possible. 869 to the CR unit 6. For example, if the hall clerk or the like has set the CR unit 6 in advance so that game balls worth 200 yen are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. is performed twice in a row, and when 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls worth 100 yen will be paid out, and a total of 50 balls worth 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, when the return button 329 is pressed, the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328 .

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power supply board 931 will be briefly described. The power board 931 includes a power switch 934 that can electrically connect or disconnect 24 volts AC (24 VAC) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and a power control unit 935 that generates various power sources. , and a shooting control section 953 that performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 682 of the ball shooting device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power supply controller]
The power control unit 935 operates a power switch 934 to operate a synchronous rectification circuit 935a that rectifies 24 volts AC (24V AC) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various direct currents for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates. and a power generation circuit 935d for generating power.

[7-3-2. Launch control section]
A firing control section 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 mainly includes a firing control circuit 953a. The shooting control circuit 953a receives an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the intensity (shooting intensity) at which the game ball is shot toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302, and an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not a finger is touching, and a single button operation sensor 312 that detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped (shooting) by the player's will. , and are inputted via the handle relay terminal board 315 . In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 953a, a CR connection signal is input via the payout control board 951 to notify that effect. .

The shooting control circuit 953a adjusts the driving current for launching (shooting) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, and controls the output to the shooting solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 through the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, Control is performed to send the game ball received by the ball sending member to the batted ball launching device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
Peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. 126, controls effects based on various commands from main control board 1310, and effects to draw the display area of door frame side effect display device 460 shown in FIG. Peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with the display drive board 4450, while performing drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, speaker 921 and upper speaker A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from 573, and a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) that holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second. ), and a volume adjustment volume 1510a that adjusts the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by turning a knob.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control section]
As shown in FIG. 126, the peripheral control unit 1511, which performs performance control, controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b for storing various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and control performance operations, various data, various control data and various schedule data, Various information that continues across the peripheral control unit steady-state processing that is executed each time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, light emission modes of various LEDs, etc. and information for managing the schedule data that defines the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and various information that continues over the day (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the jackpot game state and special A peripheral control SRAM 1511d for storing information for managing performance flags, etc.) and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 1511e") for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally ”.) and are provided.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can retain the stored contents only for a period of time when the power is restored immediately after an instantaneous power failure occurs, and the power is cut off for a long time (when the power is cut off for a long time). ), the peripheral control SRAM 1511d loses its contents, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 (hereinafter referred to as "SRAM electrolytic capacitor"). As a result, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. By providing an SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. It loses its contents as it can no longer be held.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e can be restarted, so the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and when various commands from the main control board 1310 are received, each decoration board of the game board 5 is controlled based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs etc. The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 and for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the motor drive board serial Door-side motor drive for transmitting from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 Data is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Peripheral control output of door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs etc. provided on each decoration board in 3 from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED It is transmitted to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 .

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Also, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the effect operation unit 400, and a press detection sensor 440 for detecting the press operation of the operation button 410. The detection signal from is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194, and this serialized effect operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate. 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and via the peripheral control input circuit, it is input to the serial I/O port for detecting the effect operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180 . Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, this serialized movable object detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit through the peripheral control input circuit to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. there is The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"). It is diagnosed whether or not

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 127, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa as the center, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial I/O controllers. /O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A/D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads/writes various data from/to the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah. Various data are read from and written to the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h. Various data are read and written via an internal bus 1511ah, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and an external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d. /O port 1511ag and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak and other input/output devices, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. to DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a peripheral control various serial I/O port 1511ae built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af. , peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, to transfer data independently. In addition, while reading and writing the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and It reads and writes from/to an input/output device such as a peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and a peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which are externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Between input/output devices such as O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, In order to transfer data independently, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are read and written via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h. Serial I/O port 1511ae, WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices are connected via peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai. read and write.

A peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls an internal bus 1511ah, a peripheral bus 1511ai, and an external bus 1511h to control a central processing unit of a peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control RAM 1511c. Storage devices such as SRAM 1511d, input/output devices such as peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converters 1511ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae are serial I/O port for lamp drive board, serial I/O port for motor drive board, serial I/O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED , a serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the main control board, and a serial I/O port for obtaining the performance operation unit information.

A peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. It has become. In other words, if the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period (until the timer expires) to the WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control, it will be reset. will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag outputs various latch signals such as the game board side motor drive latch signal and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. and outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This LED is a high-intensity white LED, and serves as a decision notice lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big win game state has been decided. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag are directly connected electrically, the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag can be shortened. Therefore, noise countermeasures can be taken for the lighting control of the LED, which has a significant meaning in the game. The lighting control of the LED is executed in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later, and the other LEDs except for this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit regular processing described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume control volume 1510a, and its resistance value is varied by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted to a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. FIG. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying pachinko machine 1 clerk or the like of the occurrence of malfunctions of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts on the pachinko machine 1, and contents related to game effects are announced. (For example, to make the screen unfolding on the game board side effect display device 1600 more powerful, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of shifting to an advantageous game state, etc.). The notification sound also flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, and the volume from mute to maximum volume. The volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control section 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to be described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 levels described above.

As a result, for example, even if a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the effect sounds such as music and sound effects that flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 can be reduced. However, when the pachinko machine 1 has a problem or the player commits a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a large volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be emitted. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 can be produced more powerfully by increasing the volume of the sound, or the game state can shift to an advantageous game state for the player. You can also notify them of high prices.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects, etc., and electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The schedule data for screen generation is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is defined. It is The schedule data for generating the light emission mode is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for indicating which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later, and the VDP built-in sound source 1512a. and a track number for indicating in which track among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source the sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines operations of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Some of the various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed. Some are read and executed. Various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are also read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and are stored in various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on. In some cases, what is copied in is read out.

In addition, in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, a program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is stored. A brightness correction program is included. This luminance correction program corrects the decrease in luminance due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the current date and time, brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the internal RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is used based on the correction information. to correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in a range of 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set. Therefore, when six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the luminance When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of 80% obtained by adding 5% which is the acquired correction information to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, and the effect display device on the game board side is displayed. When lighting the backlight of 1600, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is obtained by adding 10%, which is the acquired correction information, to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 127, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A managed work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc for exclusively storing copies of various information stored in the backup managed work area 1511ca, and a backup area stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Various control program copy area 1511cd for exclusively storing copies of various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and copies of various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. various control data copy areas 1511ce for dedicated storage; backup unmanaged work areas 1511cf for dedicated storage of various types of information updated by execution of various control programs that are not backed up; is provided.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), a value of 0 is forcibly written into the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf to clear it to zero. For the work area 1511ca to be managed, the first backup area 1511cb, and the second backup area 1511cc, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a power-on state command (see FIG. 143) from the main control board 1310 starts the RAM clear effect. and to indicate the game state (for example, to indicate the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 123 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on). Sometimes cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca is performance information (1fr ) as a backup target, and effect information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs, is backed up. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is exclusively stored as an object. Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is the minimum management unit representing the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" provided in an area extending from a backup first area 1511cb to a backup second area 1511 cc, which will be described later, are of the same storage area as "Bank 0". It means that it has a size. "(1fr)" is, as will be described later, when the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a A V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to indicate that it is ready to receive screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Since the peripheral control unit steady process is executed every time, "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" are respectively appended (effect information (1fr) and effect Backup information (1fr) is also used with the same meaning). As will be described later, "(1 ms)" means that the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. and "Bank4" (effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms), which will be described later, are also used in the same sense).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is set, and in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED, lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs, etc. provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 are stored. This is a storage area in which door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting signals is set. In the received command storage area 1511cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area where various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a described later) is set. is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to commands received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are set. In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set

Bank 0 (1 ms) includes frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, presentation operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. Door-side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, which is a storage area to be set, a drive signal for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid that operates various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is stored. This is a storage area in which the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. This is a storage area in which various types of information obtained by acquiring the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies are set. Rotation (direction of rotation) of the dial operation unit 401 and operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, dial created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the production operation unit 400) Rotation (rotation direction) history information of the operation unit 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set, and the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak has an effect display drive board 4450 on its periphery. Drawing data is received from the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the control board 1510, and if the received drawing data is determined to be abnormal data, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 output based on the LOCKN signal described later to notify that fact. This is a storage area in which various kinds of information obtained by acquiring the frequency of troubles and the state of occurrence of troubles between connections with the effect display drive board 4450 are set.

The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in Bank 0 (1 fr), the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf in Bank 0 (1 ms). and the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag are each divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa when the peripheral controller steady-state processing described later is executed. , when the next peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady-state Each time the process is executed, the game board side emission data SL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when game board side emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit steady process, the previous peripheral When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, when the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL is stored in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. -When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame-decoration driving amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. be. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED in this peripheral control unit steady process, When the previous peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the process proceeds based on the door-side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame-decoration driving amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It's becoming

In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later is executed, the door When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. -DAT is set, and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is stored in the first area and the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing was executed. Based on this, the process proceeds.

In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing was executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It's like

Next, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc dedicated to storing copies of performance information, which are various types of information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, two pairs of two banks are managed as one page. Effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Effect information (1 ms), which is copied to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is the normally used storage area. , as effect backup information (1 ms), is sent to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Copied quickly. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks that constitute the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cb, Bank1 (1 fr) and Bank2 (1 fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) are set as one pair, and a total of two pairs are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). Memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. This page is copied to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. This is done depending on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) match.

In the backup second area 1511cc, one pair of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). Memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is done depending on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) match.

Thus, in this embodiment, in the first backup area 1511cb, one pair is Bank1 (1 fr) and Bank2 (1 fr), and one pair is Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms). The backup second area 1511cc is an area for managing pages, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of 2 pairs, with Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, and Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored as performance backup information (1fr) by the peripheral control unit every 1 frame. Each time a routine process is executed, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, and the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is the normally used storage area. is backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed as effect backup information (1ms). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac executes high-speed copying by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in common. In other words, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr) and the performance information (1ms) are managed by a common management method (common program execution).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da for exclusively storing information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs; A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for exclusively storing copies of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. It should be noted that the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, when the pachinko machine 1 power is turned on (including when the power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), the power-on state command from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 143) indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state (for example, when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 123 is operated within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, it instructs the start of the effect. ), it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the first backup area 1511cb, and the second backup area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is designed to be By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of the occurrence of the jackpot game state) etc.), on the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

The backup management target work area 1511da includes performance information (SRAM), which is various information that continues over the course of the day (for example, information for managing the history of the occurrence of a big hit game state and for managing a special performance flag). information, etc.) to be backed up. Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly explained. As described above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit representing the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" provided in an area extending from a first backup area 1511db to a second backup area 1511dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as "Bank 0". It means that it has a size. "(SRAM)" is for backing up various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. , and “Bank 4” (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM), which will be described later, are also used with the same meaning).

Next, a backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc dedicated to storing a copy of performance information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc are managed as one page, with two banks forming one pair. Effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Then, it is copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks that constitute the page match.

Specifically, in the first backup area 1511db, a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame. This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

In the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are paired, and this pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame. This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first backup area 1511db is an area for managing a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one page. 1511dc is an area for managing a pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display control section]
A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and controls sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is shown in FIG. In addition, a sound source for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter referred to as "internal sound source"), and drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 Sound source built-in VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1512a, game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460 In addition to various character data of the screen displayed, various sounds such as music and sound effects A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing data, an audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and a serial to the door frame side effect display device 460. The converted drawing data is directed toward the effect display driving board 4450 which is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is stored in the plate unit 320. Transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side performance for transmission, and differential circuit 1512e that differentiates LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511, into a plus signal and a minus signal. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is transmitted. a forced switching circuit 1512f that is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input. I have. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b stores sprite data used for displaying screens and images, which will be described later, such as ring image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and for displaying an operation menu background image, which will be described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selected display object image data used to display at least one selected display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale to be described later, volume adjustment icon to be described later In addition to volume setting icon image data used for display, body frame back image data used to display the body frame back image that allows the position of each part on the back of the body frame 4 to be visually recognized from the player's point of view, display of the service mode screen Service mode screen image data used for , break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the rest timer setting screen, and during rest screen image data used for displaying the during rest screen are stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestive display object image data used to display a suggestive display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation section 405 (operation section) of the effect operation unit 400. FIG.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to commands from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting from the control data copy area 1511ce and outputting to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a, when a V blank signal (to be described later) is input, the first screen data is extracted according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The following screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. In this manner, the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae every time the V blank signal is input. Then, the screen data are output one by one from the first screen data to the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator.

Also, the peripheral control MPU 1511a copies the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted and set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. After extracting various control data from the control data copy area 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator, when the V blank signal is input, the leading data is extracted according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and receives the V blank signal. Each time, the sound command data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one from the top sound command data.

[7-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-described built-in tone generator, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source controls the game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data as shown in FIG. The side character data and the top dish side character data are extracted to create sprite data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated. A built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "internal VRAM") for The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and outputs the drawing data for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is sent from channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, while the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame periphery. A terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display stored in the plate unit 320 by being arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450 . As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short due to being attached to the game board 5 respectively, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 can The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because the control board 1510 outputs to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 . On the other hand, since the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of wiring required for the path of CH1 is much longer than that of the channel CH1, it is extremely susceptible to noise. For this reason, for channel CH2, in which the wiring for sending drawing data is much longer than channel CH1, THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One ( By adopting a differential communication system called "Registered Trademark", it is a mechanism that is less susceptible to noise.

Channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), whereas channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. is serialized by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 4610d and stored in the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 . The serialized various signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460 .

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs screen data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Based on this input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data for one screen to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460. frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side is output. Image data for the performance display device 460 is sent from the channel CH2 to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and a performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" means that the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is stored in the built-in VRAM. It is the data for generating above.

In addition, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 through the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, it outputs a V blank signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to notify that it is ready to accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a executes peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, in response to the input of this V blank signal. Here, the interval at which the V-blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 . Also, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary slightly in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a are mounted.

Note that the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source adopts a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" is to hold drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). , drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 .

In addition, when the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on the command from the main control board 1310, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source displays the music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the hall clerk of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraudulent action against the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Contains the subvolume value to be used. Specifically, for the effect sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume is adjusted. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a.
The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 and shifting to a later-described setting mode.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is Actually, it is amplified up to the master volume value which is the volume of sound flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, serializes the amplified effect sound, and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value, resulting in the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. is set to be the maximum volume allowed. Specifically, for the sound effect, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used and the sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used By synthesizing the set volume adjustment volume 1510a with the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob, the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the volume actually flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. This amplified effect sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data. The maximum volume is synthesized without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, which is set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be played. The volume of the synthesized notification sound is amplified to a master volume value that is the volume actually flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

Here, when the effect sound is being played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of playing the notification sound for notifying the pachinko hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or of an illegal act with respect to the pachinko machine 1 will be briefly described. To explain, first, the sub-volume value of the track that contains the sound effect is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track that contains this sound effect, the sub-volume value that is set to mute, and the notification sound and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume. Then, it amplifies up to the master volume value which is the volume of sound flowing from the upper speaker 573, serializes the amplified effect sound and notification sound, and outputs them as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In other words, the sound that actually flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is only the notification sound with the maximum volume. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound progresses according to the above-mentioned schedule data for sound generation. In this embodiment, the notification sound is played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). The volume of the effect sound progressing according to the schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value by the substrate volume adjusted by turning the knob of the volume control volume 1510a (at this time, the dial operation of the effect operation unit 400 is performed). When the setting mode is entered by operating the unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 and the adjustment is made, the sub-volume value of the adjusted production sound is set), and the sound is played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has become.

In this way, when the performance sound is played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the notification sound is played to notify the hall clerk or the like of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, the performance Although the volume of the sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the muted effect sound progresses according to the schedule data for sound generation, so that the notification sound does not last for a predetermined period of time. When the sound stops flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound does not start playing again from the point where the information sound started to flow, but progresses according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has passed since the information sound started to flow. It starts to flow again from

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b stores, as shown in FIG. are stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, effect sound, notification sound, notification sound, etc. are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
The audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the VDP 1512a with the built-in sound source, and converts the right audio data into positive and negative signals as differential serial data to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and frame peripheral relay. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and is output to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) as differential serial data in which the left audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. , frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 , and peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 . As a result, music, sound effects, and the like are reproduced in stereo from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 in accordance with various presentations.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as differential serial data between the boards from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame-decorating drive amplifier board 194. For example, the positive signal of the left audio data, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal are combined by the frame-decorating drive amplifier board 194 into one left-side audio data, Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Transmitter IC for door frame side production]
As shown in FIG. 128, the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. Channel CH2 uses a parallel interface as described above. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. , a green video signal, and a blue video signal each consist of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In this embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a.

Three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d transmits three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronizing signal, and a vertical synchronizing signal. and a clock signal, and serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. with only a differential 1-pair cable. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 , the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 , and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 .

As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for (the first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is transferred from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and then the door. Since it is output (sent) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (the first 2 path) is much longer than the wiring length required for the first path, it is very susceptible to noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the body frame 4 shown in FIG. For example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 provided in the door frame 3, on the main body frame 4 side. It is necessary to pass various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closing side of the body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 can guide the game balls. A full-tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding paid-out game balls to the lower tray 322 side when the tank becomes full is arranged.
Further, below the main body frame 4, a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. In this way, various wirings for electrically connecting various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full-tank branch unit 770, the power supply substrate 931, and the like. In addition to the noise caused by the driving of the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise caused by the electrostatic discharge caused by the game balls and the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The environment is subject to noise, etc.

For this reason, for channel CH2, in which the wiring for sending drawing data is much longer than channel CH1, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side presentation provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is provided by Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. By adopting a differential system communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)", the system is less susceptible to noise. In this embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, As described above, a differential 1-pair cable is used as a wiring for electrically connecting between the connections of the transmitter and the receiver. is a twisted pair cable, not just parallel wires. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case in which parallel lines are employed as a differential one-pair cable for electrically connecting the transmitter and the receiver will be briefly described. For the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source that the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is much longer than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, THine Electronics Even if a differential system communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" is adopted by Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise, such a hardware configuration alone will not cause damage due to electrostatic discharge of game balls. When the serial data on the parallel lines is affected by noise, noise intruding into the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the effect display is stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 in the affected state. , the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as being different from normal and disturbed data, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, it appears like a so-called sandstorm. There is a problem that an image is displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what the image is at all.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is used for the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator, which has a much longer wire length for sending the drawing data than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. In the performance transmitter IC 1512d, THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential method communication is adopted to make it less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration Therefore, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that enters the wiring is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1-pair cable. As a result, even if the serial data is affected by the twisted pair cable due to noise caused by electrostatic discharge of game balls, noise intruding into the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC 0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of No. 3, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, the image generated by the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. FIG. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image such as a sandstorm that makes it impossible to recognize what kind of image it is. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play due to the influence of the noise.

In this embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which will be described later, are provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. , that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally constructed, but are separately assembled and attached to the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 4, various wiring such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, maintenance of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be reduced by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 after the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and various wirings are removed. However, if the defect occurring in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3' is attached to the body frame 4 in place of the defective door frame 3, and the door frame 3 is replaced. By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the side of the body frame 4 to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the side of the body frame 4, various boards provided on the side of the body frame 4 and various wirings provided on the side of the door frame 3' can be connected. and the substrate can be electrically connected.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side presentation provided on the peripheral control board 1510 adopts differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to such a hardware configuration, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that enters the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. ) was employed as the differential one-pair cable to electrically connect between the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the substrates between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, between the substrates between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the effect display drive The substrates 4450 and 4450 are electrically connected to each other by twisted pair cables, while power supply wiring and wiring for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, in the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the differential serial data transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, Power supply wiring patterns and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. For this reason, on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the above-described video transmission wiring patterns are formed apart from the power supply wiring patterns and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined distance. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver straddles a plurality of relay terminal boards such as the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, video transmission terminals formed on these multiple relay terminal boards are provided. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal that transmits serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, and the output level of the signal is lowered. occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is applied to the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, between the substrates between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, between the substrates between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and between the substrates of the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 The terminal plate 882 and the production display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, while the power supply wiring and other wiring for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. However, one wire of the twisted pair cable is red and the other wire is gray, and among the harnesses, the wire that supplies power is red and the other multiple wires are gray . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
Signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are sent to the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is designed to be transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 that is housed. LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is supplied to the forced switching circuit 1512f in addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e and input. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into differential serial signals (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is used for the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or for the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state for a customer to perform a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During this period, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which is provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and will be described later. , that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, is transmitted as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460 . The forced switching circuit 1512f, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, connects the circuits so as to transmit these two signals. When the two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the conversion circuit 1512e, the circuit is configured so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It is As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, while in the differential circuit 1512e When the two differential signals of the plus signal and the minus signal are not input, the door frame side effect transmitter is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the start screen on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and performs a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510).

When a serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 serializes various and a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores a signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460.

Door frame side presentation receiver IC SDIC0 receives the drawing data from VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, and if it judges that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it transmits a LOCKN signal (to be described later) to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 to convey that fact. , and output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 . This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 . Peripheral control MPU 1511a controls VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to generate an image for notifying that a predetermined condition is established based on the input LOCKN signal, and outputs the image to game board side effect display device 1600. is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to notify.

Further, when the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, it outputs a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 . As a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input. While it can be determined that there is no problem with the performance display drive board 4450 housed in 320, it is assumed that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is not input. It is determined that the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 has a problem, and a notification image (for example, "There is a problem with the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call the clerk.") is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and a notification sound (for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device ) is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and the notification sound is played from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. As a result, the notification can be made by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 . At this time, all the various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 126, the RTC control unit 4165, which holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, is mainly composed of the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a incorporates a RAM 4165aa (hereinafter referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa") that holds calendar information and time information. The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. In other words, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) without receiving any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and time information by power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. Based on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be unfolded. As such effects, for example, on December 25th, a screen of a Christmas tree and reindeer will be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and on New Year's Eve, a New Year countdown will be displayed. The screen to be executed is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the like. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight. there is The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in a range of 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and brightness adjustment information for the currently set game. The brightness of the LEDs that are the backlights of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are included.

In addition to the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as information on the date and hour, minute, and second first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date and time information is also stored.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs ON/OFF control of the backlight or only ON when the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are of the cold cathode tube type. It is designed to

Various types of information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set on the production line of the game machine manufacturer. In order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600 on the production line, the year when the input date and time information was input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. It is set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the month, day, hour, minute, and second.

Thus, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa contains brightness setting information, input date and time information, etc. when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. , the information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a jackpot game state with a low probability or a high probability) can be stored.

In addition, depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the luminance setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright for the backlight luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the date and time of manufacture. , sometimes too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation part 401 or the pressing operation part 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration by the game board side production display device 1600 is being performed in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 . By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be set as desired. brightness can be adjusted. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LEDs stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that if the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight, the game board side effect This corrects the decrease in brightness that accompanies aging of the display device 1600 . Peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, and uses calendar information and time to specify the year, month, and day. Acquire time information specifying minutes and seconds to specify the current date and time, and adjust the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. Luminance setting information including luminance adjustment information for playing and the luminance of the currently set LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, based on the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on and the current date and time, if six months have already passed since the time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on, Acquire the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is lit, this 75% Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted so that the brightness is 80%, which is the correction information acquired by adding 5%. and lights up, and if 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the acquired correction information of 10% is added to this 75% to obtain 85%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on so as to achieve the brightness.

The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165 aa of the RTC control unit 4165 . Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. and the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 to specify the current date and time.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume control volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc., that are output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob. As described above, the sound volume control volume 1510a is adapted to vary the resistance value by rotating the knob portion thereof, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is connected to the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into values in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, as described above, the values of 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. FIG.

In this manner, music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, and a game effect (For example, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is made more powerful, or the possibility of shifting to an advantageous game state for the player is announced. etc.) also flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob. The volume up to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control section 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 levels described above. As a result, for example, even if a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the effect sounds such as music and sound effects that flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 can be reduced. However, when the pachinko machine 1 has a problem or the player commits a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a large volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be emitted. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's cheating due to the notification sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side production display device 1600 and the door frame side production display device 460 is produced more powerfully by increasing the volume of the sound, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state.

In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 and the By operating the push operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to a setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation part 401 or the pressing operation part 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration by the game board side production display device 1600 is being performed in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 . By operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the presentation operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob of the volume control volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased. there is This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of the production sound such as music and sound effects is incorporated, among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound and notification sound described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation unit 401 or pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is used. and adjusting the volume of music or sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of . Since the volume control volume 1510 a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 , the body frame 4 must always be left open from the outer frame 2 . Then, the person who can rotate the knob of the volume control volume 1510a is the store clerk in the hall. However, with the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, the player may find the music and sound effects to be too soft and difficult to hear, and the player may feel loud and the music and sound effects loud. Therefore, within a predetermined period of time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed in a customer waiting state. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the effect is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the presentation operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. The dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of 400, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

Further, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a non-playing state for a predetermined period of time and the customer waits for customers, the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). , the volume adjusted by the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is set to the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. As a result, when a player who has played a game while seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the adjusted sound volume is too small to hear the music and sound effects, the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. A player who plays a game can operate the dial operation part 401 and the pressing operation part 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired volume, and the player sat in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time and played a game. If the player who has been playing the game feels that the adjusted volume is loud and the music and sound effects are loud, this time, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game can turn the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400. By operating the pressing operation unit 405, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

[8. power supply system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. FIG. FIG. 129 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 130 is a block diagram continuing from FIG. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be described. The grounds (GND) of various substrates and the grounds (GND) of various terminal plates are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power substrate 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power board 931, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

The power board 931 includes a power control section 935 and a firing control section 953, as shown in FIG. The power control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. A section 953 is a circuit for driving and controlling the shooting solenoid 682 of the ball shooting device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

The power control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor improvement circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 through the power supply board 931, and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. This synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies the AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 935b. The power factor correction circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to generate DC +37V (DC+37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V") and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. This smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied +37V ripple, smoothes the +37V, and supplies it to the firing control circuit 953a and the power generating circuit 935d of the firing control section 953, respectively.

Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built into the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. It supplies backup power to the RAM (withdrawal control built-in RAM).

The shooting control circuit 953a of the shooting control unit 953 uses +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a drive power source, and shoots the game ball with a launching strength (launching strength) corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 302. While adjusting the drive current for striking (firing) toward the ball and controlling the output to the firing solenoid 682, the ball of the ball feeding unit 250 is output by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250. A feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320, and controls feeding of the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the shot ball launching device 650 side.

The power source generation circuit 935d supplies from +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c to DC +5V (DC+5V, hereinafter referred to as "+5V"), DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V"), and DC +24V (DC+24V, hereinafter referred to as "+24V") is generated and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, respectively. A power system to which +5V is applied is a +5V power line, a power system to which +12V is applied is a +12V power line, and a power system to which +24V is applied is a +24V power line.

The +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. +5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM through the diode PD0. ing. The +12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. This +5V creation circuit 1310g creates +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from +12V from the payout control board 951. The +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control filter circuit 1310h and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM through the diode MD0. ing.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951, and the payout The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951 is also electrically connected. In other words, the +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, which is forward due to the diode PD0, and the capacitor BC1. The positive terminal is designed to allow current to flow toward it. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is connected to +5V by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is returned to the payout control board 951 and then again from the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when the +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as payout VBB. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a because it is blocked by the diode PD0, the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. , and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 on the main control board 1310 . In other words, the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g causes current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. A current flows in the direction of Thus, the capacitor BC0 is supplied with +5V and charged by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. You can do it. As a result, the +12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the +5V creation circuit 1310g can create +5V. When it is exhausted, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Therefore, a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the main control MPU 1310a does not operate because the current is blocked by MD0, the memory content is retained by supplying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline about the voltage supplied to each control board etc. is demonstrated, Then, the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board are demonstrated.

The three types of voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. Two voltages of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 . The three types of voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V created by the power source creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, They are supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 respectively.

The three voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are applied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180, as shown in FIG. 130(a). 4180a, respectively. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal and a gradation lighting signal to various decoration boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for the board 5 .

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a +3.3V generating circuit 1510b that generates DC 3.3V (DC+3.3V, hereinafter referred to as "+3.3V") from +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. ing. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG. In addition, +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power source 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG.

On the other hand, the three voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 130(b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 has a +9V generating circuit 194a that generates DC +9V (DC+9V, hereinafter referred to as "+9V") from +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. +9V generated by the +9V generating circuit 194a and +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decorative substrates of the door frame 3 and the like.

In addition, +12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper tray side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x generates +3.3V from +12V. The +3.3 V generated by the upper tray liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. and the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage generated by the upper tray side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450 y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460 .

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 129, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 952a and the like. This payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 931, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952, for example. +12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal plate 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal plate 784 is a circuit for outputting a signal that conveys the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc., to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). is. The hall computer monitors the game played by the player by ascertaining the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. from signals output from the external communication circuit 784a. In addition, +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used at all in the payout control board 951 .

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 129, the main control board 1310 includes a +5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, etc., in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. The +5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and creates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. In the main control board 1310, the +5V power line is a power supply system to which +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied. In this embodiment, the +5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Therefore, the +5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the +5V power supply of the main control board 1310 The +5V power supply line created by the creating circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310, either.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V produced by the +5V production circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to the main control MPU 1310a, for example. +12V from the payout control board 951, for example, is supplied to the main control input circuit 1310b and the like, +24V from the payout control board 951, for example, is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these +12V and +24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, it outputs a power failure notice signal as a power failure notice to the main control MPU 1310a. The power failure warning signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a through the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 951. Also, the power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310 . 130(b), the power failure warning signal is input to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. At the same time, they are input to the decoration substrates of the door frames and the like via the frame decoration driving amplifier substrate 194 .

In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltage applied to each of the +12V power line and the +24V power line by monitoring the voltage applied to either the +12V power line or the +24V power line. Signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure can be detected more accurately than when monitoring the voltage applied to the power supply.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit etc. of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133. FIG. 131 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, FIG. 132 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 133 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a diagram. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 129 will be described, followed by the power supply created by the main control board 1310, the main control system reset, the main control crystal oscillator, the main control input circuit, the power failure monitoring circuit, the main control MPU Various input/output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and the interface circuit for communication between the peripheral control boards 1510 will be described.

The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a +5V generation circuit 1310g, and a main In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, peripheral circuits include a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (24 megahertz (MHz )).

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 131, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 has its 1st terminal applied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g, its 2nd terminal connected to the ground (GND), and noise components removed from its 3rd terminal. +5V is output. The +5V applied to the No. 1 terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0, one end of which is grounded (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is first removed. are smoothed.

The +5 V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other ends of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded (GND). , the ripple is further removed and smoothed. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. It should be noted that the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is supplied with the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off. It is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after generation.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC3, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded (GND).

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is connected to the ground (GND). is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of this main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, the +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 through the diode MD0. is intended to be applied to the positive terminal of As a result, as described above, the +12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. When the circuit 1310g cannot generate +5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a Although the main control MPU 1310a does not operate because the current is blocked by the diode MD0, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
The +5 V, whose noise component has been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h, is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, as shown in FIG. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and includes a delay circuit. The delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC5, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacity of this capacitor MC5. It is possible to do so. Specifically, the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the elapse of the delay time when +5 V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (eg, 4.25 V).

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type capacitor, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the other end of which is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. While being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is applied to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Input to the reset pin respectively. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca with is reset. One end of the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC7 grounded to the ground (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Also, the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is electrically unconnected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The +5 V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in FIG. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, this smoothed +5 V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and receives a 24 MHz clock signal. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded (GND), and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically unconnected to the outside. state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b receives detection from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. In addition to the signal, it is a circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) etc. from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 124 is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the power on. It is operated to clear the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, and error cancellation after the power is turned on (after a period of time during which the RAM clear function has passed, that is, after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on). and a function to perform Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error that the payout control board 951 has, when an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954 within a predetermined period from power on, the main control It is judged as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM, and processing for clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed.

The main control board 1310 receives an operation signal whose logic is LOW from the payout control board 951 when the operation switch 954 is not operated. becomes HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed description of this point will be given later).

The transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, as shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 through the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR0 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is transmitted. The line is pulled up to +12V by pull-up resistor MR2. The main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW and is input, while the operation switch 954 is operated. When it is on, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and the logic becomes HI and is input.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954. FIG.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, thereby turning off the transistor MTR0 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. When the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a instructs to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, an operation signal pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, thereby turning on the transistor MTR0 and switching the switch. The circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. I judge.

The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input through the payout control board 951 . That is, between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the control reference voltage is higher than +5V A voltage of +12V is used to improve signal reliability. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor. While pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the vibration detection sensor 4026, the count sensor 4005, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. Since it is not directly input to the main control board 1310, it is pulled up to the +12V side by a pull-up resistor like the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 129, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two voltages of +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 through the payout control board 951, and +12V and +24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, and when a power failure or momentary power failure sign is detected, a power failure warning signal is sent as a power failure warning to the main control MPU 1310a and a payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU 952 a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510 . Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of +24 V power failure or momentary power failure, +12 V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring, and the output of a power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 132, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. +5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495 V is set in this embodiment) that serves as a comparison reference voltage for the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC20, one end of which is grounded (GND). AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded (GND).

The comparator MIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V with the reference voltage Vref, and the other (MIC21B) is used to compare , +12V are used to compare the monitor voltage V2 and the reference voltage Vref. A monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V is applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V is applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the sixth terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 has two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21, one end of which is grounded (GND). , the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is connected to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. +24V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
The +24V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +24V monitor voltage V1 and the reference voltage Vref as described above. As shown in FIG. 132, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is applied, is a resistor MR21 whose one end is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and the other end of the capacitor MC23 grounded to the ground (GND); are electrically connected. The monitoring voltage V1 of +24V applied to the No. 3 terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +24V according to the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC23. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are such that when +24V is interrupted or instantaneously interrupted, the voltage starts to drop from +24V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 21.40V). The monitor voltage V1 of +24 V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref when the voltage is applied.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR23 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC24, one end of which is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal that has been pulled up to the side and has a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is the ground (GND). A signal that has been pulled down to the side and has a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. +12V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
The +12V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitor voltage V2 and the reference voltage Vref as described above. As shown in FIG. 132, the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V is applied, is a resistor MR24 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 and the other end of the capacitor MC25 grounded to the ground (GND); are electrically connected. The monitoring voltage V2 of +12V applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +12V according to the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are such that, when +12V power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the voltage starts to drop from +12V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 10.47V). The monitor voltage V2 of +12V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref when the reference voltage Vref is applied.

The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A. A preset D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of a capacitor MC24 having one end grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a terminal. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter as described above.

When the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal that has been pulled up to the side and has a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +12V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is the ground (GND). A signal that has been pulled down to the side and has a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Power failure warning signal output]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and stores this stored value. (logic) is output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal whose logic is LOW at the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, it releases the latched state and resets the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the same logic as the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal). (a logic signal is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal). On the other hand, when a logic HI signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, the latch state is set. In addition, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set the latch state by inputting a signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, the logic of the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is LOW. is input, the state of outputting a signal with logic HI from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, is maintained (at this time, the signal output from 1Q with the logic inverted is negative logic maintains the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has the D input terminal 1D terminal and the clock input terminal 1CK terminal grounded (GND), respectively. The circuit is configured so that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is stored and is not output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a PR terminal, which is a preset terminal. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors momentary power failure, is input, and based on these signals, a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC22, one end of which is grounded (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. +5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal as the ground terminal is grounded (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a through a main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to a CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal. This power failure clear signal is designed to be started and stopped after a predetermined time has passed in the processing performed by the main control MPU 1310a when power is turned on on the main control side, which will be described later. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function with the logic being LOW. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latched state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. is output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI through the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is adapted to set a latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state in which the logic is LOW to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs to the payout control board 951 as a payout power outage warning signal, and outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal.

The main control input circuit 1310b electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the amplifier MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR26 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via a resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (Non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR27, MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning off the transistor MTR20. , the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR20. The switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes LOW in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 951 as the payout power outage warning signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via a resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the wiring is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via (harness). In addition, when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. 124 in the payout control board 951 In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. connected.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the transistor MTR21 of the preceding stage is a switching circuit of the preceding stage, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33, MR34 and the transistor MTR22 of the succeeding stage is a switching circuit of the latter stage, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22 .

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor in the previous stage is pulled down. MTR21 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR21. The switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, thereby turning on the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power outage warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is issued. It is input to the control board 951 .

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is applied to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21. The input turns ON the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, thereby turning off the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 through the wiring (harness). A payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951 .

In addition, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as the peripheral power failure warning signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. is electrically connected to The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness).
When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control section 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. , one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning off the transistor MTR23. , the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR23. The switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the logic becomes LOW and the signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. is input to the peripheral control board 1510 .

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness). 1510.

In this way, a main control input circuit 1310b that transmits a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a blackout warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs a signal output from a peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal and a main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function each have one transistor. While the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is issued to the payout control board 951. The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs a power failure warning signal has two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage. The logic is the inversion of the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the control board 1510, and is different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal.

The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 1310a through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is connected via wiring (harness) to the payout control board. In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are located between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board, whereas the power failure warning signal logic (ON / OFF signal) using +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a 951 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control MPU 1310a, A power failure warning is performed by the power failure warning signal logic (ON/OFF signal) using +12V, which is a voltage higher than +5V which is the control reference voltage of the payout control MPU 952a and the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

[9-6. Various input/output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 123 as a payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, use the serial data to be transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main payment serial data transmission signal. The main payment serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the circuit 1310cb without reset function from the main control output circuit 1310cb to the payout control board 951, and the serial data to be transmitted from the TXB terminal to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control output circuit 1310 cb without reset function, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310 cb without reset function to the peripheral control board 1510 .

In addition to the above-described operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above A payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 123 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. respectively entered or equal.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main payment ACK signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Then, a main payment ACK signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to the payout control board 951, and a drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function for the starting solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. and output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the starting port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. For the device, a drive signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and a drive signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to various displays, and various information (game information) related to the game is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, and various information (game information) related to the game is output to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, an interface circuit for communication between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise entering the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress this, +12V, which is a higher voltage than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is used for transmission, thereby increasing its reliability.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly consists of a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. It is On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes, as a communication interface circuit, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC built-in). It is composed mainly of

+12 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 through the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. is electrically connected to the positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
As a result, for example, due to a power failure or momentary power failure, when the power from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 +12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 .

In this way, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, the capacitance is 470 μF) shown in FIG. 131 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data can be transferred to the transmission shift register 41aea by the unit 1310aec and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main peripheral serial data.

The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, +12V, which is higher than +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is used for transmission, thereby increasing its reliability.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, +12 V is charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 so that it is applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits it. When transmitted from the shift register 1310aea as main cycle serial data, it is possible to transmit a main cycle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI by +12V from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50.

In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a is 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data of up to 10 packets are stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Also, in this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 on the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). A resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal that outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded (GND).

A circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit. When the logic of the main frequency serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is applied to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main-peripheral serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and also turning on the switch circuit. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+5 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6), which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (4th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal (5th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5V side by AR11 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler AIC10, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is transmitted as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. is input to the input terminal of

As a result, as described above, when the +5 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or momentary power failure, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as +5V. When a power outage or momentary power failure occurs, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the main control MPU 1310a by applying +5V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10. The transmission of the data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae can be completed, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the data without missing or missing data.

When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. While the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50 to turn on the transistor MTR50, thereby turning on the photocoupler AIC10. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. . Thus, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of

Thus, in this embodiment, the +5V power line to which +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a is applied, and the +12V power line to which +12V which is the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50 are applied. , measures are taken when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, the +5V power supply line, the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, even if a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5V power supply line drops, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h which is the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of MC2, it is possible to maintain the state in which the control reference voltage is applied. +12V applied to the +12V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage for the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, so that a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage is applied from the +12V power supply line through the diode MD50. Even if the voltage drops, the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained by applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply. there is As a result, the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from being interrupted, and the command can be prevented from being lost. can do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the command from being missed immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during an instantaneous power failure.

In addition, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all used as main peripheral serial data, and are composed of the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. and 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb are reset so that all of them function as interface circuits as main peripheral serial data. Since transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the non-functioning main control output circuit 1310cb, the peripheral control board 1510 does not interrupt or drop multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. can be received without fail.

[10. Circuit of Payout Control Board]
Next, the circuit etc. of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 124 will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 139. FIG. 134 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the payout control unit, etc., FIG. 135 is a circuit diagram showing the payout control input circuit, FIG. 136 is a circuit diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 135, and FIG. FIG. 138 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit, and FIG. 139 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the circuit of the payout control unit, various input/output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[10-1. Dispensing Control Filter Circuit]
As shown in FIG. 134, the payout control filter circuit 951a is mainly composed of a payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The 1st terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. The +5V from the power supply board 931 is first smoothed by removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5V from which the noise component is removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 has one end grounded (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). By being electrically connected to each other, the +5V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is further smoothed by removing ripples. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal that is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, etc., which will be described later. . It should be noted that the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is supplied with the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off. It is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after it is generated.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded (GND).

Moreover, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a, and one end is the ground (GND) and the capacitor PC4 that is grounded. is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of this payout control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 through the diode PD0. is intended to be applied to the positive terminal of As a result, as described above, when the +5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Since it is supplied to the payout control board 951 as, the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. The memory contents are held by applying the VBB voltage.

[10-2. Circuit of Payout Control Unit]
The payout control unit 952 includes a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, a CR unit input/output circuit 952e, and peripheral circuits as shown in FIG. It mainly consists of a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment). Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, payout control input circuit, payout motor drive circuit, CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the payout control MPU.

[10-2-1. Dispensing control system reset]
+5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, as shown in FIG. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and incorporates a delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the capacitance of this capacitor PC5 sets the delay time of the delay circuit. It is possible to do so. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the elapse of the delay time when +5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (eg, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open-collector output type capacitor, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the other end of which is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of PC6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is greater than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output with reset function While input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is applied to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. Input to the reset pin respectively. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function The attached payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. One end of the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of a capacitor PC7, and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Also, the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is electrically unconnected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispensing Control Crystal Oscillator]
+5V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in FIG. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, this smoothed +5V is also applied to the OE terminal, which is the output enable terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0. The payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0 outputs a clock signal of 8 MHz from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5V to its OE terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives payout power outage notice signals from the door frame open switch 618, the body frame open switch 619, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 124, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, a circuit to which an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954, and the like. . First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input will be explained, followed by the circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame open switch is input, the circuit to which the output power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, A circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input will be described. In addition, the full tank detection sensor 279 and various detection switches such as the ball out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3(a). Circuit where the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input]
The door frame open switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 3 is closed by the body frame 4, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is a pull-up resistor PR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20, one end of which is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC20 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR20 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a door opening signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR21, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door open information output signal.

Further, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and is also connected to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR22 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR20 and a capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed with the body frame 4, It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 repeat ON/OFF for a short period of time.

A circuit composed of resistors PR21, PR22 and transistor PTR20, a circuit composed of resistors PR24, PR25 and transistor PTR21, and a circuit composed of resistors PR26, PR27 and transistor PTR22 are door frame opening switches. It is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a detection signal from 618 .

When the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR20 is turned on. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. be. Further, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal plate 784 . Further, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 through the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310 .

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is off, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20. , the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is raised to +5V, thereby turning the transistor PTR21 ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. FIG. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is raised to +5V, thereby turning the transistor PTR22 ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310 .

In this way, when the door frame 3 is released from the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned ON, so that the door frame open signal whose logic is HI is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The outer end frame door open information output signal which is input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal plate 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed to the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned off, so that the door frame open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. , the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784 , and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310 .

[10-2-3(b). Circuit where the detection signal from the body frame open switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 is of a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The No. 2 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is grounded (GND), while the No. 1 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded (GND). In addition, the first terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR23 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door open information output signal.

The first terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and the wiring (harness) shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 . When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR24, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR28 and a capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generating circuit. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the body frame open switch 619 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts forming the body frame open switch 619 repeat ON/OFF for a short period of time.

A circuit made up of resistors PR29, PR30 and transistor PTR23 and a circuit made up of resistors PR31, PR32 and transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON/OFF by a detection signal from body frame open switch 619. FIG.

When the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR23 is turned on. It is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal plate 784 . In addition, when the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 24 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 through the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310 .

On the other hand, when the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28. , the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side at the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated. It is input to the external terminal board 784 . When the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28. , the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated by the main control board. 1310.

In this way, when the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned ON, and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal plate 784. A main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is turned off to turn off the logic. is input to the external terminal plate 784 , and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310 .

In this embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 123, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 receives the main frame door opening signal. Although it cannot be determined whether the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 based on the door frame 3 and / or It is possible for the player to determine that the body frame 4 is open, which does not occur during a normal game, and that an outer end frame door open information output signal is sent to the external terminal plate 784. Since the outer end frame door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784, the hall computer outputs the door frame door open information output signal based on the outer end frame door open information output signal. 3 is released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 are opened. It can be determined that a state that does not occur during a normal game has occurred.

In this embodiment, as described above, the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 are normally closed switches. Even if the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, and the main body frame open switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conducting), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. By adopting normally closed switches for the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 in this manner, it is possible to output the main frame door open signal to the main control board 1310 even in the event of a short circuit, and A frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 .

If the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 are changed from normally closed switches to normally open (normally open (NO)) switches (door frame open switch 618' and body frame open switch 619'), , the door frame open switch 618' is turned ON (conducting) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and turned OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4. . The body frame open switch 619 ′ is turned on (conducting) when the body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2 and turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 . Then, even if the door frame open switch 618' is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the door frame 3 will be in a state of being released from the body frame 4. Even if the frame release switch 619' is broken and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. FIG. In this way, even if normally open switches are used for the door frame open switch 618' and the body frame open switch 619', the main frame door open signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when the wire is broken. An outer end frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 .

[10-2-3(c). Circuit to which output power failure warning signal from power failure monitoring circuit is input]
A transmission line for transmitting a power outage warning signal from a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 has one end electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR40 electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the other end of the resistor PR40. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR40 via PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR40 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR40 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as the payout power failure warning signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR41, PR42, and transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an output power failure warning signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310. FIG.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of the two voltages of +12 V and +24 V from the power supply board 931, and when the power failure or momentary power failure signs are detected, the reset function is disabled. A payout power failure notice signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power failure notice via the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltages of +12V and +24V for signs of power failure or momentary power failure, and as described above, the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions of the large condition are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure warning signal is input to the payout control board 951, one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf When the condition is established, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the above-mentioned pull-up resistor PR40 through the wiring (harness), so that the logic becomes HI. is input to the payout control board 951 .

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V. Occasionally, since a payout power outage notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby turning off the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +5V side by resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of +12V and/or +24V. When there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951, so that the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 to turn on the transistor PTR40, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power outage notice signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

Thus, when there is a sign of power failure or instantaneous power failure of the voltage of +12V and / or +24V, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of power failure or instantaneous power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, when there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltage of +12V and/or +24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V, the power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, so that the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e The logic of the payout power outage notice signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the power outage notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3(d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. is entered in The output terminal of this full tank detection sensor 279 is circuit-configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control board 951. is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a, and is electrically connected to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. This three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full-tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The 2nd terminal of the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50 is connected to the full tank detection sensor 3 via a resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50, and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full-tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after noise components are removed in the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 whose one end is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. Capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR47 having one end electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR41 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a full tank signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR45, PR46 and transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279. FIG.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the accommodation space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full-tank detection sensor 279 is applied via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931. In the payout control board 951, a signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 951, while the housing space is filled with the stored game balls. , the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes LOW. is input to the payout control board 951 .

When the accommodation space is not filled with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the handle relay terminal plate 315, and through the power supply board 931, to the payout control board 951. A signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and logic HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, thereby turning on the transistor PTR41 and also turning on the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the full tank signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when the accommodation space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full-tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931 via the payout control board. At 951, the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, thereby turning off the transistor PTR41 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR47, and the full tank signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In this embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit composed of the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50. Although it was a circuit configuration, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball out detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. It has a circuit configuration in which it is directly input to each switch circuit without going through. Since the full-tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, compared with the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the payout device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. , the path for transmitting the detection signal is extremely long, and is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with stored game balls. Based on the detection signal from 279, when it is determined that the accommodation space is full of stored game balls, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotator. It is designed to control. In other words, when noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a detects that the game balls in which the accommodation space is stored are not full, but the payout motor 834 In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotating body, and the payout motor 834 is driven even though the accommodation space is full of game balls stored. When the game balls are filled up to the upstream side of the winning ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotor to continue the payout of the game balls, the payout rotor itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834 is abnormally loaded, the payout motor 834 is overloaded and abnormally heats up and breaks down. be. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first filtered by the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC 50 to remove the noise component so that such a problem does not occur. adopted.

[10-2-3(e). Circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input]
The first and second output terminals of the operation switch 954 are grounded (GND), and the third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. The base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and is also electrically connected to the ground (GND) at one end and the other end of the capacitor PC41. ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 via a resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the preceding stage and the subsequent stage, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage changes, and the signal is the RWMCLR signal input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. is entered in

The third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to +5 V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 through a resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the resistor PR55, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR44 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a RAM clear signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR48 and a capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contact forming the operation switch 954 repeats ON/OFF for a short time. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the operation switch 954 caused by .

A circuit composed of resistors PR49, PR50 and transistor PTR42 is a switch circuit in the previous stage, a circuit composed of resistors PR52, PR53 and transistor PTR43 is a switch circuit in the latter stage, and resistors PR55, PR56 and transistor PTR44 are switched. is a switch circuit, which is turned on/off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954 .

As described above, the operation switch 954 is set to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is operated to clear the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, and to cancel errors after the power is turned on (after a period of time during which the RAM clear function has passed, that is, after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on). It has a function and The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. ), it becomes an error cancellation signal.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR48. The voltage is input to the base terminal of PTR42 to turn on the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on. When the voltage applied is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is determined that the error is not instructed, and error cancellation is performed when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on). It is judged that it is not instructive.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is generated by the transistor PTR44. , the transistor PTR44 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. is entered. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives a RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above. is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is raised to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a judges that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it is not an instruction to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW is output to the preceding transistor. The voltage is input to the base terminal of PTR42 to turn off the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off. When the voltage applied is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR51, the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is cleared. It is judged to be an instruction.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is being operated, the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 to turn off the transistor PTR44, thereby turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives a RAM clear signal whose logic is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above. is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, it is an instruction to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 137, the payout motor drive circuit 952d is mainly composed of a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the +12V power line and the +5V power line, respectively, and +12V and +5V are applied, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is connected to the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to a power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is designed to be The power supply output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD60, and is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 834. , and +12 V or +5 V is applied as a motor drive voltage to the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 through the Zener diode PZD 60 based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supplied to the terminal and the tenth terminal, respectively, and also supplied to the payout motor 834 .

The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, 6th terminal and 7th terminal, are grounded (GND) respectively, and the base terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 is grounded. A payout motor drive signal is input to certain 1st, 5th, 8th and 12th terminals via resistors PR60 to PR63. The 2nd, 4th, 9th and 11th terminals that are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are connected to the 1st, 5th, 8th and 12th terminals that are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, respectively. Correspondingly, when the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, the excitation signal A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 834, respectively. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the drive ICPIC60 via the resistors PR60 to PR63. Outputs are made to base terminals 1, 5, 8 and 12, respectively. These drive pulses are generated by switching exciting currents flowing through the phases (/B phase, B phase, A phase, and /A phase) of the payout motor 834 to rotate the payout motor 834 . When the driving pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) is interrupted by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 will be damaged. Therefore, as a protection, the Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the front stage of the 3rd and 10th terminals, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. A circuit configuration that

[10-2-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for inputting/outputting various signals to/from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 125 will be described. The payout control board 951 receives the ball rental request signal BRDY and the one-time payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 as described above. , are supplied, and a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and ground LG created from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Through the terminal plate 869, an EXS signal to inform that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal to inform that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible. and output As shown in FIG. 138, the input/output circuit for inputting/outputting these various signals and the like is mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (which incorporate an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. A cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 . A resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. Sometimes, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of PTR71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR75 having one end electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is a non-inverting buffer. 134 via ICPIC80 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) without inverting it.). is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR70 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is not only electrically connected to the resistor PR72, but also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 931 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via a wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR71 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71, and the signal is input to the power substrate 931 as a CR connection signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR71, PR74, and transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR70 and the switch circuit. It turns ON. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. be.

A circuit composed of resistors PR72, PR76 and transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit. It turns ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply substrate 931 through the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the power supply substrate 931. be.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply substrate 931 through the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply substrate 931. be done.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. A resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. there is The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as the BRDY signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the BRDY signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6. FIG.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. A resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. there is The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is changed by turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC72, and the signal is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a as a BRQ signal.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same logic as the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6. FIG.

An EXS signal that tells that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function. 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. A resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, while the photocoupler PIC73 is ON, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the CR unit 6 through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR83. , is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. The ON/OFF of the photocoupler PIC73 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73, and the signal is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic is LOW becomes the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. The resulting EXS is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 . Thus, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

A PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out rental balls from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is possible or impossible is sent via a resistor PR84 to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74. is entered in The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. A resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, while the photocoupler PIC74 is ON, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a The photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF when the logic of the PRDY signal that is output from the output terminal of through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR86. is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC74, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The resulting PRDY is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 . Thus, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input/output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals input/output from input/output terminals of various input/output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

As shown in FIG. 134, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b as a main payment serial data reception signal. be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 is sent as the payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. A payout serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb.

Each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a is connected to the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, payout power failure warning signal, door open signal, full tank signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection Signal 1, etc.), etc. are input, for example, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310, which informs the completion of normal reception of the above-described payer serial data reception signal, is sent via the payout control input circuit 952b. Also, detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 124 are inputted via the payout control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and the EXS signal and the PRDY signal are output from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, the voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and the voltage switching signal is sent from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Alternatively, the payout motor drive signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the payout motor drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition, for example, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function outputs a payer ACK signal to inform that the main payment serial data reception signal has been normally received, and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function outputs the payout control output circuit 952ca to the payer. Output the ACK signal to the main control board 1310, or output the drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. For example, output to the error LED indicator 860b.

[10-3. Various input/output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input/output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input/output signals with the main control board 1310 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 139(a), the payout control board 951 controls the above-described payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. is output to the main control board 1310 . These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310. FIG.

On the other hand, the payout control board 951 provides, in addition to the above-described main payment serial data reception signal, main payment ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal), a main prize number information output signal, a 15 round big hit information output signal, And 2 rounds jackpot information output signal such as jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, starting entrance winning information output signal etc. A game information signal, a payout blackout warning signal, and the like are input from the main control board 1310 . These input signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 139(b), in addition to the above-described outer end frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls. Main prize number information output signal, main prize number information output signal, 15 round big hit information output signal and 2 round big hit information output signal from main control board 1310 via payout control board 951. Game information signals such as an output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving information output signal, and a start winning prize information output signal are output to the external terminal plate 784. do. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 . In other words, two signals are output to the external terminal plate 784, the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and the prize ball number information output signal, and the main prize ball number from the main control board 1310 side is output. Information output signal, 15-round jackpot information output signal, 2-round jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, information output signal during time saving, and starting entrance winning information Eight signals called output signals are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951 .

A signal output from the external terminal plate 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the games played by the players. When the 15-round big-hit information output signal or the 2-round big-hit information output signal is output to the hall computer as one big-hit information output signal, the hall computer outputs the number of big hits with two rounds (2-round big-hit ) and the number of big wins with 15 rounds (the number of occurrences of 15-round big wins) is the sum of the number of big wins of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2-round big wins and the number of occurrences of 15-land big wins from the total number of big wins. , it is not possible to grasp whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. A data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and some players refer to the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter to select whether or not to play the game. Some do.

However, the number of occurrences of the big win game state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased toward the number of occurrences of the two-round big win, so even if the player starts playing the game, only the two-round big wins occur. Sometimes the 15 round jackpot doesn't happen easily. In this way, the number of occurrences of the big win game state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may unnecessarily stir up the gambling spirit of the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by separately outputting the 15 round big win information output signal and the 2 round big win information output signal to the hall computer as the big win information output signal, the hall computer can output the number of occurrences of the 2 round big win, The number of 15-round big hits and the number of occurrences can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big wins actually occurring in the pachinko machine 1 is the 2-round big win or the 15-round big win, and the data counter stores 15 rounds. Since the number of occurrences of the big win and the number of occurrences of the 2nd round big win can be separately displayed or only the number of occurrences of the 15th round big win can be displayed as the number of occurrences of the big win game state, it is possible to stimulate the gambling spirit of the player more than necessary. Absent.

In the present embodiment, the 2-round big win information output signal is output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence of the 2-round big win to the end of the 2-round big win, and the 15-round big win information output signal is also output when the 15-round big win occurs. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the time it occurs to the time it ends. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round big win information output signal and the 15-round big win information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round big win occurs, the 2-round big win information output signal is output for a predetermined period. The 2-round big win information output signal and the 15-round big win information are output to the hall computer, and when a 15-round big win occurs, the 15-round big win information output signal is outputted to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer only for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of Output Terminals on External Terminal Board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 for outputting various signals to the hall computer installed in the game hall (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. The external terminal plate 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with an external terminal plate cover 786. As shown in FIG. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal plate.

As described above, the external terminal plate 784 outputs the outer end frame door open information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15 round big win information output signal, and the 2 round big win information output signal. When the jackpot information output signal, the probability fluctuation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time saving information output signal, and the start opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, It outputs to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 .

Briefly describing these various signals, the outer end frame door open information output signal is not generated during a normal game when the player says that the door frame 3 and/or the body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 are open. This is a signal that conveys that a state has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is generated each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. The main prize number information output signal is the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001 and 2201, and the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. It is a signal to inform that each time the number of game balls scheduled to be put out as prize balls based on the entered game balls reaches 10 balls, and the 15-round big win information output signal is a 15-round big win. The 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2-round jackpot is occurring, and the information output signal during probability fluctuation is a signal that a probability fluctuation occurs. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the special symbol display information output signal is the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal that informs that the variable display is finished (stopped). It is a signal that tells that it is in a stopped state, the time saving medium information output signal is a signal that tells that a time saving state is occurring, and the start winning prize information output signal is the first start shown in FIG. Each time a game ball enters the port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, it is a signal to notify that effect.

As shown in FIG. 140, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are horizontally arranged in a line on the external terminal plate 784 . The output terminal PT1 is colored white and outputs a prize number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the number of prize balls information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer causes the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 to generate 10 prize balls each time the number of prize balls information output signal is input to the hall computer. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls have been put out as prize balls, and to grasp the total number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of the put out game balls.

The output terminal PT2 is colored green and outputs an outer end frame door open information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door open information output signal indicates that the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and/or the body frame 4 are opened. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer controls the door frame 3 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is being input. / Or it can grasp that the main body frame 4 is opened.

The output terminal PT3 is colored gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal terminates (stops) the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the end (stop) of the special symbol fluctuation display in the first special symbol indicator 1403 and the second special symbol indicator 1405 of the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal PT3 It is designed to be output for 0.128 seconds at times. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal, the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of special symbols has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and count the number of times to display the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The total number of times the special symbols are variably displayed on the symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 can be grasped.

The output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a start winning prize information output signal. As described above, the starting hole winning information output signal is a signal that notifies each time a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 shown in FIG. , Every time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the starting hole winning information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2002 of the pachinko machine 1 each time the starting hole winning information output signal is inputted. It is possible to grasp that the game ball has entered the starting hole 2004, count the number of times the starting hole winning prize information output signal is input, and send to the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls that have entered.

The output terminal PT5 is colored black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. The 15-round jackpot information output signal is, as described above, a signal that indicates that a 15-round jackpot is occurring. It is designed to be output. When the 15-round big win information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer keeps the pachinko machine 1 generating 15-round big wins while the 15-round big win information output signal is being input. The state can be grasped, and the total number of occurrences of the 15-round big win in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the 15-round big win information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2-round jackpot information output signal. The 2-round big win information output signal is, as described above, a signal that indicates that a 2-round big win is occurring. It is designed to be output. When the 2-round big win information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is inputted to the hall computer, the hall computer keeps the 2-round big win in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round big win information output signal is being inputted. The state can be grasped, and the total number of occurrences of the 2-round big win in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the 2-round big-win information output signal is inputted.

The output terminal PT7 is colored blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. The normal symbol display information output signal is, as described above, a signal that informs that the variable display of normal symbols has ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, it is designed to be output from the output terminal PT7 for 0.128 seconds at the end (stop) of the normal symbol fluctuation display on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. FIG. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. In 1402, it is possible to grasp that the variable display of normal symbols has ended (stopped), count the number of times, and display the total number of variable displays of normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The number of times can be grasped.

The output terminal PT8 is colored red and outputs a time saving information output signal. As described above, the information output signal during time saving is a signal that conveys that the time saving state has occurred, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state when the time saving information output signal is input. In addition, it is possible to grasp the total number of times that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state by counting the number of times that the information output signal during time saving is input.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs a probability fluctuation information output signal. As described above, the information output signal during probability fluctuation is a signal that indicates that a probability fluctuation is occurring. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the information output signal during probability fluctuation, and the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the probability fluctuation is occurring. In addition, it is possible to grasp the total number of occurrences of probability fluctuations in the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of times the probability fluctuation information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT10 is colored light blue and outputs a main prize number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal is input to various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal that notifies each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the played game balls reaches 10, and is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds in this embodiment. It has become so. When the main prize number information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the pachinko machine 1 outputs 10 prize balls each time the main prize number information output signal is input to the hall computer. It is possible to grasp that the game balls are scheduled to be put out as prize balls, and to grasp the total number of game balls to be put out by the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of the game balls to be put out. can do. It should be noted that game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on game balls that have entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the big winning opening 2005 When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds x 2 times) seconds, It is designed to be output with an interval of 0.128 seconds as if it were one continuous signal.

Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal plate 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, while the output terminals PT3 to PT10 output the main control board. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged to be output via (pass through) the payout control board 951 . The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are colored, respectively. By electrically connecting wirings having connectors colored in the same colors to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, respectively, it is possible to mistakenly connect other wirings. can be prevented from being connected to each other. Various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are not mixed, and various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer. The output terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal plate 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output from the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are arranged on the external terminal plate 784. By arranging them in a row from the center left side to the right side, in this respect also, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side It is possible to prevent erroneous electrical connection with the wiring for transmitting the signal to the hall computer.

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main winning ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are respectively sent from the external terminal board 784 to the hall. configured to communicate to a computer. This is because, for example, game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment. When the number of game balls is running low, if the pachinko machine 1 happens to hit a 15-round jackpot, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the game balls as prize balls is insufficient, so the game balls are paid out. (For example, if ball clogging or ball entanglement occurs in the payout device 830, game balls cannot be paid out unless this is resolved). Then, as described above, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches ten. Since it is a signal that conveys that every time, when game balls cannot be paid out, the payout control board 951 outputs a winning ball number information output signal and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784. become unable. When the game balls are not paid out, the player calls a hall clerk or the like. A hall clerk or the like checks, for example, a hose-shaped replenishment nozzle or the like for supplying game balls from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720 to identify the position of the clogged ball (or, for example, to Then, by specifying the position of the clogged ball or the position of the jammed ball and resolving it, the game ball will be returned to the state of being paid out.

However, since the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress even when the hall clerk or the like is proceeding with the work, the game balls are paid out by the work of the hall clerk or the like after the jackpot of 15 rounds is completed. When the state is restored, the payout control board 951 will pay out the game balls that have not been paid out one after another, and the payout control board 951 is in a period when the 15 round big win is completed and the 15 round big win is not occurring. Every time the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10, it outputs a prize number information output signal to notify that effect and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784. It will happen. As a result, an extremely large number of game balls are put out even though the 15-round jackpot has not yet occurred. , a problem arises in that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between .

Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 and the prize balls are actually paid out, that is, the payout control board 951 outputs the prize ball number information output signal. As a signal of the main control board 1310, the game ball that entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, a main prize number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect, and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal plate 784 are output. A system was adopted in which the information is transmitted to the hall computer via the system. As a result, even if the above-described troubles (ball clogging in the replenishment nozzle or the like, ball clogging or ball jamming in the payout device 830, etc.) occur, the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout in this game state are prevented. The relationship between the number of game balls to be put out and the relationship can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls to be paid out in the game state.

[12. Circuit of effect display drive board]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and housed in the plate unit 320. A liquid crystal module circuit 450V for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured. FIG. 141 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. Liquid crystal module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 141, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 is mainly composed of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is a serial signal (serial data) by a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. are sent as a plus signal and a minus signal, they are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, and the positive signal and the negative signal are input by the common mode choke coil SDL0. Noise can be separated from negative signals. The noise-separated plus signal and minus signal are input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. This resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator) and prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, thereby preventing disturbance of the serial signal.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 outputs three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, and It restores to three synchronizing signals, a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal (that is, restores to a parallel signal before being serialized). Although the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source are each 8 bits, as described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are , the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V receives serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. Two signals obtained by differentiating certain LOCKN signal output request data into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also inputted. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits two signals that are differentially differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e. On the other hand, when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured so that the circuit is connected so as to As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the two differential signals of the positive signal and the negative signal are not input to the motion circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the transmitter IC 1512d for frame side effect is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. is transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V.

The forced switching circuit 1512f outputs the signal output from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the door-frame From the transmitter IC 1512d for side effects, the serial signal (serial data) by THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential method is used as a positive signal and a negative signal, and from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. 868, and through the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, it is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals differentially converted into a plus signal and a minus signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, these two signals are It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. Door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 judges that it is a LOCKN signal output request when two signals that are differentially differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in differential circuit 1512e are input, A LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 . This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 .

As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is used to produce the startup screen on the game board side when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. During the period during which the display is displayed on the display device 1600, or during the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is being performed, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 is operated. This is sent as an operation confirmation request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, THine Electronics Co., Ltd. The data format is completely different from the company's "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 judges that the signal is not output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and an abnormal event occurs. Assuming that it is data, a LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal, which will be described later. In other words, in this embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, by utilizing the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 to output the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output LOCKN signal output request data whose data format is different from that of the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 sends the LOCKN signal output request data. By outputting it, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called ICSDIC0 for door frame side effect receiver is operating normally. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDSVDD terminal, PLLVDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are each supplied with +3.3 V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND application form, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminals of the frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are each grounded.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal that serves as the ground for this digital circuit, and the +3.3 V power supply is supplied to the VDD terminal. It removes high frequency noise from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal that serves as the ground for this TTL output. It removes high frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line.

The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal that serves as the ground for this LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. It removes high frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line.

The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal that serves as the ground for this PLL circuit, and the power is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power supply line.

When +3.3 V is supplied (applied) to the PDWN terminal, the logic becomes HI, indicating normal operation. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V via a resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of a varistor SDZ0, one end of which is grounded. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltages on the +3.3V electrical line supplied through resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later. (logic transitions from LOW to HI) or falling edge (logic transitions from HI to LOW). As shown, the falling edge is designated by grounding the EDGE terminal. By the way, if the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3V, a rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal instructs whether or not to permit output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals, D0 to D17 terminals, and CLKOUT terminal) to be described later. As described above, by grounding the OE terminal, the output is always enabled. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3V, it will be in a state where it cannot be output.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both of them. Operation modes include a normal mode and a handshake mode. In normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signals) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal are generated based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. and three synchronous signals (3-bit synchronous signals) of a horizontal synchronous signal, a vertical synchronous signal, and a clock signal. be. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is connected. In this mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). This shake hand mode is automatically switched.

For example, three video signals (18-bit video signals) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, For some reason, the parallel signal restored by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is abnormal. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with such data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the damping resistor SDR2, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and controls the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510 . The peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d in order to inform the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the establishment of a predetermined condition based on the input LOCKN signal. to output When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is connected to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side presentation drive board 4450 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Send to receiver IC SDIC0. When such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is received by the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. In addition, the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door A direct electrical connection may be made via the relay terminal plate 882 .

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is a terminal for outputting a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the terminals. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistance SDR2, which is the damping resistor of the performance display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510 .

The SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals output three synchronizing signals, a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. terminal. In this embodiment, since the restored three synchronization signals, ie, the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal, are not used, the SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal output from a CLKOUT terminal and a DE signal for notifying whether data output from terminals D0 to D17, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid. A DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via a resistor SDR3, which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit incorporated in the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4, which is a damping resistor.

The D0 to D17 terminals receive three video signals (18 This is a data output terminal for outputting a 1-bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA1. Red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA2.

The peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to the same ground. It's becoming

[Peripheral control board and motor drive board]
Next, an upper decoration driving board as an example of a modified embodiment in which the lamp driving board 4170 and the motor driving board 4180 shown in FIG. 126 are integrated will be described. FIG. 142 is a block diagram mainly showing the peripheral control board 1510 and the upper decoration drive board 4200. As shown in FIG. Peripheral control board 1510 for effect control and upper decoration drive board 4200 for driving a drive source for driving the effect body (movable body for effect not shown) based on the drive data transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 and are electrically connected by a harness 5102 having connectors CN1 and CN2 at both ends. Five stepping motors 4300a to 4300e as drive sources for driving the movable bodies are drivably connected to the upper decoration drive board 4200 through connectors CN3 to CN7. In the following description, stepping motors 4300a to 4300e are simply referred to as motor a, motor b, motor c, motor d, and motor e.

As shown in FIG. 142, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with peripheral serial data output means 1513 for outputting serial drive data to the upper decoration drive board 4200 through the harness 5102 . In this example, the peripheral serial data output means 1513 includes the peripheral control MPU 1511a (peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, peripheral control serial I/O port 1511ae) shown in FIG. This is composed of the motor and solenoid drive processing in step S1104.

As will be described later, the peripheral serial data output means 1513 provides drive data for the motors a to e to the upper decoration drive board 4200 through the harness 5102, and is used to determine whether the drive data is normally transmitted. It outputs serial drive data including determination information.

The upper decoration drive board 4200 converts the serial drive data transmitted from the peripheral serial data output means 1513 into parallel drive data and fetches them. Driver circuit units 4220 to 4228 are provided for supplying drive currents (excitation currents in this example) to the .

Briefly, a driver circuit unit 4220 is provided for motor a, a driver circuit unit 4222 is provided for motor b, a driver circuit unit 4224 is provided for motor c, and a driver circuit unit 4224 is provided for motor d. A driver circuit section 4226 is provided correspondingly, and a driver circuit section 4228 is provided correspondingly to the motor e. These five driver circuit units 4220 to 4228 are daisy-chained with the driver circuit unit 4220 as the first stage and the driver circuit unit 4228 as the last stage for the serial drive data.

In addition, in the upper decoration drive board 4200, a driver circuit is interlocked with an abnormal state of a harness 5102 for communication connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the upper decoration drive board 4200 or connectors CN1 and CN2 to which the harness 5102 is connected. In order to set the states of the sections 4220 to 4220 to a safe state, a safety circuit 4205 that inputs a predetermined safety signal to the first-stage driver circuit section 4220 and a signal line that propagates serial drive data are supplied with signals for a predetermined period of time. A monitoring circuit 4230 is provided for monitoring whether or not there is a signal, and for simultaneously giving an abnormality detection signal to each of the driver circuit units 4220 to 4228 when there is no signal for a certain period of time. Driver circuit units 4220 to 4228 cut off the drive current to the drive source when receiving the abnormality detection signal.

Furthermore, the upper decoration drive board 4200 sends the peripheral control board 1510 through the harness 5102 instead of the drive data to detect each sensor (not shown) for detecting each origin position of a plurality of drive sources (motors a to e). It has drive serial data output means 4250 for outputting information in addition to the determination information included in the serial drive data output by the peripheral serial data output means 1513 . As shown in FIG. 142, the daisy-chained final stage driver circuit section 4228 is connected for communication with the drive serial data output means 4250 .

[The circuit of the upper decoration drive board]
143 to 147 are circuit diagrams showing circuits arranged on the upper decoration driving board 4200. FIG. As shown in FIG. 142, from the peripheral control board 1510 to the upper decoration drive board 4200, power sources +5V, +12V, +24V for operation and GND as a ground potential are supplied through a harness 5102 and a connector CN2.

In addition, serialized LED lighting data STLED-1, STLED-2, STLED-5, STLED-6, STLED-7, STLED are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the upper decoration drive board 4200 through the harness 5102 and the connector CN2. -8 is transmitted, relayed by the upper decoration drive board 4200 and transmitted to the LED board (not shown).

Further, serialized lamp clock signal PL-SCK2 and lamp drive data PL-TXD2 are transmitted from peripheral control board 1510 to upper decoration drive board 4200 through harness 5102 and connector CN2. to be received.

Further, from the peripheral control board 1510 to the upper decoration drive board 4200, the serialized motor excitation data M-TXD, the motor clock signal M-SCK, and the excitation data as serial data are converted into parallel data through the harness 5102 and the connector CN2. A motor latch signal M-TTRG and a feedback data latch signal M-RTRG for conversion are transmitted and received by the upper decoration drive board 4200. FIG.

Further, judgment information for judging whether the serial signal is normally transmitted from the upper decoration drive board 4200 to the peripheral control board 1510, and origin detection sensors ( The detection information (H, L) of the photo sensor) is serialized into one and transmitted as motor determination information data M-RXD, and the detection information SIN1 of the effect gate switch (not shown) is also transmitted. ing.

In this embodiment, communication (various data and various signals) between the peripheral control board 1510 and the upper decoration drive board 4200 is performed by CMOS (CMOSIC 4210 shown in FIG. 145). Since these signals are electrical signals, a resistor to which a predetermined voltage is applied to one end of the signal line and a ground resistor are connected in the stage before the CMOS IC 4210 (receiving means) for noise resistance, and a current is passed through the signal line. to improve noise immunity.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 143, the signal line of the lamp clock signal PL-SCK2 is connected to the other end of the resistor DR1 to which +5V is applied to one end. The signal line of SCK2 is connected to the other end of a resistor DR3, one end of which is grounded. A series resistor DR5 is connected after the connection point of the resistor DR3 on the signal line of the lamp clock signal PL-SCK2, and a capacitor DC1 having one end grounded is connected after the series resistor DR5, and ripple is removed by the capacitor DC1. and the ramp clock signal PL-SCK2'.

The signal line for the lamp drive data PL-TXD2 is also connected to the other end of the resistor DR2, one end of which is applied with +5V. The other end of DR4 is connected. A series resistor DR6 is connected after the connection point of the resistor DR4 of the signal line of the lamp drive data PL-TXD2, and a capacitor DC2 having one end grounded is connected after the series resistor DR6, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor DC2. and the lamp drive data PL-TXD2'.

As shown in FIG. 144, the signal line of the motor excitation data M-TXD is connected to the other end of a resistor DR7 having +5V applied to one end thereof, and the signal line of the motor excitation data M-TXD is connected to the signal line of the motor excitation data M-TXD at one end. is connected to the other end of a resistor DR11 grounded. A series resistor DR15 is connected after the connection point of the resistor DR11 of the signal line of the motor excitation data M-TXD, and a capacitor DC3 having one end grounded is connected after the series resistor DR15, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor DC3. and the motor excitation data M-TXD'.

The signal line of the motor clock signal M-SCK is connected to the other end of a resistor DR8, one end of which is applied with +5V. The other end is connected. A series resistor DR16 is connected after the connection point of the resistor DR12 on the signal line of the motor clock signal M-SCK, and a capacitor DC4 having one end grounded is connected after the series resistor DR16, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor DC4. and the motor clock signal M-SCK'.

The signal line for the motor latch signal M-TTRG is connected to the other end of a resistor DR9, one end of which is applied with +5V. The other end is connected. A series resistor DR17 is connected after the connecting point of the resistor DR13 on the signal line of the motor latch signal M-TTRG, and a capacitor DC5 having one end grounded is connected after the series resistor DR17, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor DC5. and the motor latch signal M-TTRG'.

The signal line of the feedback data latch signal M-RTRG is connected to the other end of a resistor DR10, one end of which is applied with +5V, and the signal line of the feedback data latch signal M-RTRG is connected to a resistor whose one end is grounded. The other end of DR14 is connected. A series resistor DR18 is connected after the connection point of the resistor DR14 on the signal line of the feedback data latch signal M-RTRG, and a capacitor DC6 having one end grounded is connected after the series resistor DR18. The removed feedback data latch signal M-RTRG'.

A signal line for the lamp clock signal PL-SCK2, a signal line for the lamp drive data PL-TXD, a signal line for the motor excitation data M-TXD, a signal line for the motor clock signal M-SCK, a signal line for the motor latch signal M-TTRG and The signal line of the feedback data latch signal M-RTRG becomes logic HI when there is a signal output or data transmission from the peripheral control board 1510 .

A signal line for the lamp clock signal PL-SCK2, a signal line for the lamp drive data PL-TXD, a signal line for the motor excitation data M-TXD, a signal line for the motor clock signal M-SCK, and a signal line for the motor latch signal M-TTRG. line and the signal line of the feedback data latch signal M-RTRG are logic LOW when there is no signal output or data transmission from the peripheral control board 1510 .

The peripheral control board 1510 transmits these data to the upper decoration drive board 4200 at predetermined intervals (for example, every 1 ms).

[CMOSIC4210]
As shown in FIG. 145, the CMOS IC 4210 is a Schmitt trigger buffer, and includes a power supply terminal Vcc, input terminals A1 to A8, output terminals Y1 to Y8 corresponding to the input terminals A1 to A8, a ground terminal GND, a selection terminal CONT, and a control terminal. /G.

An operating voltage of +5V is supplied to the power supply terminal Vcc, the ground terminal GND is grounded, and the control terminal /G is also grounded to enable operation. Also, +5V (H) is applied to the selection terminal CONT, which is set to the buffer type. The CMOS IC 4210 has two thresholds for the input signals input to the input terminals A1 to A8. is 1.35V.

The input terminals A1 to A8 of the CMOS IC 4210 output a logic H (active signal) potential from the output terminals Y1 to Y8 when the potential of the input signal exceeds a high threshold value, and conversely, when the potential of the input signal is low. When the voltage falls below the threshold value, a logic L (negative signal) potential is output from the output terminals Y1 to Y8. The previous output potential is held when the input signal is between the low threshold and the high threshold.

As shown in FIG. 145, the input terminal A1 of the CMOS IC 4210 receives the motor excitation data M-TXD', the input terminal A2 receives the motor clock signal M-SCK', and the input terminal A3 receives the motor latch signal M. -TTRG' is input, and the feedback data latch signal M-RTRG' is input to the input terminal A4.

The input terminal A5 of the CMOS IC 4210 receives the lamp clock signal PL-SCK2', the input terminal A6 receives the lamp driving data PL-TXD2', and the input terminal A7 receives the output gate switch (not shown). Detection information SIN1 is input, and the input terminal A8 receives detection information (H, L) from origin detection sensors (photosensors) for detecting the origin positions of the motors 4300a to 4300e and determination information described later. , serialized transmission data SEN-SER is input.

A series resistor DR19 is connected to the output terminal Y5 of the CMOS IC 4210 to provide the lamp clock output signal PL SCK2 OUT, and a series resistor DR20 is connected to the output terminal Y6 to provide the lamp drive output data PL TXD2 OUT. It is sent to the lamp substrate (not shown).

Further, the detection information SIN1 of the effect gate switch output from the output terminal Y7 of the CMOS IC 4210 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 through the harness 5102 from the connector CN2 (see FIG. 143) through a serial resistor (not shown). Furthermore, from the output terminal Y8 of the CMOS IC 4210, the detection information (H, L) of the origin detection sensors (photosensors) for detecting the origin positions of the motors 4300a to 4300e and the judgment information described later are serialized into one. It is output as transmission data M-RXD and transmitted to peripheral control board 1510 through harness 5102 from connector CN2 (see FIG. 143) via series resistors (not shown).

[Disconnection of Harness Signal Line and Safety Circuit 4205]
If the signal line of the harness 5102 related to the lamp or motor is broken, no signal is input. In this case, if the potential of the input signal input to the input terminals A1 to A6 of the CMOS IC 4210 is an intermediate potential between the high threshold value and the low threshold value, the output may become unstable because the previous potential is maintained. Yes, it may cause malfunction.

The safety circuit 4205 shown in FIG. 142 is interlocked with the abnormal state of the harness 5102 or the connector CN2 to which the harness 5102 is connected, and is connected in a daisy chain so that the driver circuit units 4220 to 4228 are in a safe state. A predetermined safety signal is input to the driver circuit section 4220 of the first stage.

Specifically, the safety circuit 4205 supplies an active signal indicating that the logic is active to the driver circuit section 4220 when a signal is placed on the signal line, and the logic is active to the driver circuit section 4220 when no signal is placed on the signal line. It consists of a signal setting circuit that is set to give a negative signal that is not.

In this embodiment, as an example of a signal setting circuit, logic H is applied to the driver circuit section 4220 when a signal is applied to the signal line, and logic L is applied to the driver circuit section 4220 when no signal is applied to the signal line. A set resistance circuit is adopted.

In this embodiment, in order to avoid malfunction due to the potential of the input signal input to the input terminals A1 to A6, as a specific example, the resistors DR1 and DR2 (FIG. 143) and DR7 to DR10 (FIG. 144) are used. is 4.7 kΩ, and the resistance values of resistors DR3, DR4 (FIG. 143) and DR11 to DR14 (FIG. 144) are 1.3 kΩ. That is, the ratio of the resistance values (sometimes referred to as a multiplier) is set so that the input to the driver IC in the subsequent stage becomes logic L (negative signal).

By the way, when the signal line of the harness 5102 is disconnected, the input voltage of this embodiment is calculated as (1.3 kΩ/4.7 kΩ+1.3 kΩ)×5V=1.08V, which is the low potential threshold of the CMOSIC4210. The potential is lower than 1.35V. Therefore, the output of the CMOS IC 4210 is logic L, and the input logic to the driver IC in the subsequent stage is L (negative signal). Therefore, malfunction can be reduced.

[Output related to motor from CMOSIC4210]
The output terminal Y1 of the CMOS IC 4210 outputs the motor excitation data M_TXD, the output terminal Y2 outputs the motor clock signal M_SCK, and the output terminal Y3 outputs the motor latch signal M_TTRG.

Motor excitation data M TXD, motor clock signal M SCK, and motor latch signal MTTRG are shown in FIGS. 4220, 4222, 4224, 4226, 4228 as shown. A feedback data latch signal M_RTRG is output from the output terminal Y4, and the feedback data latch signal M_RTRG is input to the parallel/serial IC 4250 shown in FIG.

[Circuit operation monitoring function]
If signals from the peripheral control board 1510 are not normally transmitted to the driver ICs 4220, 4222, 4224, 4226, and 4228 due to disconnection of the harness 5102 or breakage of the CMOS IC 4210, a problem arises in which current continues to flow through the drive source. there is a risk of

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 145, a monitoring circuit 4230 is provided to monitor whether the circuit is operating normally. The monitoring circuit 4230 includes a resistor DR21 (eg, 10 kΩ in this example) to which +5 V is applied to one end, and a capacitor DC7 (in this example, , for example, 10 μF) and an IC4232.

The IC4232 is a monostaple multivibrator having a CMOS inside, and has a power supply terminal Vcc, a ground terminal GND, an input terminal 1/A, an input terminal 1B, an input terminal /1CLR, a potential input terminal 1RX/CX, It has a gate terminal 1CX and an output terminal 1/Q.

An operating power supply of +5 V is supplied to the power terminal Vcc of the IC4232, and the ground terminal GND is grounded. +5V is applied to the input terminal /1CLR and held at H level. The input terminal 1/A is grounded and maintained at L level. The gate terminal 1CX is grounded, the potential input terminal 1RX/CX is connected to the connection point between the resistor DR21 and the capacitor DC7, and a potential that varies depending on the time constant of the RC series circuit is applied between the gate terminal 1CX and the potential input terminal 1RX/CX. .

The input terminal 1B is connected in the middle of the signal line of the motor clock signal M SCK output from the output terminal Y2 of the CMOS IC 4210, and the motor clock signal M SCK (for example, the rise cycle is 986 ns) is input. there is A resistor DR22 having one end grounded is connected to the signal line from the output terminal 1/Q, and the driver ICs 4220 to 4220 of FIGS. 4228 nEBL terminals.

When the motor clock signal MSCK input to the input terminal 1B of the IC4232 rises, the IC4232 is triggered, the discharge of the capacitor DC7 is started, and the potential of the potential input terminals 1RX/CX is increased. When the voltage drops to the internal low level reference voltage, the capacitor DC7 is charged with a time constant determined by the resistor DR21 and the capacitor DC7, and the potential of the potential input terminal 1RX/CX starts to rise.

On the other hand, the output of output terminal 1/Q becomes HI level when a trigger is given. When the potential of the potential input terminal 1RX/CX reaches the internal high level reference voltage, the output of the output terminal 1/Q returns to LOW level.

On the other hand, if the waveform of the motor clock signal M SCK does not change for a predetermined period of time (100 ms in this example, for example) due to disconnection of the harness 5102 or breakage of the CMOS IC 4210, the logic of the input terminal 1B of the IC 4232 is changed. The IC4232 remains stuck to L, and the trigger is not accepted by the IC4232. Therefore, the output of the output terminal 1/Q of IC4232 remains at the LOW level. That is, the logic L enable signal MOT ENA (abnormality detection signal) is output, and the abnormality detection signal is input to each nEBL terminal of the driver ICs 4220-4228. Then, in the driver ICs 4220 to 4228, the gates of the internal drive circuit portions are closed, and the drive currents (excitation currents) flowing through the terminals OUT1 to OUT4 are cut off internally.

As a result, for example, it is possible to solve the problem that the current continues to flow through the drive source. In addition, it is possible to prevent smoke and fire from continuing to flow through the drive source.

In the above-described embodiment, the input terminal 1B is connected in the middle of the signal line of the motor clock signal M SCK output from the output terminal Y2 of the CMOS IC 4210, and the motor clock signal M SCK (for example, the rise cycle is 986 ns) is input. However, the motor clock signal M_SCK may not be used. Alternatively, the input terminal 1B is connected to the motor excitation data M_TXD (an example of serial drive data) output from the output terminal Y1 of the CMOS IC 4210. ), and the motor excitation data M TXD (for example, the data transmission cycle is every 1 ms) may be input.

[Driver IC and parallel/serial IC]
In this example, the driver circuit units 4220 to 4228 shown in FIG. 142 are specifically configured, and as shown in FIGS. It has driver ICs 4220 to 4228 for driving. Driver ICs 4220 to 4228 have the same configuration and have a shift register function and a drive circuit function. Therefore, the drive IC 4220 will be described here as a representative example, and the description of the driver ICs 4222 to 4228 will be omitted.

The drive IC 4220 includes a clock terminal SCLK, an excitation data input terminal SDATIN, a latch terminal LATCH, an enable terminal nEBL, an excitation data output terminal SDATOUT, a reset terminal RESET, a ground terminal GND, a power supply terminal VM, a VCLAMP terminal, excitation coil connection terminals OUT1 and OUT2. , OUT3 and OUT4.

The clock terminal SCLK of the drive IC 4220 receives the motor clock signal MSCK output from the output terminal Y2 of the CMOS IC 4210 . The excitation data input terminal SDATIN receives serialized motor excitation data M_TXD output from the output terminal Y1 of the CMOS IC 4210 bit by bit. A motor latch signal MTTRG output from the output terminal Y3 of the CMOS IC 4210 is input to the latch terminal LATCH.

The enable terminal nEBL of the drive IC 4220 is connected to the output terminal 1/Q of the IC 4232 of the monitor circuit 4230. When the enable signal MOT ENA (abnormality detection signal) is output from the output terminal 1/Q, each of the driver ICs 4220 to 4228 The signal is input to the nEBL terminal, the gates of the drive circuits inside the driver ICs 4220 to 4228 are closed, and the exciting currents flowing through the terminals OUT1 to OUT4 are cut off internally.

The excitation data output terminal SDATOUT of the drive IC 4220 is connected to the excitation data input terminal SDATIN of the drive IC 4222 in the next stage, and the serialized motor excitation data M_TXD is shifted bit by bit and output.

A reset terminal RESET and a ground terminal GND of the drive IC 4220 are grounded, and a power terminal VM of the drive IC 4220 is supplied with +24V motor power. The VCLAMP terminal of the drive IC 4220 is connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD2, and the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD2 and the +24V supply line are connected via the fuse FUSE. A +24V power source for the motor a (stepping motor 4300a) is supplied from the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD2.

The excitation coil connection terminal OUT1 of the drive IC 4220 is connected to the A phase coil of the motor a, the excitation coil connection terminal OUT2 is connected to the B phase coil of the motor b, and the excitation coil connection terminal OUT3 is connected to the /A phase coil of the motor b. The exciting coil connection terminal OUT4 is connected to the /B phase coil of the motor b, and switches the exciting current for each phase (A, B, /A, /B) of the motor a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 147, the excitation data output terminal SDATOUT of the drive IC 4228 in the fifth stage is connected to the input terminal A of the parallel/serial IC 4250 in the subsequent stage, and the serialized motor excitation data M TXD is transmitted bit by bit. Shifted and output.

FIG. 148(A) is a table showing the excitation data of the stepping motors 4300a to 4300e, and FIG. 148(B) is a timing chart of the excitation data serially transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the upper decoration drive board 4200. 148(C) is a table showing the order of the excitation phases of the stepping motors 4300a to 4300e.

In this example, for one stepping motor 4300, the excitation data consists of 4 bits of A phase, B phase, /A phase, and /B phase. becomes a bit. The excitation data consists of 8 bits D0 to D7, and the last 4 bits, that is, H-4 to H-1 of V-3, determine whether the serial signal is normally transmitted. determination information is stored. In this example, the serially transmitted excitation data is 24 bits including the determination information.

The serial data transmission order is (V-3, H-1), (V-3, H-2), (V-3, H-3), (V-3, H-4), (V-3 , H-5), ..., (V-1, H-5), (V-1, H-6), (V-1, H-7), (V-1, H-8) and Become. In this way, the excitation data are transmitted from each motor in the order of /B phase, /A phase, B phase, and A phase.

As shown in FIG. 148B, peripheral control board 1510 on the transmitting side transmits 1-bit data at the fall of clock signal SCK4. On the receiving side, the upper decoration drive board 4200, the clock signal is described as a motor clock signal M-SCK (FIG. 143). 1-bit data (M-TXD) is definitely received at the rising edge of the motor clock signal M-SCK. Then, after the specified time has elapsed after the transmission of the final data, it is determined by the latch signal (T-TRG4). On the upper decoration driving board 4200 on the receiving side, the latch signal is indicated as M-TTRG (FIG. 143).

Transmission of drive data from the peripheral control board 1510 to the motor drive board (top decoration drive board 4200) will be described later, but the peripheral control MPU 1511a in FIG. This is executed in the motor and solenoid processing of step S1104 in the control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

As shown in FIG. 148(C), when the stepping motor 4300 is to be rotated forward, the phases A and B are excited (step 1), then the phases A and /B are excited (step 2), Next, /A phase and /B phase are excited (step 3), then B phase and /A phase are excited (step 4), and returning to step 1, A phase and B phase are excited. Repeat the cycle (two-phase excitation).

When the stepping motor 4300 is to be rotated in reverse, the steps are the reverse of those for forward rotation. ), then excite phases A and /B (step 2), excite phases A and B (step 1), and then return to step 4 to excite phases B and /A; This cycle is repeated (two-phase excitation).

Returning to FIGS. 146 and 147, the driver ICs 4220 to 4228 and the parallel/serial IC 4250 are connected in a daisy chain connection, that is, in a daisy chain with the driver IC 4220 at the foremost stage and the driver IC 4228 at the last stage. An excitation data output terminal (daisy chain connection terminal) SDATOUT of the driver IC 4228 is connected to an input terminal A of a parallel/serial IC 4250k which will be described later.

The driver ICs 4220 to 4228 take in the motor excitation data M TXD serially output from the CMOS IC 4210 bit by bit. That is, when the motor clock signal M SCK falls, the motor excitation data M TXD is shifted one bit later, and when the motor clock signal M SCK rises, the motor excitation data M TXD is determined by one bit.

In this way, when the motor clock signal M_SCK falls and rises 24 times, the serially output motor excitation data M_TXD is serially output by daisy-chain connection for the excitation data shown in FIG. As a result of the shifting by increments, the excitation data (4 bits) of the A-phase, B-phase, /A-phase, and /B-phase of the motor a are determined in parallel in the driver IC 4220 .

In the driver IC 4222, the excitation data (4 bits) of the A-phase, B-phase, /A-phase, and /B-phase of the motor b are determined in parallel. In the driver IC 4224, the excitation data (4 bits) of the A phase, B phase, /A phase, and /B phase of the motor c are determined in parallel. In the driver IC 4226, the excitation data (4 bits) of the A phase, B phase, /A phase, and /B phase of the motor d are determined in parallel.

In the driver IC 4228, the excitation data (4 bits) of the A phase, B phase, /A phase, and /B phase of the motor e are determined in parallel. Further, determination information (1 bit) is inputted four times to the input terminal A of the parallel/serial IC 4250 and overwritten.

The determination information is fed back to the peripheral control board 1510 via the parallel/serial IC 4250. FIG. As will be described later, the determination information fed back by the peripheral control board 1510 is determined, and whether or not the serial communication is normally performed on the serial signal transmission path is checked.

Then, when the latch signal M TTRG from the CMOS IC 4210 is input, that is, when the latch signal M TTRG changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the driver ICs 4220 to 4228 use the parallel determined excitation data as excitation signals, Output to the drive circuit section respectively.

The drive circuit section performs switching of excitation currents for each phase coil (A phase, B phase, /A phase, /B phase) of the stepping motors 4300a to 4300e shown in FIG. 142 based on the excitation signal. The exciting current flows from the ground terminal GND to ground through one of the connection terminals OUT1 to OUT4 of the drive IC4300.

[Damage reduction of driver IC]
By the way, at present, game machines are equipped with many driving accessories, and in the driver ICs 4220 to 4228 connected in a daisy chain, if the upstream driver IC is damaged, the downstream driver IC will be damaged. I have a problem that I can't control. When the motor is driven at a temperature higher than the specified temperature, the motor is driven while a phenomenon (short mode) in which the resistance value of the coil of the motor decreases occurs. For example, if the resistance value of the motor is 50Ω, it drops to about 5Ω in the short mode. Since the power supply voltage (for example, +24V) applied to the motor does not change, there is a problem that a large current flows due to the reduced resistance.

If a large current flows into a driver IC connected in a daisy chain and the driver IC is damaged, the driver IC connected in the subsequent stage cannot be controlled, so other motors than the motor corresponding to the damaged driver IC cannot be controlled. become. This may cause deterioration of performance and secondary failure.

In FIG. 146, a large current flows from the +24V supply line through the power supply terminal VM and from the VCLMP terminal through the Zener diode ZD. Therefore, by providing one fuse FUSE for each of the five driver ICs 4220 to 4228, when the motor is damaged in the short mode, the fuse FUSE blows before the driver IC is damaged due to overcurrent. set. This can reduce damage to the driver IC.

[Parallel/Serial IC]
As shown in FIG. 147, a parallel/serial IC 4250 is constructed as a specific example of the drive serial output means 4250 shown in FIG. It has an S/L, a clock terminal CK, a CKINH terminal, a power supply terminal Vcc, a serial output terminal QH, and a ground terminal GND.

+5 V is supplied to the power terminal Vcc, and the ground terminal GND is grounded. Since the serial input terminal SI, the parallel input terminal H, and the CKINH terminal are not used, they are grounded and fixed at L level. A motor clock MSCK output from the output terminal Y2 of the CMOS IC 4210 is input to the clock terminal CK. A feedback data latch signal M_RTRG output from the output terminal Y4 of the CMOS IC 4210 is input to the shift/load terminal S/L.

The parallel input terminal A is connected to the excitation data output terminal (daisy chain connection terminal) SDATOUT of the fifth stage (final stage) driver IC 4228 . Signals from origin position detection sensors of motors a to e and detection signals from claw sensors (not shown) are input to parallel input terminals BG. The serial output terminal QH is connected to the input terminal A8 of the CMOSIC4210 in FIG.

When the feedback data latch signal MRTRG input to the shift/load terminal S/L falls from the HI level to the LOW level, the logic from the parallel input terminal G to the parallel input terminal A is sequentially converted into serial data and output. Output as serial data SEN SER from terminal QH.

FIG. 149A is a diagram showing the serial data reception order in table form, and FIG.

Triggered by the fall of feedback data latch signal MRTRG, data M-RXD is read at the rise of clock signal MSCK after a predetermined period of time, and data M-RXD is shifted by 1 bit at the fall of clock signal MSCK.

As shown in FIG. 149(A), the data M-RXD received by the peripheral control board 1510 includes motor e-sensor information (bit 0), claw sensor information (bit 1), motor d-sensor information (bit 2). ), motor c sensor information (bit 3), motor b sensor information (bit 4), motor a sensor information (bit 5), determination information (bit 6), and invalid data (bit 7). These received information correspond to the information input to the G terminal to A terminal of the parallel/serial IC4250.

Acquisition of information data transmitted from the motor drive board (upper decoration drive board 4200) to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described later. is executed in the movable object information acquisition process of step S1106 in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process.

Peripheral control board 1510 needs to judge whether or not serial communication is normally performed on the serial signal transmission line by judging the judgment information fed back. Here, if a dedicated wiring for sending the determination information from the upper decoration driving board 4200 to the peripheral control board 1510 is provided, there arises a problem that the wiring increases accordingly. Since the detection information is combined with the judgment information and transmitted as serial data, it is possible to check whether the serial communication is normally performed on the serial signal transmission path, and at the same time, without increasing wiring. can be kept to a minimum.

The clock signal used for data reception is denoted as M SCK, which is the same clock signal as the clock signal SCK4 (FIG. 148) used for transmitting transmission data to the upper decoration drive board 4200 that it owns. , and there is no need to have a separate clock signal. Although the 1-bit determination information is not specified, it may be either HI level or LOW level. You may make it alternate.

[Upper decoration drive board 4200 of this embodiment]
If the signal line of the harness 5102 related to the lamp or motor is broken, no signal is input. In this case, the potentials of the input signals input to the input terminals A1 to A6 of the CMOSIC 4210 are the resistance values of the resistors DR1, DR2 (FIG. 143) and DR7 to DR10 (FIG. 144) and the resistance values of the resistors DR3 and DR4 (FIG. 143). ) and the resistance values of DR11 to DR14 (FIG. 144) are set so that the signals input to the input terminals A1 to A6 of the CMOSIC4210 are at logic L. As a result, the outputs of the output terminals Y1 to Y6 corresponding to the input terminals A1 to A6 of the CMOSIC 4210 become logic low.

Therefore, the logic of the signals input to the clock signal input terminal SCLK, the serial excitation data input terminal SDATIN, and the latch terminal LATCH of the driver ICs 4220 to 4228 in the subsequent stage sticks to L. That is, the operation of driver ICs 4220-4228 is stopped. Therefore, no exciting current flows through the stepping motors 4300a to 4300e.

The monitoring circuit 4230 monitors the motor clock signal M SCK output from the output terminal Y2 of the CMOS IC 4210, and the waveform of the motor clock signal M SCK is maintained for a predetermined period of time (in this example, for example, 100ms) If there is no change, the IC4232 will not accept the trigger. Therefore, the output of the output terminal 1/Q remains at the LOW level. That is, the enable signal MOT ENA (abnormality detection signal) is output, and the abnormality detection signal is input to each nEBL terminal of the driver ICs 4220-4228. Then, in the driver ICs 4220 to 4228, the gates of the internal drive circuit portions are closed, and the drive currents (excitation currents) flowing through the terminals OUT1 to OUT4 are cut off internally. Therefore, the excitation current does not continue to flow through the stepping motors 4300a to 4300e.

In addition, by providing one fuse FUSE for each of the five driver ICs 4220 to 4228, if the motor is damaged in the short mode, the fuse FUSE will blow before the driver IC is damaged due to overcurrent. is set. Therefore, damage to the driver IC can be reduced.

In FIG. 146, it is assumed that the fuse FUSE provided for the driver IC 4220 is cut by heat due to a large current flowing through it. Since the fuse FUSE is set to blow before the driver IC 4220 is damaged by overcurrent, the driver IC 4220 can operate normally without being damaged.

On the other hand, blowing the fuse FUSE means that the stepping motor a driven by the driver IC 4220 is out of order. That is, the coil of the stepping motor a cannot be energized, and the motor a does not operate due to the de-energized state. However, since the protected driver IC 4220 operates normally, it does not interfere with the operation of the subsequent drive ICs 4222 to 4228 connected in a daisy chain.

In this way, in this embodiment, by providing one fuse FUSE for each of the five driver ICs 4220 to 4228, even if the motor is damaged in the short mode, one of the motors fails and becomes inoperable. Even then, the five driver ICs 4220 to 4228 can operate normally. Therefore, the other motors can operate normally.

Judgment information is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the upper decoration driving board 4200, and the upper decoration driving board 4200 combines the judgment information with the origin detection information of each motor and feeds it back as serial data. It is possible to check whether serial communication is normally performed on the serial signal transmission line on the substrate 1510, and to minimize wiring without increasing wiring.

When the signal line of the feedback data latch signal M-RTRG of the harness 5102 is disconnected, the feedback data latch signal M-RTRG which remains at logic L is input to the shift/load terminal S/L of the parallel/serial IC4250. be. In this case, since the feedback data latch signal MRTRG does not become HI level, the parallel/serial IC 4250 does not perform a shift operation and does not transmit serial data. Since the determination information is not fed back to the peripheral control board 1510 as serial data, the peripheral control board 1510 can determine that the serial communication is abnormal in the serial signal transmission path. In this case, as an abnormality notification, for example, each LED in the door frame top unit 570 shown in FIG. ”).

In this embodiment, the motor clock signal M-SCK is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the upper decoration driving board 4200, and the upper decoration driving board 4200 uses the motor clock signal M-SCK to receive the serial drive data. However, it is not limited to this, and a clock signal generating means such as a clock circuit is separately provided in the upper decoration drive board 4200 to generate a clock signal, and the clock signal is not transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the upper decoration drive board 4200. It may be configured to transmit and receive serial data using each other's clock signals.

In addition, the wiring patterns for the output terminals of the driver ICs 4220 to 4228 have a pattern width of, for example, 1.3 mm for the OUT1 to OUT4 terminals, and a wiring pattern for the VM and VCLAMP terminals, in order to enhance the heat dissipation effect. The wiring pattern width to the fuse FUSE connecting between them is assumed to be 2.5 mm, for example. In this manner, the wiring pattern width between the power supply and the fuse FUSE is made wider than the wiring pattern width for the output terminal. Thereby, the heat dissipation effect can be improved.

[Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 123 will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 to 154. FIG. FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. 153 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing.

As shown in FIG. 126, the peripheral control board 1510 comprises a peripheral control section 1511 and a liquid crystal display control section 1512. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control section 1511 will be described. First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing. . In this embodiment, as the priority of interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

[Various control processing of the peripheral controller]
[Peripheral controller power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 126 performs a power-on processing of the peripheral control unit as shown in FIG. When this peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the performance control program performs initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, the hot start/cold start determination process, the process of setting the wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing this peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is in a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, the command related to the control of the game presentation output from the main control board 1310 and the pachinko machine It is in a state where it can receive various commands such as commands related to state 1.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ) are compared, and effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms), is compared, and Bank3 (1 fr) and Bank4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511cc are compared. The performance backup information (1 fr), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1 ms), and the performance backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 4 (1 ms), are compared, and the contents of the comparison are compared. 127, the performance backup information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) for Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. While performing a hot start by copying back the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1 ms), to Bank0 (1 ms), when the compared contents do not match (i.e. , mismatch), a value of 0 is forcibly written into each of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, to perform a cold start.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. (SRAM), and the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the second backup area 1511dc.

When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is stored in Bank0 (SRAM) which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. ) is copied back to perform a hot start, and when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value is stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Write 0 forcibly to make a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 is forcibly written with a value of 0 to be zero cleared. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 127 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 126 to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get caught.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. is set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG.

In addition, in the current time information acquisition process, the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and sets the brightness of the LEDs included in the acquired brightness setting information to the brightness of the game board. Processing for adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 and lighting it is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in a range from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, It includes the set brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 .

Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is set to 75%. is lit, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Lights up by adjusting the brightness. In the brightness setting processing of the liquid crystal display device, correction similar to the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the use time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting processing of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. After performing the current time information acquisition process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. are set to the value 0 when not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted is input from the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. A value of 1 is set in the partial V blank signal interrupt process. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. there is

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is value 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not.

By repeating such determinations, a standby state is established until the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. After determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get caught.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S1009). The steady-processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is started, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed by starting this 1 ms interrupt timer is counted. 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs continuous DMA serial transmission to the lamp driving board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, serial I/O port continuous transmission for the lamp drive board is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When this lamp drive board serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the data shown in FIG. Game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is created by a lamp data creation process to be described later. is set by default.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address is sent to the lamp drive board serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK to transmit 1 byte of the transmission shift register. data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

Every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board occurs, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board The 1-byte data written is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is transmitted, byte by byte, via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai, By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board, the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and In synchronism with the board-side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, transmission of 1-byte data in the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board.

In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Here too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. In 1511cab, door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 is generated by the lamp data generation process described later. is set by default.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the top address of 1511cab is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial signal via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the I/O port. As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Start transmitting 1-byte data bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac receives a transmission interrupt request for the frame-decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port (in this embodiment, the frame-decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port). 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED is transferred 1 byte at a time to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. , and by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port via the peripheral bus 1511ai, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port receives this written data. The data in the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, transmission of 1 byte data in the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port.

Following step S1012, the production control program performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this production operation unit monitoring process, in the production operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation button 410 etc. is operated based on the detection signal from the various detection switches provided in the production operation unit 400. Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. determine as appropriate whether or not to reflect

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator from channels CH1 and 2 shown in FIG. It outputs to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 . As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 . In the display data output process, if the drawing exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is sent to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. The output to the display device 460 is canceled.

As a result, it is possible to prevent delays in the processing time, but so-called dropped frames may occur. Various effects from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. It is a mechanism that allows you to prioritize synchronization with the production of combined music and sound effects.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation process described later as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds are output as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. When serialized audio data is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the audio data transmission IC 1512c converts the right audio data into differential serial data with a positive signal and a negative signal, and sends the data to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame-decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with positive and negative signals. As a result, not only music and effect sounds matching various effects are stereo-reproduced from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but also notification sounds and notification sounds are stereo-reproduced.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the performance control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series that constitute the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of screen data from the first screen data is stored in the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series that constitute the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of light emission data from the head light emission data is changed to light emission of various LEDs. Update the pointer to indicate which mode to use.

In the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of the notification sound and notification sound, which are arranged in time series and constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated to indicate what order of the sound command data from the top sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

In the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the first drive data is The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output.

The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, are repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt, which will be described later. It is updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing, which is repeatedly executed each time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is executed. Update the pointer to the data and update the pointer each time you do your own work.

In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be instructed, the scheduler updating process is forcibly instructed to the drive data that should be originally instructed.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the effect control program, the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, various Various commands received in the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing (command receiving means), which will be described later, are analyzed (command analyzing means).

Based on the information transmitted from the performance display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the performance control program generates screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound. The schedule data for generation, the electric drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. do.

In addition, the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, starting mouth winning command for instructing the start of the starting mouth winning effect, the number of normal symbols pending Normal pattern storage command for determining (0 to 4 pieces), pattern synchronization production start command for instructing the start of pattern synchronization production, pattern storage command output when the number of starting reservations changes, large winning opening 2005 A large winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command) output each time a game ball is accepted, or a frame state 1 command (second error generation command, It analyzes (command analysis means) whether it is a full tank error generation command or not, and recognizes which game state it is at present.

In addition, in this effect control program, after a predetermined time has passed since the power is turned on, the command received by this peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is a main body frame open command, a main body frame close command, a door frame open command or a door frame Analyze whether it is a close command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. , The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac.

Various commands include various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronization effect, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power on, normal Various commands categorized as related to drawing synchronization effects, various commands categorized as normal electric role effects related, various commands categorized as notification display, above-mentioned door frame open command, door frame close command, body frame open command and main body Frame closing command, error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to the second error cancellation command), frame state 1 command (equivalent to the second error generation command), etc. There are various commands classified into various commands and others.

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, furthermore, when the commands analyzed by the received command analysis process in step S1022 as described above include various commands classified as notification display, the effect control program executes various abnormality notifications. The schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for emission mode generation, the schedule data for sound generation, the electric drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormal display mode for the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral It extracts from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and sets them to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In addition, in the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality notification is automatically changed to the remaining abnormality notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is designed to Thus, a plurality of abnormalities can be monitored simultaneously without losing information that one abnormality has occurred due to the occurrence of another abnormality after the occurrence of one abnormality and before the abnormality is resolved. can be done.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the above-described received command analysis process (step S1022) is classified into various commands that are classified into status displays, such as In the case of the error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal presentation mode associated with the presentation operation, for example, the game board side presentation display device 1600 ( Effect device), the door frame side effect display device 460 (effect device), and the lamp (effect device) are used to visually warn the outside, and a speaker is used to audibly warn the outside (error notification means). By doing so, when a malicious player tries to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 in spite of being in the game state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, it is possible to prevent cheating on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program is stored in the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information updating process, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the time information storage unit, are updated, and based on the updated time information, the year, month, and month, which are the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit. date is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer is designated among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. At the same time, the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 stores the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3. Alternatively, it is created by extracting it from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, the screen data indicated by the pointer are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and displays the effect display device on the game board side. 1600 and the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 are generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound instruction data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source to generate the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated in accordance with the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set in accordance with the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob 1510a is converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the values in 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume. Each is set so that the volume increases toward the volume 6. - 特許庁Control the built-in VDP 1512a of the sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 so that the sound volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and transmit the audio data as the audio data obtained by serializing the sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC 1512 c, music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 .

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 steps described above. For example, even if a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low volume, the effect sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 become small. However, when there is a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or when the player commits a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent behavior due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is made more powerful by increasing the volume of the sound, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up every frame in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, reception command storage area 1511cac, RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and Effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is used as effect backup information (1fr). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the second backup area 1511cc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the first backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the head address of Bank1 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) increments, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa performs a peripheral control DMA controller. 1511ac specifies to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank2 (1fr) in the first backup area 1511cb, and copies the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (1fr) to Bank0 (1fr ) up to the end address of Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb in sequence from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, ) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are successively stored by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously transferred to Bank4 ( 1fr) are copied in order from the first address.

In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is backed up every frame in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. Effect information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is transferred to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of backup first area 1511db as effect backup information (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed. , and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in the first backup area 1511db, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the head address of Bank 1 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). 1511ac specifies to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank2 (SRAM) in the first backup area 1511db, and copies the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank0 (SRAM ) up to the end address of Bank2 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db in sequence from the start address of Bank2 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, ) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously backed up by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the second area 1511dc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously transferred to Bank4 of the backup second area 1511dc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). SRAM) are copied in order from the first address.

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clearing process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG as the execution completion of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is initialized by setting a value of 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until a value of 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the system waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006. Thus, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing".

This peripheral control unit steady processing, effect control program, first step S1009 peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed and starts from setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG, 1 ms in step S1010 , and step S1036, and finally, in step S1038, the normal processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0 as execution completion of the peripheral controller normal processing. is set to complete. The peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal is input from the built-in tone generator VDP 1512a to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which blank signals are input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 126, the V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. A description will be given of the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is executed with the .

When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 151 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when the processing is completed.

If the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral controller steady-state processing is being executed, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), Exit this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when no part-stationary processing is executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. In some cases, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1050. When the signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, it is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Since the peripheral controller steady-state processing is forcibly canceled halfway and the execution of the peripheral controller steady-state processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, in step S1009 in the peripheral controller power-on processing (peripheral controller steady-state processing) of FIG. By setting the value 1 to the in-process flag SP-FLG, the fact that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. By setting the value 0 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the processing at the time of turning on (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the completion of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is indicated by the peripheral control unit V blank which is this routine. By notifying the signal interrupt processing, it is determined in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. It is determined whether or not it is completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the peripheral controller steady-state processing cannot be completed until the next V-blank signal is input after the V-blank signal is input, which is a so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing, if the processing cannot be completed within about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral controller steady-state processing that has failed is approximately 66.6 ms. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is normally executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activating a 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is the current peripheral control unit steady process that failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed 64 times. is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral controller steady-state processing fails, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the presentation.

[Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady-state processing of the peripheral controller power-on processing of FIG. 150 will be described. .

When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine after the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which blank signals are input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed at intervals of about 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. is executed, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, . will occur.

If the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100, that is, if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine ends. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the priority of the interrupt processing is given to the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled.

In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, , the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is incremented by 1 (step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Of the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c are transmitted. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the production operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series. The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. It is set in the amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf.

Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transmits data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the top address of the storage area 1511caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the transmission buffer register of the motor serial I/O port. As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. starts transmitting 1-byte data bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac receives a transmission interrupt request for the frame-decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port (in this embodiment, the frame-decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is transferred 1 byte at a time to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller. 1511ad and via the peripheral bus 1511ai to the transmission buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port for writing, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port receives this write data. transfer the data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, start transmitting the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and frame decoration drive amplifier board Continuous transmission is performed by the motor serial I/O port.

Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 (including the upper decoration drive board 4200 described above) is performed. Here too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board. When the motor drive board serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, first, the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c are configured. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT (including TXD4 in FIG. 148) for outputting the drive signal to the solenoid and the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c 127, and sets it in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG.

Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and sets the start address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first byte of the stored game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is sent to the motor drive board serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the buffer register. As a result, the serial I/O port for the motor drive board transfers the data written in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and outputs the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK (described as clock signal SCK4 in FIG. 148). ), the transmission of 1-byte data in the transmission shift register is started bit by bit.

Every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board occurs, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board The 1-byte data written is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag are transferred byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. , by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board, the serial I/O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, Synchronizing with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK (shown as clock signal SCK4 in FIG. 148), 1 byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and the serial I/O port for the motor drive board Continuous transmission is performed by

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable object information acquisition process, history information (for example, shown in FIG. 143) of detection signals from various detection switches is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. M-RXD, that is, motor original position history information, movable position history information, judgment information, etc.) is created, and the movable body information acquisition of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Set in storage area 1511cah. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, it is possible to acquire the original positions and movable positions of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5, judgment information, and the like.

Following step S1106, effect operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this production operation unit information acquisition process, history information (for example, operation Operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Whether or not the operation button 410 is operated can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the production operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, the history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is set in the control MPU 1511a and the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When a determination is made, it is a signal that is output to notify that effect. , that is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The door frame side effect display device acquires the frequency of failure and the failure occurrence state between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 from the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak. 460 drawing state can be obtained.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is executed each time a 1ms interrupt timer occurs in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Each time, Bank0 (1 ms) to be backed up includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, and a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah. , and effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, is stored in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb as effect backup information (1 ms). The control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (1 ms) in the first backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms). The contents up to the stored contents are copied in sequence from the head address of Bank1 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) increments, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa executes the peripheral control DMA controller. 1511ac specifies to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) to Bank2 (1 ms) in the first backup area 1511cb, and copies the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (1 ms) to Bank0 (1 ms). ) up to the end address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb in sequence from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank3 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, ) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are continuously stored in units of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1ms) are continuously transferred to Bank4 of the backup second area 1511cc (1 1ms) are copied in order from the first address.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed within a period of 1ms as the progress of the effects. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. are doing. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, Therefore, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt will cause the peripheral control unit After forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is prevented from collapsing. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the production.

Also, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary slightly even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510 . In this embodiment, the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, this It is possible to absorb the time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[Peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 start to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 1-byte (8-bit) information is loaded into the reception buffer by the substrate serial I/O port, and when this loading is completed, an interrupt is generated and the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing is performed. One packet of the main-circumference serial data consists of 3 bytes. The 1st byte is the status, the 2nd byte is the mode, and the 3rd byte is the status and mode. is assigned a sum value calculated from

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 153 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received, the peripheral The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port for the main control board built into the control MPU 1511a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (incremented, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the main circumference serial data is read out from the reception buffer. When it is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. An initial value of 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, are sequentially sent from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

When the value of the reception counter SRXC is not 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the third byte of the main circumference serial data. is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. A 1-byte reception period timer is set in step S1208, thereby setting a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, when the value of the reception counter SRXC is 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the 3 of the main circumference serial data. When the sum value of the byte is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value ) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main-circumference serial data among the main-circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they generate static electricity and generate noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by the noise. in a sanding environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated using the main control board 1310, and does this calculated sum value match the sum value assigned as the 3rd byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310? is determining whether or not As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data between the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 has been affected by noise and changed to non-normal main peripheral serial data. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main-circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. (step S1216) and terminate this routine. This received command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumferential serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumferential serial data are Stored in the 1511cac peripheral controller receive ring buffer. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Remember. It should be noted that the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the status assigned as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the status assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data when storing in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. is stored in association with the mode assigned, and the sum value assigned as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period for receiving 1-byte (8-bit) information out of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 has been exceeded. Alternatively, in step S1214, when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is executed as it is. finish.

[Peripheral controller power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 129, a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. Interrupt processing will be described. When this peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this judgment, the routine ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have passed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1320 has passed 2 microseconds. If two macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the routine returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If the signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have passed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine.

If the power failure warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started in step S1304, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is extinguished, the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 is turned off, various LEDs are extinguished, and so on. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, a period of at least 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the commands being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the received command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ) stores the received command.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In this command backup process, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

The high-speed copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. Copy the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb. Then, a predetermined byte (for example, , 1 byte) in sequence from the top address of the received command storage area contained in Bank1 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb. copy the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and store in Bank0 (1fr) From the contents stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is continuous. are copied in order from the first address of the received command storage area contained in Bank2 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa stores the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and includes it in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. specified to be copied to the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), and stored from the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). 1511cc of the backup second area 1511cc in sequence from the head address of the received command storage area contained in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and then copy all of the received command storage area sequentially by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and then the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa transfers the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Copying is specified, and the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is specified. Bytes (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied from the start address of the received command storage area contained in Bank 4 (1fr) of the second backup area 1511cc.

After step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input (step S1312). When the power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clearing process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 127 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 126 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset. .

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. In other words, it is endlessly determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By endlessly continuing determination in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. is not output, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 150 is started again.

As described above, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clearing process is executed in step S1314 to perform the peripheral control immediately before the power failure state. The MPU 1511a is designed not to be reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the WDT clear processing is not executed. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral controller power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated for a period of 2 microseconds or more, and the judgment in step S1302 is passed, step If it is determined in S1312 that the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset because the WDT clearing process of step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting.

[Judgment of judgment information]
Next, determination of determination information executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a (see FIG. 127, hereinafter simply referred to as peripheral control MPU) will be described. As described above, acquisition of information data transmitted from the motor drive board (upper decoration drive board 4200) to the peripheral control board 1510 is executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a at every predetermined cycle (for example, every 1 ms). It is executed in the movable body information acquisition process of step S1106 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process of 152 .

In this embodiment, the determination information fed back by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is determined to check whether serial communication is normally performed on the serial signal transmission line.

As described above, detection signals RO-SEN to ME-SEN (FIG. 147) from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 ), determination information included in the motor excitation data M-TXD serially transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the upper decoration drive board 4200 [see FIG. (See FIG. 147) is serialized by the parallel/serial IC 4250 provided on the upper decoration drive board 4200 and output as serial data SEN SER (see FIG. 147).

The serial data SEN SER is input to the CMOSIC 4210, output from the CMOSIC 4210 as motor determination information data M-RXD (see FIG. 145), and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 via the connector CN2, harness 5102 and connector CN1. (See Figures 143 and 142).

This serialized motor determination information data M-RXD is sent to one of peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae (see FIG. 127) inside the peripheral control MPU via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). It is input to a serial I/O port for a certain motor drive board. The peripheral control MPU exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the upper decoration drive board 4200 by switching the input/output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board. When acquiring the motor determination information data M-RXD, the peripheral control MPU switches the motor drive board serial I/O port to input.

[Determination information determination process]
FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of determination information determination processing executed by the peripheral control MPU as one of the movable body information acquisition processing (see FIG. 152) in step S1106. The determination information determination process is performed according to the reception timing chart of the serial data transmitted from the upper decoration drive board 4200 to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 149(B).

When starting the determination information determination process, the peripheral control MPU first outputs a latch signal RTRG (indicated as M-RTRG in FIG. 143) (step A200). The latch signal RTRG is output from the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag (see FIG. 127). Further, the latch signal RTRG is input to the shift/load terminal S/L of the parallel/serial IC 4250 as the feedback data latch signal M RTRG in the upper decorative drive board 4200, and the parallel/serial IC 4250 receives the feedback data latch signal M RTRG. When it falls from the HI level to the LOW level, it outputs the serial data SEN SER. When the serial data SEN SER is input, the CMOS IC 4210 outputs it as serial motor determination information data M-RXD.

The contents of the motor determination information data M-RXD are as shown in FIGS. 149(A) and 149(B) described above. After outputting the latch signal RTRG, the peripheral control MPU acquires the motor determination information data M-RXD bit by bit into the reception register (the register built into the peripheral control MPU) (step A202). It should be noted that acquisition of the determination information data M-RXD is performed at the rising edge of the clock signal MSCK. Also, the contents of the motor determination information data M-RXD are acquired in bits 0 to 6 of the reception register.

Next, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the determination information is OK (step A204). The determination information is obtained in bit 6 of the receive register as shown in FIG. Also, when the determination information is transmitted as a HI level signal (transmitted in the motor and solenoid driving process of step S1104 in FIG. 152), if the value of bit 6 of the reception register is "1", it is determined as OK, If the value of bit 6 is "0", it is not OK, that is, it is determined as NG.

It should be noted that whether or not the determination information in step A204 is OK may be determined as follows. That is, if the value of bit 6 is "1" a plurality of times in a row, it is determined to be OK. may

The determination information determination process is executed by the peripheral control MPU every 1 ms (1 ms timer interrupt process). Further, in the preceding step S1104, determination information is transmitted every 1 ms. From this, for example, if the value of bit 6 of the receive register is "1" three times in succession, it is determined to be OK. You may make it judge.

In step A204, when it is determined that the determination information is OK, the process proceeds to step A206, the abnormality notification flag is set to "0 (normal)" (step A206), the determination information determination process is exited, and the movable body information Return to the acquisition processing routine. In this case, each detection information of the origin detection sensor for detecting the origin position of each motor a to e sent together with the judgment information as serial transmission data (judgment information data M-RXD) must be highly reliable. It will also be

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A204 that the determination information is NG, the process proceeds to step A208, sets the abnormality notification flag to "1 (abnormal)" (step A208), exits the determination information determination process, and is ready for operation. Return to the body information acquisition processing routine. In this case, each detection information of the origin detection sensor for detecting the origin position of each motor a to e sent together with the judgment information as serial transmission data (judgment information data M-RXD) has low reliability. It will also be

If it is determined as NG, the failure of the CMOS IC 4210, the disconnection of the communication line (harness 5102) that transmits signals between the peripheral control board 1510 and the upper decoration drive board 4200, and the transfer data on the communication line due to the influence of noise. It is undeniable that there is a possibility that the data (identification information) is garbled, the connector CN1 or CN2 of the communication line is about to be disconnected (half-connected) or is disconnected, or the driver ICs 4220 to 4228 are out of order. Therefore, an abnormality is notified.

When the abnormality notification flag is set to "1 (abnormal)", it is determined that the abnormality notification flag is set to "1 (abnormal)" in the lamp data creation process in step S1028 of FIG. 1 and door frame top unit 570 in FIG. 87, LED lighting data is created for lighting each LED (see FIGS. 88 to 90) in a predetermined manner (for example, 60 seconds).

Also, in the sound data creation process in step S1032 in FIG. 150, it is determined that the abnormality notification flag is set to "1 (abnormal)", and the upper speaker 573 (see FIG. 88) outputs voice (for example, "transmission line There is an abnormality in the device."), the sound data is created for notification.

Then, the LED lighting data created in this manner is output to various decorative substrates on the door frame 3 side in the lamp data output process of step S1012 in FIG. lights up in a predetermined manner (for example, 60 seconds). Further, the sound data created in this manner is finally transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 in the sound data output process of step S1018 in FIG. (For example, "There is an abnormality in the transmission line.").

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine formed by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same effects can be obtained.

1 pachinko machine 2 outer frame 3 door frame 4 body frame 5 game board 5a game area 6 CR unit 10 upper frame member 11 engagement notch 12 mounting step 20 lower frame member 21 engagement notch 22 front end notch 30 left frame Member 31 recessed portion 32 projecting portion 40 right frame member 41 recessed portion 42 projecting portion 50 panel member 51 rear extension portion 52 left discharge hole 53 right discharge hole 54 vertical wall portion 55 return portion 56 left mounting portion 57 right mounting portion 60 outer frame side Upper hinge member 61 Upper fixed part 62 Forward extension part 63 Bearing groove 64 Lateral fixed part 65 Drooping part 66 Lock member 66a Lock body 66b Operation part 66c Elastic part 66d Mounting hole 67 Mounting screw 70 Outer frame side lower hinge member 71 Horizontal part 72 rising portion 73 outer frame lower hinge pin 74 discharge hole
80 Curtain plate reinforcing member 81 Left sliding member 82 Right sliding member 85 Connecting member 85A Upper left connecting member 85B Upper right connecting member 85C Lower left connecting member 85D Lower right connecting member 86 Horizontal fixing portion 87 Upper horizontal fixing portion 88 Lower horizontal fixing portion 89 Bent portion 90 upper hooking member 91 lower hooking member 95 guide vane 96 guide vane 100 door frame base unit 110 door frame base 111 through hole 112 handle mounting seat surface 113 cylinder mounting portion 114 cylinder insertion hole 115 ball feeding opening 116 passage opening for lower tray 117 upper tray passage opening 118 glass unit mounting portion 119 speaker insertion opening 130 reinforcement unit 131 upper reinforcing sheet metal 132 middle reinforcing sheet metal 132a notch 133 left reinforcing sheet metal 134 right reinforcing sheet metal 135 lock engaging portion 140 door frame side upper hinge member 141 Door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141a Protruding piece 142 Door frame upper hinge pin 143 Flange member 144 Lock spring 150 Door frame side lower hinge member 151 Door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151a Extension piece 152 Door frame lower hinge pin 160 Door frame left side decorative substrate 161 Door frame left side upper decorative board 161a LED
162 door frame left side lower decorative board 162a LED
170 Glass unit mounting member 171 Base 172 Protruding portion 180 Handle mounting member 181 Cylindrical portion 182 Flange portion 183 Projection 184 Reinforcement rib 190 Glass unit 191 Glass frame 191a Mounting piece 191b Locking piece 192 Glass plate 194 Frame-decorated driving amplifier board 194a +9V Creation circuit 200 Security cover 201 Main body 202 Rear projecting piece 203 Locking piece 210 Opening and closing cylinder unit 211 Cylinder lock 211a Keyhole 212 Rotation transmitting member 212a Notch 213 Cylinder mounting plate 213a Front plate 213b Side plate 213c Mounting plate 250 Ball feeding Unit 251 Front cover 251a Entrance port 251b Ball outlet 251c Slit 252 Rear cover 252a Hit ball supply port 252b Mounting recess 253 Ball removal member 253a Partition 253b Rotating rod 253c Actuating rod 253d Weight 254 Ball feeding member 254a Blocking portion 254b Ball Holding portion 254c Rod portion 255 Ball feed solenoid 256 Ball feed operating rod 257 Ball feed crank 257a Engagement portion 257b Shaft portion 257c Transmission portion 260 Anti-fraud member 261 Upper piece portion 262 Lower piece portion 263 Inclined portion 270 Foul cover unit 271 Unit main body 272 Lid member 273 Penetrating ball passage 274 Full ball socket 275 Foul ball socket 276 Ball outlet 277 Storage passage 278 Movable piece 279 Full tank detection sensor 280 Spring 281 Door opening/closing contact part 300 Handle unit 301 Handle base 301a Base 301b Front end 301c Groove 302 Handle 302a First projection 302b Second projection 302c Third projection 302d Fourth projection 302e Slit 302f Locking projection 303 Handle cover 303a Mounting boss 304 Inner base 305 Shaft member 305a Drive gear 306 Transmission gear 307 Handle Rotation detection sensor 307a Detection shaft 308 Handle return spring 309 Auxiliary spring 310 Handle touch sensor 311 Single-shot button 312 Single-shot button operation sensor 315 Handle relay terminal plate 320 Plate unit 321 Upper plate 321a Guidance passage 321b Ground metal fitting 322 Lower plate 322a Lower plate Ball removal hole (lower plate discharge port)
322b escape portion 322c ball guidance portion (guidance means)
322d buffer (guidance means)
322e return part (guidance means)
323 plate unit base 323a upper plate ball supply port 323b speaker slit 323c lower plate ball supply port (lower plate supply port)
323d Upper plate ball feed port 323e Ball feed guideway 323f Ball extraction guideway 323g Opening 323h Handle insertion port 323i Cylinder insertion port 324 Upper plate main body 325 Lower plate main body 325A Main body portion 325B First extension portion 325C Second extension portion 325a Bottom Wall portion 325b Main body vertical wall portion 326 Dish unit cover (coating portion)
326a Production operation unit mounting portion (coating portion)
326b Dish front upper decorative portion 326c Dish front lower decorative portion 326d Lower plate opening 326e Lower speaker port 326f Handle insertion port 326g Cylinder insertion port 326h Top plate portion 326i Bottom plate portion 326j Mounting space 327 Upper plate ball release button (discharge operation portion)
327a Operation transmission part 327b Ball removal slider 327c Top plate ball removal spring 328 Ball rental button 329 Return button 330 Ball rental/return display unit 331 Effect selection left button 332 Effect selection right button 333 Lower plate ball removal button 334 Lid member 335 Lower plate ball Pull-out base 335a Discharge port 340 Lower plate cover 340a Cover standing wall portion 340b Ceiling portion 365 Degree display plate 365a Ball lending switch 365b Return switch 365d CR unit lamp A1 Lower plate first area A2 Lower plate second area PL Parting line 400 Production operation unit (Covering part)
400A second effect operation unit (coating part)
410 operation button (operation receiving part)
411 button lens 411a first button decorative portion 411b second button decorative portion 412 button frame 412a frame opening 413 button base 413a body portion 413b flange portion 413c guide boss portion 413d detection piece 413e base opening portion 415 frame unit 416 frame body 416a center Opening 416b Peripheral opening 416c Notch 416d Inner cylindrical portion 416e Mounting portion 417 Frame side lens 418 Frame top lens 420 Substrate unit 421 Substrate base 422 Operation button left external decoration substrate 422a First LED
422b Second LED
423 operation button right external decoration board 423a first LED
423b Second LED
424 Vibration motor 424a Weight 425 Motor cover 430 Base unit 431 Unit base 431a Through hole 431b Holding hole 431c Light shielding wall 432 Operation button internal decorative member 432a Peripheral wall 432b Front plate 432c Opening 432d Flange 432e Mounting boss 432f First button Interior decoration part 423g Second button interior decoration part 433 Operation button left interior decoration substrate 434 Operation button right interior decoration substrate 435 Operation button upper interior decoration substrate 436 Operation button lower interior decoration substrate 437 Frame top lens decoration substrate 438 Operation button spring 439 Sensor holder 440 Press detection sensor 441 Production operation unit relay board 442 Relay board cover 442a Leg portion 450 Second base unit 451 Unit base 451a Body portion 451b Cover portion 451c Penetration port 451d Holding hole 451e Upper bearing portion 451f Lower bearing portion 451g Rotation restricting portion 452 Button shaft 454 Press detection sensor 460 Door frame side effect display device (second effect display means)
460A Door frame side second effect display device 461 Liquid crystal display device 462 Mounting bracket 470 Screen unit 471 Main screen 472 Sub-screen 472a Peripheral decorative portion 472b Screen portion 473 Upper shaft member 474 Lower shaft member 475 Operating gear member 475a Gear tooth 475b Stopper 475c Detection piece 476 Sub-screen decorative member 477 Sub-screen decorative substrate 477a LED
478 peripheral decorative member 480 upper bearing member 481 bearing member 481a concave portion 482 frame top lens decorative substrate 485 lower bearing member 490 rotation drive unit 491 unit case 492 switching drive motor 495 second transmission gear 500 projector 501 projector main body 502 lens section 505 projector Mounting member 505a Slit 506 Top cover 507 Rotation detection sensor 510 Buffer unit 511 Buffer member 512 Buffer base 512a Main body 512b Leg piece 515 Second effect operation unit relay board 516 Relay board cover 530 Door frame left side unit 531 Left unit base 531a Opening 532 Left unit diffusion lens member 532A Upper diffusion lens member 532B Lower diffusion lens member 532a Circular lens portion 532b Rectangular lens portion 532c Central diffusion reflection portion 532d Front diffusion lens portion 532e Input lens portion 532f Front reflection portion 534 Left unit upper decorative base 535 Left unit lower decorative base 536 Left unit decorative cover 537 Decorative member 550 Door frame right side unit 551 Right unit base 552 Door frame right side decorative substrate 552A Door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552B Door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552a Left LED
552b Right LED
552c middle LED
553 Right unit left diffuser lens member 553a Main body 553b Rear wall 553c Notch 553d Storage recess 553e Input lens 553f Side reflector 554 Right unit left decorative member 555 Right unit left cover 556 Right unit right diffuser lens member 556a Main body 556b Rear wall portion 556c Notch portion 556d Housing recess portion 556e Input lens portion 556f Side reflector portion 557 Right unit right decorative member 558 Right unit right cover 559 Right unit left light shielding member 559a Body portion 559b Rear wall portion 559c Notch portion 559d Reinforcing portion 560 Right unit Right light shielding member 561 Right unit decorative lens member 561a Circular decorative part 561b Multifaceted decorative part 562 Right unit decorative base 563 Right unit cover 564 Decorative member 570 Door frame top unit 571 Center base 572 Side base 573 Upper speaker 574 Unit body 574a Opening 574b Slit 574c Upper opening 574d Lower opening 574e Top left decorative portion 574f Top right decorative portion 575 Speaker cover 576 Top middle decorative member 577 Door frame top middle decorative substrate 578 Light guide member 578a Straight portion 578b Arc portion 578c Diffuse reflection portion 578d Diffusion Input section 579 Top left decorative lens member 579a Decorative lens section 580 Top right decorative lens member 580a Decorative lens section 581 Top middle left decorative member 582 Top middle right decorative member 583 Door frame top left decorative substrate 583a LED
584 Door frame top right decorative board 584a LED
585 Substrate base 586 Door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586a LED
587 door frame top center right decorative board 587a LED
588 light shielding member 589 door frame top unit relay board 590 relay board cover 591 upper cover 592 lower cover CL central axis (of operation button 410)
600 main body frame base 601 game board insertion opening 602 game board mounting part 603 game board regulation part 604 shooting device attachment part 605 cylinder insertion opening 606 opening for connection 607 opening for speaker 608 rear extension part 609 upper hinge attachment part 610 Lower hinge attachment part 615 Opening cover 616 Game board lock member 618 Door frame open switch 619 Main body frame open switch 620 Main body frame side upper hinge member 621 Upper hinge body 622 Main body frame upper hinge pin 623 Upper hinge hole for door frame 640 Main body frame side lower Hinge member 641 Lower hinge first body 643 Lower hinge second body 644 Door frame hinge hole 645 Regulating piece 660 Reinforcement frame 661 Left positioning member 680 Ball launcher 681 Launch base 682 Launch solenoid 683 Ball hammer 684 Launch rail 700 Locking unit 701 Unit base 702 Door frame hook 703 Outer frame hook 710 Key cylinder 784 External terminal plate 800 Dispensing unit 801 Dispensing unit base 802 Ball tank 803 Tank rail 804 Ball leveling member 820 Ball guiding unit 821 Front case 821a Ball guiding inlet 821b Ball Induction outlet 821c Guidance passage 821d Introduction part 821e Detection part 821f Meandering part 821g Notch 822 Rear case 822a Ball induction inlet 822b Ball induction outlet 822c Guidance passage 822d Introduction part 822e Detection part 822f Meandering part 822g Notch 823 Partition member 825 Shaft Movable piece member front 825a Movable piece 825b Shaft hole 825c Extension 825d Connecting portion 825e Weight mounting portion 825f Detection piece 825g Stopper piece 826 Movable piece member rear 826a Movable piece 826b Shaft hole 826c Extension 826d Connecting portion 826e Weight mounting portion 826f Detection piece 826g Stopper piece 827 Out-of-ball detection sensor 830 Dispensing device 831 Front box 831a Dispensing inlet 831b Dispensing outlet 831c Ball extracting outlet 831d Dispensing passage 831e Ball extracting passage 831f Guide shelf 831g Lever mounting portion 832 Rear box 832a Dispensing inlet 832b Dispensing outlet 832c Ball extraction outlet 832d Dispensing passage 832e Ball extraction passage 832f Guidance shelf 832g Lever mounting portion 833 Front Cover 834 Payout motor 835 Drive gear 836 Intermediate gear 837 Driven gear 837a Gear part 837b Detection piece 837c Connecting part 838 Shaft member 839 Payout blade 839a Base tube part 839b Front blade 839c Rear blade 839d Connected part 839e Ball storage part 840 Blade rotation detection Sensor 841 Partition plate 842 Dispensing detection sensor 843 Ball removal movable piece 843a Body portion 843b Axle tube portion 843c Protruding portion 843d Weight mounting portion 844 Ball removal lever 850 Upper full ball path unit 850a Upper dispensed ball socket 850b Upper ball removal inlet 850c Upper ball storage passage 850d Normal discharge port 850e Full tank discharge port 850f Partition piece 850g Upper ball extraction passage 850h Upper ball extraction outlet 851 Upper full tank base 852 Upper full tank cover 853 Dispensing device pressing member 854 Back cover mounting part 860 Lower full tank ball Route unit 860b Error LED indicator 869 Game ball rental device connection terminal plate 861 Normal taxiway 862 Full taxiway 863 Taxiway opening/closing door 863a Base 863b First door plate 863c Second door plate 863d Extension 863e Operation Projection 864 Closing spring 865 Lower ball extraction guideway 866 Upper case 867 Lower case 867a Boss 868 Frame peripheral relay terminal plate 869 Game ball rental device connection terminal plate 870 Guideway opening/closing door 870a Base 870b First door plate portion 870c Second door plate portion 870d Recessed portion 870e Operating protrusion 880 Main door relay terminal plate 882 Peripheral door relay terminal plate 900 Board unit 910 Board unit base 911 Door frame relay board 920 Speaker unit 921 Speaker 930 Power board box 934 Power switch 931 Power board 935 power control unit 935a synchronous rectification circuit 935b power factor improvement circuit 935c smoothing circuit 935d power generation circuit 940 interface control board box 950 payout control board box 951 payout control board 951a payout control filter circuit 952 payout control unit 952a payout control MPU
952b payout control input circuit 952c payout control output circuit 952d payout motor drive circuit 952da voltage switching circuit 952e CR unit input/output circuit 953 launch control section 953a launch control circuit 954 operation switch 980 back cover 1000 front component 1001 outer rail 1002 inner rail 1003 Out guide part 1004 Lower right rail 1005 Right rail 1006 Blocking part 1007 Backflow prevention member 1008 Crime prevention recess 1009 Positioning projection 1010 Mounting boss 1011 Notch 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel plate 1111 Out recess 1112 Opening 1113 Fitting hole 1114 Long hole 1115 Engaging stepped portion 1116 Inner rail fixing hole 1120 Panel holder 1121 Holding stepped portion 1122 Through hole 1123 Protruding pin 1124 Engaging claw 1125 Engaging piece 1126 Out port 1127 Notch 1128 Mounting hole 1129 Insertion port 1150 Game panel (Second embodiment )
1151 Out port 1152 Notch 1153 Insertion hole 1154 Inner rail fixing hole 1155 Mounting hole 1200 Board holder 1201 Discharge part

1300 main control unit 1310 main control board 1310a main control MPU
1310aa Main control CPU core 1310ae Main peripheral serial transmission port 1310aea Transmission shift register 1310aeb Transmission buffer register 1310aec Serial management unit 1310af WDT
1310an Hard random number circuit 1310b Main control input circuit 1310c Main control output circuit 1310ca Main control output circuit with reset function 1310cb Main control output circuit without reset function 1310d Main control solenoid drive circuit 1310e Power failure monitoring circuit 1300g +5V generation circuit 1300h Main control filter circuit 1320 Main control board box 1400 Function display unit 1401 Status indicator 1402 Normal symbol indicator 1403 First special symbol indicator 1404 First special pending number indicator 1405 Second special symbol indicator 1406 Second special pending number indicator 1407 Round display Device 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1510b +3.3V generating circuit 1511 Peripheral control section 1511a Peripheral control MPU
1511aa Peripheral control CPU core 1511ab Peripheral control built-in RAM
1511ac Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ad Peripheral control bus controller 1511ae Peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511af Peripheral control built-in WDT
1511ag Peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ak Peripheral control A/D converter 1511ai Peripheral bus 1511ah Internal bus 1511b Peripheral control ROM
1511c Peripheral control RAM
1511d Peripheral control SRAM
1511e Peripheral control external WDT
1511h External bus 1512 Liquid crystal display controller 1512a Sound source built-in VDP
1512b liquid crystal and sound control ROM
1512c audio data transmission IC
1512d Transmitter IC for door frame side effect
1512e differential circuit 1512f forced switching circuit 1520 peripheral control board box 1600 game board side effect display device (first effect display means)
1600a liquid crystal module 1600b backlight power supply 1601 left fixing piece 1602 right fixing piece 2000 front unit 2001 general winning opening 2002 first starting opening 2003 gate section 2004 second starting opening 2005 big winning opening 2100 starting opening unit 2101 unit base 2102 ball receiver 2103 Front decoration base member 2104 Front center decoration board 2105 Front decoration member 2105a Fake part 2106 Guide passage member 2107 Starting solenoid 2108 Attacker solenoid 2200 Side unit bottom 2300 Side unit top 2500 Center accessory 2520 Warp entrance 2522 Warp exit 2530 Stage 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3010a Opening 3010b Liquid crystal mounting part 3010c Fixed groove 3010d Notch 3010e Fixed piece 3042 Effect drive board box 3050 Back left center decoration unit 3100 Back bottom rear movable effect unit 3200 Back top left movable effect unit 3300 Back left movable effect unit 3400 back upper middle movable production unit 3500 back lower front movable production unit 4002 first start opening sensor 4003 gate sensor 4004 second start opening sensor 4005 count sensor 4020 general winning opening sensor 4024 magnetic detection sensor 4026 vibration detection sensor 4161 panel relay board 4165 RTC control unit 4165a RTC
4165b Battery 4165aa Built-in RAM
4170 Lamp drive board 4180 Motor drive board

1513 Peripheral serial data output means 4200 Upper decorative drive board 4205 Safety circuit 4210 CMOSIC
4220 Driver IC
4222 Driver IC
4224 Driver IC
4226 Driver IC
4228 Driver IC
4230 monitoring circuit 4232 IC
4250 parallel/serial IC (drive serial data output means)
4300a to 4300e Stepping motor 5102 Harness

4450 Effect display drive board 4450v Liquid crystal module circuit 4450x Door frame side effect module power supply circuit 4450y Door frame side effect module backlight power supply circuit

Claims (1)

A game machine having a front door,
an upper plate provided on the front door;
a bulging portion having a decoration decorating the front of the upper plate and configured to bulge forward of the front door;
A predetermined effect operation unit arranged in the arrangement area formed in the bulging portion,
The arrangement area includes an opening area in which at least a part of the front wall of the bulging portion is opened,
the vertical dimension of the opening region is larger than the vertical dimension of the upper plate,
At least a part of the upper tray and a game ball positioned below the upper tray and ejected from the upper tray flows from the outside through the arrangement area in a state where the effect operation unit is removed from the arrangement area. A gaming machine characterized in that at least a part of an inflow part that flows in is visible.

Images